KL 16^ .«ASi ^ mmmmMmw T. iVj ^ ^::^iaif, lni^r^t$itg trf ^;alif0^|ttia, ^6^^Sa5S^#>35 -%j .,..«:' ?ti.->- ^ ^ i:SC^^^- -^^^ ^^y^^/^r- tfiaKjlou\Jl^ ^ ' ff TO THE CLASSICAL TEAQHERS OF OUR COUNTRY, THIS ATTEMPT TO IMPROVE A WORK ORIGINALLY OF GREAT MERIT AND DESERVED CELEBRITY, IS RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED, BY THEIR FELLOW-LABOURER5 THE EDITOR. P/\:iC?g7.A3.I^S2MAi/y/ PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. The first edition of this Grammar, of two thousand copies, having been sold in less than ten months, the editor has careful- ly revised the present Stereotype edition, and has endeavoured, by some emendations and additions, to make it still more worthy of the favourable estimation of the public. He feels indeed, with others, that it is a great evil to have the successive editions of school books continually undergoing alterations and enlarge- ments ; but as this edition was to be sent forth to the world in a permanent form, he thought it advisable to introduce a few alterations, and, in his view, decided improvements, without changing the form or character of the work. Accordingly, by enlarging the page a little, and compressing the four conjugated verbs into a smaller space, he has been enabled to introduce the new matter without increasing the size of the book. But these alterations will occasion little or no difficulty in referring from this edition to the former, or from that to this : for in the Syntax, to which reference is more frequently made, and where the pages of the two editions differ most, the number of the rule will be an unerring guide. Soon, however, the old edition will be entirely gone ; and where this alone is used, the most minute references can be made, not only in the Syntax, as be- fore, but throughout the whole book, by the number of the sec- tion — the Etymology being numbered from 5 1 to J 263, the Syn- tax from 5 1 to 5 246, and the Prosody from ^ 1 to 5 125. In justice to himself, and in reply to some remarks that have been made in a certain quarter, from interested motives, * that this edition is little or no better than others of the same work,' the editor deems it his duty to state, somewhat more in detail than formerly, in what respects his edition differs from all OTHERS, and what it contains over and above all other editions of Adam's grammar, published in this country. 1 * 5 VI PREFACE. 1. The remarks on Gender, page 19, are new. 2. The lists of regular Nouns of the first, second, and fourth declensions, found in other editions, have been thrown out of this, as entirely useless ; and the spaces they would have occupi- ed have been filled with lists of Irregular Nouns, and those which present some peculiarities. See the fists 5 10, 11, 12 and 13, on page 21 ; — the Alphabetical list of Irregular Nouns on pages 46, 47, 48, 49 and 50;— the lists of Irregular Nouns, 5 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63 and 64, which have been much enlarged ; and the lists, 5 65, 66, 67 and 68, which are entirely new ; — and the termi- nations of the five declensions, on page 53. 3. The following entirely new matter is also to be found among the NOUNS. The remarks on the several cases, with their powers explained, \ 15; — the declension of Deus in full, under 5 22 ; — the declension of Delos, of Androgeos, and of barbiton, under 5 23 ; — the exceptions in the vocative singular, under 5 43 ; — the third and sixth paragraphs under the fifth declension, under 5 51 ; — and the remarks on Proper Names, 5 70. Besides this new matter, the Defective Nouns, 5 54, have been arranged in alphabetical order, and the fist of Redundant Nouns, 5 69, has been much enlarged. 4. Among the ADJECTIVES, exceptions 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5, un- der 5 82, are greatly enlarged, as will readily be seen on a com- parison with any of the common editions of this work. The two first paragraphs on page 73, upon the numeral letters, are entirely new ; as are also the three first paragraphs under 5 91. The paragraph 2, under 5 101, is greatly enlarged, and the whole article 5 102, upon Irregular and Unusual Comparison, is new. 5. In the PRONOUNS, observations 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 and 21, under 5 108, are entirely new. 6. In the VERBS, the remarks on the various tenses, com- prising all of 5 104, are new : fikewise the second, third and fourth paragraphs under 5 115. The Deponent and Common Verbs, 5 128, have a different arrangement from that which ob- tains in other editions of this grammar, they being placed here next to the verbs which are given as examples of the several Conjugations. The formations of the tenses under 5 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136, 137, 138 and 139, are greatly enlarged. PREFACE. Vll 7. The most important alteration, perhaps, that has been made by the editor in his edition of Adam's Grammar, is to be found in the Conjugation of the Verbs. It is well known to every classical scholar, that while the Perfect Participle of a greater part of the Latin Verbs, is in use, the Supine is rarely found in the classics. It is therefore obviously proper that Latin Verbs should be conjugated with the Perfect Participle, rather than with the Supine. Dr. Adam, on the contrary, in conjugating the Verbs, gives the Supine almost uniformly, without any classi- cal authority for its support, and all the common editions have followed carefully in his steps. For instance, the Boston edition of Adam's, from page 118 to page 164, is the same as the old Edinburgh edition of 1793, totidem verbis, with the trifling ex- ception of five or six lines of the Irregular Verb Prosum. Thus have the errors of the old editions of this work been perpetuat- ed. In this edition, however, the editor has rejected entwely Dr. Adam's article on the verbs, comprising about thirty-tivo pages^ and has inserted matter altogether new, comprising about sixty- Jive pages, from page 112 to page 176. The Verbs are, there- fore, conjugated with the Perfect Participle, if it be used ; if not, the verb has an asterisk (*) prefixed to it, and one of the future participles is inserted. The futures RUS and DUS, when found, are indicated by the letters R and D, and the Supines UM and U, by M and U. In the notes under the verbs will be found such parts of them as seldom occur in the Latin authors, with the classical authorities for each. In the common editions of Adam's, not a single classical authority is given ; while in this, there are — In the First Conjugation, 774 " " Second, " 405 " " Third, " 1147 " " Fourth, " 360 " " Irregular and Defective verbs, 424 3110 In all, THREE THOUSAND ONE HUNDRED AND TEN classical citations. The editor is aware that much space has, in consequence of these numerous additions, been given to the Verbs, but he be- lieves that it could not be better filled. Not only will it afford Vlll PREFACE* the advanced scholar much satisfaction to be able to ascertain readily, whether any part of a verb which he may wish to em- ploy, has been used by the best Roman writers, but it is highly important that the scholar in the grammar-school should begin right, and not, in after years, be obliged to do, what all know is so hard to be done — unlearn what has been learned amiss. 8. The articles \ 204, 205, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218, on the Defective Verbs, are new. 9. The articles \ 222, 223, 224 and 225, on Redundant Verbs, are new. 10. The Remarks on the Verb, \ 230, on pages 176, 177 and 178, are not found in any other edition. 11. In the PARTICIPLES, articles \ 233 and 239, are new. 12. It will be seen that the PREPOSITIONS are entirely re- modelled, and instead of the meagre page, which is given to them in all the preceding editions of Adam's Grammar, they here occupy eight pages. The original import of each is en- deavoured to be given and illustrated, and the secondary mean- ings traced to the primary. See pages 184 — 192. To the PRE- POSITIONS IN COMPOSITION, four pages have been devoted instead of a third of a page, as in the Edinburgh edition. See pages 192—195. 13. Articles 5 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262 and 263, on the Signification of Words, are entirely new. 14. In the SYNTAX, the following articles are entirely new : — the remarks on Simple and Compound Sentences, 5 4 and 5 : — articles 5 T', 8, 9, 10 and 11, under Rule II; — articles \ 24, 25, 26 and 27, under Rule III ; — article \ 35, under Rule IV ; — articles { 44, 45, 47 and 50, under Rule VI, explanatory of the govern- ment of the Genitive by another noun, and the different senses in which the Genitive is used; — article \ 51, under Rule VI, ex- plaining the use of the Dative for the Genitive ; — article \ 60, under Rule VII, giving the different significations of the * Abla- tive of duality;' — article \(d7, under Rule VIII; — article 5 73, under Rule IX ; — article \ 82, under Rule X, comprising nearly two pages of adjectives governing the Genitive, with the classi- cal authorities ;— articles \ 90 and 91, before Rule XII, explaining PREFACE. IX the force and use of the Dative case ; — articles 5 108 and 109, under Rule XIII ; — the note explanatory of Rule XV, and arti- cles 5 n8» 119, 120, under that Rule;— the note to Rule XVII, and under this Rule, part of articles 5 131 and 135, and the whole of the articles 5 132, 133, 136, 138, 141, 142 and 143,. the three last comprising about four pages of verbs, governing the Dative, that are * variously construed ;' — article 5 145, explaining what are usually considered as * redundant Datives ;' — articles } 148, 149, 150, under Rule XVIII ;— observation 3, under Rule XIX ;— nearly all of observation 1, under Rule XX; — article 5 156, un- der Rule XXI; — the note to Rule XXII; — article } 161, under Rule XXIII ; — observations 3 and 4, under Rule XXVI ; — obser- vations 2, 3 and 4, under Rule XXVII; — articles J 172 and 173, under Rule XXVIII, explaining the construction when the active is changed into the passive verb ; — observations 6 and 7, under Rule XXX ; — part of observation 2, and all of observations 6 and 7, under Rule XXXI ; — observations 4 and 5, under Rule XXXVIII ; — part of observation 3, and all observations 4 and 5, under Rule XXXIX ; — most of article } 196, and all of article 5 197, under Rule XL ; — Rules XLII and XLIII; — observation 3, under Rule LIII ;— articles 5 220, 221, 222, 223 and 224, giving rules for the use of the Relative with the Indicative and Subjunc- tive modes ; — and article 5 234, under Rule LXII. These additions to the Syntax, comprise about SEVEN HUNDRED LINES, while in all the other editions of Adam's Grammar, which have lallen under the editor's notice, this division of it (the Syntax) corresponds exactly with the Syntax in the old Edinburgh edition of 1793, with but a few trifling exceptions. 15. In PROSODY, the following articles are new ; — article 5 17 ; — exceptions 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8, under 5 40; — the 9th, 10th and 13th, observations under { 42; — exception 4, under 5 49 ; — article 5 62; — exceptions 1, 2, 3 and 4, under 5 63; — all of articles 5 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91 and 92 ; — which present a clear view of all the different metres used by Horace;— and articles 5 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124 and 125, which exhibit all the combinations of the preceding metres found in the same poet. Besides all these new articles, the " Figures of Dic- tion" have been enlarged from the old editions ; and many new subdivisions made throughout the Prosody. For instance, ex- X PREFACE. ceptions 2, 3 and 4, under 5 48, are, in the other editions of Adam's comprised in one : but they are entirely different ' in character, and should be made distinct by division, both from the fact of their difference, and for easy and intelligible refer- ence. Such are the chief additions which the Editor has made to Adam's Latin Grammar, and by which, he trusts this work, originally of great merit, and deserved celebrity, has been ren- dered still more valuable. The original work has been used nearly half a century in all the best schools and colleges in our country, and those who have temporarily resorted to other gram- mars, have at length come back to this. It is true that some of the Rules of Syntax, of the original Edinburgh editions, and of those hitherto published in this country, have not been expressed with the greatest clearness and precision, but every intelligent instructor would of course explain and illustrate whatever there appeared to be that was ambiguous or obscure. Taken as a whole, however, the original work of Dr. Adam has risen higher in the estimation of the editor, the oflener and the more critical- ly he has examined it. It has been his aim in this edition, to ex- plain the little that was ambiguous, and to illustrate the little that was obscure ; and, by supplying some deficiencies, to make it a manual to which the student of the higher classics might constantly refer with pleasure and satisfaction. Whether he has succeeded, he leaves for the decision of those who are decided- ly the best qualified to judge — the Classical Teachers of our country. THE EDITOR. Philadelphia, January 1, 1837. r-o CONTENTS. Page Pronunciation of Latin 11 PART I. Orthography, which treats of let- ters 15 Diphthongs 16 Syllables 16 PART II. Etymology, which treats of Words . 17 Division of Words, or Parts of Speech 17 I. Noun or Substantive 18 Latin Nouns 19 Genders 19 Number 22 Case 22 Declension of Nouns 23 First Declension 24 Second Declension 25 Third Declension 29 Fourth Declension 50 Fifth Declension 52 Irregular Nouns 53 Heterogeneous 53 Defective in Cases 56 Defective in Number 58 Redundant 62 Division of Nouns according to their Signification and Deri- vation 65 Adjective 67 First and Second Declension ... 67 Third Declension 69 Rules for the formation of the Ablative 70 Numeral Adjectives 72 Comparison of Adjectives 76 Irregular Comparison 77 n. Pronoun 79 1. Simple Pronouns 80 2. Compound Pronouns 82 3. Reciprocals 84 • V -■-' m. Verb ..Trrrn r:'.-^:. 85 Voice 87 Mode 87 Tense 87 Number and Person 89 Conjugation of Verbs 89 First Conjugation 93 Second Conjugation 97 Third Conjugation 99 Fourth Conjugation 102 Deponent and Common Verbs . 104 Formation of Tenses 106 Signification of Tenses 109 Verbs of the First Conjugation 112 Second 122 Third 129 Fourth 150 Irregular Verbs 159 Neuter Passive 168 Defective 168 Impersonal 171 Redundant Verbs 172 Frequentative 175 Inceptive 175 Desiderative 175 Remarks on the Verb 176 IV. Participles 178 Gerunds 180 Supines 180 V. Adverbs 180 VI. Prepositions 184 Prepositions in Composition ... 192 VII. Interjections 195 VIII. Conjunctions 196 Signification of Words 197 Terminations of Words 199 PART IIL Syntax or Construction 202 Division of Sentences into Simple and Compound 203 11 Xll CONTENTg. Page I. Simple Sentences 203 Concord, or Agreement of Words 203 Government of Words in Sim- ple Sentences 208 Government of Substantives . . 208 Government of Adjectives .... 213 Government of Verbs 221 1. Verbs governing one case ... 221 2. Verbs governing two cases . 232 Construction of Passive Verbs . 237 Impersonal Verbs 239 Construction of the Infinitive . . 241 Construction of Participles, &c. 242 Gerunds 243 Supines 245 Construction of Adverbs 246 Prepositions .. 249 Interjections... 251 Construction of Circumstances 251 Compound Sentences 256 Construction of Relatives 256 Construction of Conjunctions .. 260 Construction of Comparatives . 263 Ablative Absolute 265 APPENDIX TO SYNTAX. II. Figures of Syntax 267 Ellipsis 267 Pleonasm 268 Enallage 268 Hyperbaton 269 III. Analysis and Translation 270 IV. Different kinds of Style 273 V. Figures of Rhetoric 274 1. Figures of Words, or Tropes 274 2. Repetition of Words 277 PART IV. Page 3. Figures of Thought 278 Prosody, which treats of the Quan- tity of Syllables, of Accent, and * Verse 281 Quantity of Syllables 282 1. Quantity of First and Middle Syllables 283 2. Quantity of Final Syllables 289 Quantity of Derivatives 292 Quantity of Compounds 293 Verse 294 Different Kinds of Feet 294 Different Kinds of Verse 295 Caesura 296 Iambic Measure 298 Choriambic 299 Ionic 300 Figures in Scanning 301 Figures of Diction 303 Different Kinds of Poems 304 Combination of Verses in Poems . . . 305 Different Metres used by Horace, and their Combinations 306 Index to the Odes of Horace 309 APPENDIX. Punctuation, Capitals, &c 310 Abbreviations, &c 31 1 Division of the Roman Months .... 311 Of the Reckoning of Money 313 Roman Measures of Length 314 Measures of Extent 315 Measures of Capacity 315 and 316 Weights 317 and 318 Moneys 319 and 320 ( 13) THE PRONUNCIATION OF LATLN. The following rules for the Pronunciation of Latin, are such as pre- vail in the English Universities, and in the principal Colleges in the United States. They are in accordance with the standard laid down by Walker, (which it is desirable should be adopted wherever the English language is spoken,) that the Latin should be accented and pronounced by us, according to the prevailing analogies of our own language, without regard to the prosodial accent and quantity of the ancients. RULES FOR THE ACCENT. § 1® In words of two syllables, the penult is always accented ; as, pd'-ter, heV'lum, na'-vis. § 2» In words of more than two syllables, the accent is regulated by the quantity of the penult. Of this there are three cases: 1. If the penult is long, it is accented ; as, a-ma!-ham, a-mi'-cus, se-cu'-rus. 2. If the penult be short, the accent is on the antepenult ; as, hom'-i' nisj leg'-e-re. 3. If the penult be common, the accent in prose is on the antepenult ; as, vol'-u-cris, ih'-i-que, ten'-e-hris : but genitives in ius, in which i is common, accent their penult in prose ; as, u-ni'-us, iS'ti'-us. RULES FOR THE SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 1. OF THE VOWELS. § 3» In Monosyllables when the vowel is the final letter it has its long sound ; as, da, me, si, do, tu : otherwise it has its short sound ; u.8,jam, et,4n, nan, nunc, Exc. 1. Custom, in disregard of analogy, has given to all termina- tions in es, and the plural cases in os, the long sound ; as, es, amdres, pes, pronounced like the English word ease: nos, hos, popidos, pro- nounced like ose in dose. Exc. 2. Post is pronounced like the same word in English: so also are its compounds ; as, post-qiiam ; but not its derivatives ; as, pos- tre-mus, § 4» In Dyssyllables the vowel of the first syllable, when it comes before another vowel, or a single consonant, has the long sound ; as, Ca-to, re-i, i-hi, ho-nos cu-i : but when it comes before two consonants 2 14 PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN. or a double consonant, it has the short sound ; as, tan-dem, bel-lum, il-le, lon-guSf bux-us. Exc. If the vowel be followed by a mute and a liquid, it has the long sound ; as, sa'-cra, § 5» In Polysyllables, when the penult is accented, its vowel before another vowel, or single consonant, has the long sound; as, o-rd'-tor^ spe-ci-e-i, a-mi'-cus^ mul-to' -rum, se-cu-rus : but before two consonants or a double consonant, the short sound ; as, a-man'-tur, dO' cen'-tur, ex-tin'-guo, res-pon'-dens, Ti-hul'-lus. V 6« But if in Polysyllables the antepenult be accented, its vowel has the short sound ; as, trad'-i-tu, ex-er'-ci-tus, sid'-e-ra, ser- mon'-i-busj tan-tum' -mo-do. To this rule there are the following ex- ceptions : Exc. 1. When u comes before a single consonant, and when an ac- cented vowel comes before another vowel, they have the long sound; as, du'-bi-e, ju'-di-ces, o-ce'-a-nus, mu-li'-e-res, pro-cu-bu'-e-rant, Exc. 2. When the penultimate vowel is e or i before another vowel, the antepenultimate vowel, except i, has the long sound ; as, gra'-ti-a, ag-gre'-di-or in-o'-pi-a, mu'4i-er, per-Jid'-i-e, Scip'-i-o, 11. OF THE DIPHTHONGS. ^ Tfm jE and (E are pronounced as e w^ould be in the same situation ; as, (b'-Ius, pce'-na, ccct'-e-ra. V 8» At, ei, ot, and yi, generally have the vowels pronounced separately in prose. When followed by another vowel, the i is joined with that vowel, and takes the sound of y in youth ; as, Maia, Pompeius ; pronounced Ma'-ija, Pom-pe'-yus, § 0« An, when a diphthong, is pronounced like aw ; as, laus, pro- nounced like the English laws. In the termination of Greek proper names, the letters au are pronounced separately ; as, Ar-che-la'-us. V lO* Eu and ui when diphthongs are pronounced like long u and i; as, Or-pheus, cui, huic, III. OF THE CONSONANTS. § !!• C^ and G are hard before a, o, and u, and sofl before e, i, y; as. carpo like card, cera like cent, cdo '* colt, cibus " circle, culmen " cucumber, cycnus " cycle. gaza " gave, getidus « gelid, gorgon gone, gigas " giant. guslus " gust, gyrus gypsey. §12* Ch has always the sound of k, as, charta^ machma, pro- nounced kar'-ta, mak'- ■e-na. THE RUDIMENTS OP LATIN GRAMMAR. § !• Grammar is the art of speaking and writing correctly. Latin Grammar is the art of speaking and writ- ing the Latin language correctly. The Rudiments of Grammar are plain and easy instructions, teach- ing beginners the first principles and rules of it. Grammar treats of sentences, and the several parts of which they are compounded. Sentences consist of words ; words consist of one or more syllables ; syllables of one or more letters. So that Letters, Syllables, Words, and Sentences, iiKike up the whole subject of Grammar. LETTERS. § 2© A letter is the mark of a sound, or of an articulation of sound. That part of Grammar, which treats of letters, is called Ortho- graphy. The letters in Latin are twenty-five : A, a ; B, b ; C, c ; D, d ; E, e; F, f; G, g; H, h; I, i; J, j ; K, k; L, 1 ; M, m; N, n; O, o; P, p; Q, q; R, r; S, s; T, t; U, u; V, v; X, x; Y, y ; Z, z.* Letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants. Six are vowels ; a, 6, i, o, ^^ y. All the rest are consonants. A vowel makes a full sound by itself; as, a, e. A consonant cannot make a perfect sound with- out a vovv^el ; as, 6, d. A vowel is properly called a simple sound ; and the sounds formed by the concourse of vowels and consonants, articulate sounds. * In English there is one letter more, viz. W. 15 16 DIPHTHONGS. SYLLASLES. Consonants are divided into Mutes, Semi-voivcls, and Double Con- sonants. A mute is so called, because it entirely stops the passage of the voice ; as, p in ap. The mutes are, p, b ; t, d ; c, k, q, and g ; but 5, d, and g, perhaps may more properly be termed Semi-mutes; because their sounds may be continued, whereas the sound of p, t, and /c, cannot be pro- longed. A semi-vowel, or half vowel, does not entirely stop the passage of the voice ; thus, al. The semi- vowels are Z, m, n, r, s,f. The first four of these are call- ed Liquids, particularly I and r ; because they flow softly and easily after a mute in the same syllable ; as, bla, stra. The mutes and semi-vowels may be thus distinguished. In naming the mutes, the vowel is put after them ; as, pe, be, &c. ; but in naming the semi-vowels, the vowel is put before them ; as, el, em, &c. The double consonants are, x, z, and, as some think, j. X is made up of cs, ks, or gs. In Latin, z, and likewise k and y, are found only in words derived from the Greek. DIPHTHONGS. § 3« A diphthong consists of two vowels forming one syllable, and pronounced by one impulse of the voice. If the sound of both vowels be distinctly heard, it is called a Proper Diphthong ; if not, an Improper Diphthong. The proper diphthongs in Latin are commonly reckoned three ; au, en, ei ; as in aurum, Eurus, omneis. To these some, not improperly, add other three ; namely, ai, as in Maia ; oi, as in Troia ; and ui, as in Ilarpuia, or in cui, and huic, pronounced as monosyllables. The improper diphthongs in Latin are two ; ae, or when the vowels are written together, ce ; as, aetas, or cetas, oe, or ce ; as, poena, or pmna ; in both of which the sound' of the e only is heard. The an- cients commonly Vvrote the vowels separately ; thus, aetas, poena. SYLLABLES. § 4© A syllable is the sound of one letter, or of several letters, pronounced by one impulse of the voice ; as, a, ac?, cum. In Latin there are as many syllables in a word, as there are vowels or diphthongs in it; unless when u with any other vowel comes after g, q, or s ; as in lingua, qui, suadeo ; where the two vowels are not reckoned a diphthong, because the sound of the u vanishes, or is little heard. WORDS. — PAIITS OP SPEECH. 17 Words consisting of one syllable are called Mo- nosyllahles ; of two. Dissyllables ; and of more than two, Polysyllables. But all words of more than one syllable are commonly called Polysyllables. In dividing words into syllables, we are chiefly to be directed by the ear. Compound words should be divided into the parts of which they are made up ; as, db-utor, in-opSy proptSr-ea, et-enim, vel-ut, &c. Observe, a long syllable is marked with a horizontal line, [-] ; as in amdre ; or with a circumflex accent, [ a ] ; as in amdris. A short syl- lable is marked with a curved line, [ ^ ] ; as in omnibus. What pertains to the quantity of syllables and to verse will be treat- ed of hereafter. WORDS. § 5e Words are articulate sounds, significant of thought. That part of Grammar which treats of words is called Etymology or Analogy.^ AH words whatever are either simple or compound, 'primitive or de- rivative. The division of words into simple and compound is called their Figure ; into primitive and derivative, their Species, or sort. A simple word is that which is not made up of more than one ; as, pius, pious ; ego, I ; doceo, I teach. A compound word is that which is made up of two or more words ; or of one word and some syllable added ; as, impius, impious ; dedoceo, I unteach ; egomet, I myself. A primitive word is that which comes from no other ; as, pius, pious ; disco, I learn ; doceo, I teach. A derivative word is that which comes from another word ; as, pietas, piety ; doctrlna, learning. The different classes into which we divide words are called Parts of Speech. PARTS OF SPEECH. § 6. The parts of speech in Latin are eight, viz : 1. Noun^ Pronoun^ Verb ^ Participle ; declined. * All words may be divided into three kinds ; namely, 1. such as mark the names of things ; 2. such as denote what is affirmed concerning things ; and 3. such as are significant only in conjunction with other words; or what are called SnhstantiveSy Attributives, and Connectives. Thus in the following sentence, " The diligent boy reads the lesson carefully in the school, and at home," the words boy, lesson, school, home, are the names we give to the things spoken of; diligent, reads, carefully] express what is affirmed concerning the boy ; the, in, and, at, are only signilicant when joined with the other words of the sentence. 2* 18 NOUN. SUBSTANTIVE. 2. Adverb^ Preposition^ Interjection^ and Conjunc- | tion; undeclined.^ NOUN. A noun is either substantive or adjective.t j SUBSTANTIVE. § 7© A Substantive, or noun, is the name of any person, place, or thing ; as, 6oy, scJiool, book. Substantives arc of two sorts ; proper and com- mon names. Proper names are the names appropriated to in- dividuals ; as the names of persons and places ; such are Ccesar^ Rome, Common names stand for whole kinds, contain- ing several sorts; or for sorts, containing many j individuals under them ; as, ajiimal, man^ beast^ Jish^ fowl^ &ic. Every particular being should have its own proper name ; but this is : impossible, on account of their innumerable multitude; men have j therefore been obliged to give the same common name to such things as agree together in certain respects. These form what is called a genus, or kind ; a species, or sort. A proper name may be used for a common, and then in English it has the article joined to it; as, when we say of some great conqueror, "He is an Alexander;" or, " ZAe Alexander of his age." To proper and common names may be added a third class of nouns, which mark the names of qualities, and are called abstract nouns ; as, hardness, goodness, whiteness, virtue, justice, piety, &c. V/hen we speak of things, we consider them as one or more. This is what we call Number. When one thing is spoken of, a noun is said to be of the singular number ; when two or more, of the plural. * Those words or parts of speech are said to be declined, which receive different changes on their last syllables, or their terminations. The changes made upon words are by grammarians called Accidents. Of old, all words, which admit of different terminations, were said to be declined. But Declension is now applied only to nouns. The changes made upon the verb are called Conjugation. tThe adjective seems to be improperly called noim : it is only a word added to a subslantive or noun, expressive of its qi«ality ; and therefore should be considered as a different part of speech. But as the substantive and adjective together express but one object, and in Latin are declined after the same manner, they have both been coraprcliendcu under the same general name. LATIN NOUNS. GENDERS. 19 LATIN NOUNS. To Latin nouns belong Gender^ Number^ and Case. GENDERS. § 89 There are three genders ; Masculine^ Femi- nine^ and Neuter. Gender is the distinction of sex. In the nature of thing's, therefore, there are but two genders, the Masculine and Feminine. But in Latin, Gender is not only a natural distinction, but also a grammatical distri- bution of nouns into sorts or kinds, with respect to the terminations of adjectives with which they are construed. Liber, * a book,' is mas- culine, because it is joined with that termination of adjectives which is applied only to males. Ratio, * reason,' is feminine, because it is joined with that termination of adjectives which is applied only to females. Opus, *a work,' is neuter, because it is joined with that termination of adjectives which cannot be applied either to males or females. Neuter is a pure Latin word, signifying * neither :' when a noun, therefore, is said to be of the neuter gender, it means simply that it is * neither' masculine nor feminine. Grammarians distinguish the genders by the pronoun hie, to mark the masculine ; hcec, the feminine ; and hoc, the neuter. Nouns which have either the masculine or feminine gender, accord- ing to the sense, are called common ; as, conjux, * a spouse ;' hie con- jux, ' this husband ;' hcec conjux, * this wife ;' parens, * a parent ;' meus parens, * my father ;' mea parens, * my mother.' When under one gender a noun signifies both the sexes of brutes, it is called epicene ; as, hie passer, * a sparrow,' male or female. The distinction between the common and epicene may be thus marked. Words of the common gender are those which under one termination include both genders, but for distinction require an adjective of masculine or feminine termination; as, hie parens, or hcDc parens; but epicene words are those which express both sexes under one fixed gender; as, hie lepus, the male or female hare. 1^ hie parens might denote both father and mother, it would be epicene; but since for mother we must say hcec parens, it is common. If we might say hie lepus, this male hare, hcec lepus this female hare, lepus would be common ; but as hie lepus expresses both, it is epicene. General Rules concerning Gender. § 9« 1. Names of males are masculine; as, Homerus, Homer; pater, a father ; poeta, a poet. 2. Names of females are feminine ; as, Helena, Helen ; mulier, a woman ; uxor, a wife ; mater, a mother ; soror, a sister ; Tellus, the goddess of the earth. 3. Nouns which signify either the male or female, are of the com- mon gender; that is, either masculine or feminine; as, hie bos, an ox; h(cc bos, a cow ; hie parens, a father, hcec parens, a mother. 20 OUSERVATIONS. 4. Nouns admitting either the masculine or feminine gender, inde- pendently of the sense, are called doubtful ; as, Jiic or h(BC anguis, ' a snake,' either masculine or feminine ; hie or hoc vulgiis, * the rabble,' either masculine or neuter. OBSERVATIONS. Ous. 1. The names of brute animals commonly follow the gender of their termination. Such are the names of wild beasts, birds, fishes, and insects, in which the distinction of sex is either not easily discerned, or seldom attended to. Thus passer^ a sparrow, either male or female, is masculine, be- cause nouns in er are masculine ; so dquila, an eagle, either male or female, is feminine, because nouns in a of the first declension are femi- nine. These are called epicene, or promiscuous nouns. When any particular sex is marked, we usually add the word mas or femina ; as, mas passer, a male sparrow ; femina passer, a female sparrow. Obs. 2. A proper name, for the most part, follows the gender of the general name under which it is comprehended. Thus, the names of months, winds, rivers, and mountains, are mas- culine ; because mensis, vcntus, mons, and Jluvius, are masculine ; as, hie Aprilis, April ; hie AquUo, the north wind; hie Africus, the south west wind ; hie Tiber is, the river Tiber ; hie OtJirys, a hill in Thessaly. But many of these follow the gender of their termination ; as, hcec Matrona, the river Marne in France; h(BC Mtna, a mountain in Sicily ; hoc Soraetc, a hill in Italy. In like manner, the names of countries, towns, trees, and ships are feminine, because terra or regio, urbs, arbor, and ndvis, are feminine ; as, hcee Egyptus, Egypt ; Sdmos, an island of that name ; Corinthus, the city of Corinth ; pomus, an apple-tree; Centaurus, the name of a ship. Thus also the names of poems, hac Bias, -ados, and Odyssea, the two poems of Homer ; haec JEneis, -Idos, a poem of Virgil ; hcee Eunuchiis, one of Terence's comedies. The gender, however, of many of these depends on the termination; thus, hie Pontus, a country of that name ; hie Suhno, -onis ; Pes si- nus, -untis ; Hydrus, -untis, names of towns ; hoic Per sis, -idis, the kingdom of Persia ; Carthago, -mis, the city Carthage ; hoc Albion, Britain ; hoc Ccere, Redte, Prceneste, Tibur, Ilium, names of towns. But some of these are also found in the feminine; as, Gelidd Prceneste. Juvenal, iii. 190; Alta Ilion. Ovid. Met. xiv. 466. The following names of trees are masculine, oleaster, oleastri, a wild olive-tree ; rhamnus, the white bramble. The following are masculine or feminine ; cytisus, a kind of shrub ; Tubus, the bramble-bush; larix, the larch-tree; lotus, the lote-tree; cupressus, the cypress-tree. The first two, however, are oflener mas- culine ; the rest oflener feminine. Those in um are neuter ; as, buxum, the bush, or box-tree ; ligustrum, a privet; so likewise are suber, -eris, the cork-tree; slier, -eris, the osier ; robur, -oris, oak of the hardest kind ; deer, -eris, the maple- tree. OBSERVATIONS. 21 The piace where trees or shrubs grow is commonly neuter ; as, ar- bustum, quercetum, esculetum, sdlictum, fruticetum, &c. a place where trees, oaks, beeches, willows, shrubs, &c., grow; also the names of fruits and timber ; as, pomum or malum, an apple ; plrurn, a pear ; ebenumt ebony, &c. But from this rule there are various exceptions. § 10» The following nouns are Masculine and Feminine, both in sense and grammatical construc- tion: Adolcscens, a young man or woman. Aff'mis, a relation by mar- riage. Antistes, a chief priest. Auclor, an author. Augur, an augur. Bos, an ox, or cow. Caiiis, a dog, or bitch. Civis, a citizen. Comes, a companion. Conjux, a husband, or wile. Censors, a consort. Conviva, a guest Custos, a iceeper. Dnx, a leader. Exul, an exile. Hospes, a host, a guest. Hostis, an enemy. Infans, an infant. luferjjres, an interpreter. Judex, a judge. Juvmis, a youth. Miles, a soldier. Muntceps, a burgess. Nemo, nobody. Par, a mate, husband, or wife. Parens, a parent Patruelis, a cousin-german by the father's side. Prces, a surety. PrcESid, a priest of Mars. Princeps, a prince. Sacerdos, a priest, or priest- ess. Salelles, a life-guard. Sus, a swine. Testis, a witness. Vatcs, a prophet, or pro- Vcrna, a slave. ViTidex, an avenger. § !!• The following are Masculine or Feminine in sense, but Masculine only in grammatical con- struction : ArCtfex, an artist Auspex, a soothsayer. Codes, a person having but one eye. Eques, a horseman. Exlex, an outlaw. Fur, a thief. Hcsres, an heir, an heiress. Homo, a man or woman. Index, an informer. Latro, a robber. Libert, children. Obses, a hostage. Opifcx, a workman. Pedes, a footman. Pugil, a boxer. Sejiex, an old person. § 13© The following, though Masculine or Femi- nine in sense, are Feminine only in grammatical construction : Copicp, forces, troops. CustocJice, guards. Excubice, sentinels. I OptrcB, labourers. Proles, an offspring. Sobules, an offipring. VigilicD, watchmen. § 13. Some nouns signifying Persons are Neuter with respect to their termination. Acroama, a jester. Auxilia, auxiliary troops. I Mancipium, a slave. Servitium, a slave. 22 NUMBER. CASES. NUMBER. § 14» Number is the distinction of objects, whether as one, or more than one. There are two nmnbers, the Singular which denotes one, as horao^ 'a man;' or the aggregate of many taken collectively, as, mnltitudo^ ' a multi- tude;' and the Plural, which denotes more than one, as homines^ ' men.' Some Latin nouns of the Plural number signify but one, as, Athence^ 'Athens;' others signify one or more, as, 7iuptice, ' a marriage,' or ' marriages.' CASES. § 1 5© Various methods are used in different languages to express the different connexions, or relations of one thing to another. In Eng- lish, and in most modern languages, this is done by prepositions, or particles placed before the substantive ; in Latin by Declension or by- different Cases, that is, by changing the termination of the noun ; as, rex, * a king ;' regis, ' of a king.' Cases are certain changes made upon the termination of nouns to express the relation of one thing to another. They are so called from cado, ' to fall,' because they fall, as it were, from the nominative, which is therefore named casus rectus, * the straight case,' and the other cases, casus ohliqui, * the oblique cases.' There are six cases, the Nominative, the Geni- tive, the Dative, the Accusative, the Vocative, and the Ablative. The Nominative simply expresses the name of a person or thing, and marks the subject of discourse, as Alexander interfecit, ' Alexander slew.' The Genitive generally expresses the relation of possession or pro- Abl.^ Abl. Penna, a pen. fem. Singular. Plural. N. penna, a pen ; G. pennse, of a pen ; D. pennee, lo or for a pen ; A. pennam, a pen ; V. penna, O pen ; A. penna, with a pen ; N. pennoe, pens ; G. pennarum, of pens ; D. pennis, to or for pens , A. pennas, pens ; V. pennse, O pens ; A. pennis, with pens. EXCEPTIONS. Exc. 1. The following nouns are masculine. Hadria, the Hadria- tic sea; cvmcta, a comet; planeta^ a planet; and sometimes, talpa, a mole ; and ddma, a fallow-deer. Pascha, the passover, is neuter. Pan- dectae, ' pandects,' is rather masc. than fem. Exc. 2. The ancient Latins sometimes formed the genitive singular in di ; thus, aula, a hall, gen. auldi : and sometimes likewise in as, which form the compounds otfdmilia usually retain ; as, mat er-f ami lias , the mistress of a family ; genit. matris-familias ; nom. plur. matres- familias, or matres-familiaru7n. Exc. 3. The following nouns have more frequently dhus in the dative and ablative plural, to distinguish them in these cases from mas- culines in usy of the second declension : Amma the soul, the life. Dea, a goddess. Equa, a mare. Famtila, a female servant. Thus, dedbuSf filidhus, rather than^Zizs, &c. But when they are construed with Dudhus or Amhdbus, or the dis- tinction is clear from the context, the termination is in is only : thus Cicero has dudhus anlmis: but Livy xxiv. 26 has dudbus filidbus. Filia, & Nata, a daughter. Liberta, a freed woman. Mula, a she-mule. SECOND DECLENSION GREEK NOUNSc 25 GREEK NOUNS. § 19» Nouns in as, es, and e, of the first declen- sion, are Greek. Nouns in as and es, are masculine; nouns in e are feminine. Nouns in as are declined like penna ; only they have am or an in the accusative ; as, JEneas, iEneas, the name of a man ; gen. JEnece, dat. -cCf ace. -am, or -an, voc. -a, abl. d. So Boreas, -ecB, the north wind ; tiaras, -(c, a turban. In prose they have commonly am, but in poetry oflener an, in the accusative. Greek nouns in a have sometimes also an in the ace. in poetry ; as Ossa ace. -am or -an, the name of a mountain. DECLENSION OF GREEK NOUNS. Nom AnchTses, Penelope, Thyestes, Epitome, Gen. AnchissB, Penelopes, Thyestae, Epitomes, Dat. Anchlsae, Penelopae, Thyestae, Epilomae, Ace. Anchisen, Penelopen, Thyesten, Epitomen, Voc. ■ AnchTse, or a, Penelope, Thyeste, or a, Epitome, Abl. AnchTse, or a. Penelope. Thyeste, or a. Epitome. These nouns, being" proper names, want the plural, unless when several of the same name are spoken of, and then they are declined like the plural of penna* The Latins frequently turn Greek nouns in es and e into a,- as, Atr'ida, for Atrldes ; Fersa for Ferses, a Persian ; geometra, for -tres, a geometrician ; Circa, for Circe ; epitoma, for -ttic, an abridgement ; grammatica, for -ce, grammar ; rheto- rica, for -ce, oratory. So Clinia, for Clinias, &c. SECOND DECLENSION. § 200 Nouns of the second declension end in er, ir, wr, W5, urn ; os^ on, (os and on are Greek termina- tions.) Nouns in um and on are neuter : the rest are mascuhne. TERMINATIONS. Singular. Plural. Nom. er, ir, ur, us, um ; os, on Nom. Nom. er, ir, ur, us, um ; os, on Nom. > • Gen.i. Voc. ^''^'^ Dat. > Gen. drum. Abl. S ^' Dat. ) . Ace. um, or like the nom. Abl. J Voc. e, or like the nom. Ace. os, or a. I *The accusative of nouns in es and e is found sometimes in em. We sometimes find the genit. plural contracted as, CcBticalum, for Ccelicolarum ; ^neadum, for ^neadarum. 26 SECOND DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Nom. gener, Gen. generi, DaL genero, Ace. generum, Yoc. gener, Ahl, genero, Nom. generi, Gen. generorum, Dat. generis, Ace. generos, Voe. generi, Ahl. generis. Gener, a son-in-law^ masc. Singular of tOy or for O a son-in-law, a son-in-law, a son-in-law, a son-in-law, son-in-law. with, from, or hy a son-in-law. Plural. of to, or for O toith, from^ or sons-in-law, sons-in-law, sons-in-law, sons-in-law, sons-in-law, sons-in-law. After the same manner decline, socer, -eri, a father-in-law ; puer -eri, a boy : So furcifer, a villain ; Lucifer^ the morning star ; adul- ter, an adulterer; armiger, an armour-bearer; presbyter, an elder; Mulciber, a name of the god Vulcan ; vesper, the evening ; and Iber, -eri, a Spaniard, the only noun in er which has the gen. long, and its compound CeUlber, -eri : Also, vir, viri, a man, the only noun in ir , and its compounds, levir, a brother-in-law ; semtvir, duumvir, trium- vir, &c. And likewise sutur, -uri, full, (of old, saturus,') an adjective. § 21(» But most nouns in er lose the e in the geni- tive; as, Ager, a field, masc. Plural. N. agri, fields. Singular. N. ager, a field, G. agri, of a field, D. agro, to a field, A. agrum, a field, V. ager, O field, A. agro, with a field. G. agrorum, of fields, D. agris, to fields, A. agros, fields, V. agri, O fields, A. agris, with fields. Aper, a wild boar. Arbiter, & -tra, an arbitra- tor or judge. Auster, the south wind. Cancer, a crab fish. In like manner decline. Caper, a he-goat. Coluber, & -bra, a ser- pent. Culter, the coulter of a plough, a knife. Faber, a workman. Magister, a master. Minister, a servant. Onager, a wild ass. Scalper, a lancet. Also, liber, the bark of a tree, or a book, which has libri ; but liber, free, an adjective, and Liber, a name of Bacchus, tlie god of wine, have liberi. So likewise proper names, Alexander, Evander, Perian- der, Menander, Teucer, Meledger, &c. gen. Alexandri, Evandri, &c. SECOND DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 27 Ddminus, a lord^ masc. Singular, N. dominus, a lord, G. dommi, of a lord, D. dommo, .to a lord, A. dommum, a lord, V. domme, O lord, A. dommo, with a lord. Plural. N. domini, lords, G. dominorum, of lords, D. domi'nis, to lords, A. dominos, lords, V. domini, O lords, A. dominis, with lords. Regnum, a kingdom, neut. Singular. N. regnum, a kingdom, G. regni, of a kingdom, D. regno, to a kingdom, A. regnum, a kijigdom, V. regnum, O kingdom, A. regno, with a kingdom. Plural, N. regna, kingdoms, G. regnorum, of kingdoms, D. regnis, to kingdoms, A. regna, kingdoms, V. regna, O kingdoms, A. regnis, with kingdoms. EXCEPTIONS IN GENDER. Exc. 1. The following nouns in us are feminine ; humus, the ground ; alvus, the belly; vannus, a sieve; miltus, vermilion; also, Domus, ' a house,' partly of the fourth Declension. And the following, derived from Greek nouns in os , Dialectus, a dialect or man- ner of speech. Diamctros, tfte diameter of a circle. Diphthongus, a diphthong. Eremus, a desert. Lecythus, a vial. pit. Antidotus, a preservative against poison. Arctos, the Bear, a con- stellation near Hie north pole. Carbasus, a sail. Methodus, a method. Period us, a period. Perimetros, the circumfer- ence. Pharus, a xvatch-tower. Plinthus, the foot ofapillar. Synodus, an assembly. To these add some names of jewels and plants, because gemma and ptanta are feminine, as, Topazius, a topaz. "an Egyp- Biblus, Papyrus, Amethystus, an amethyst. ChrysolTthus, a chrysolile. Chrysophrasus, a kind of topaz. Chrystallus, crystal. Leucochrysus, a jacinth. Sapphirus, a sapphire. Other names of jewels are generally masculine ; i cuius, a carbuncle ; pyropus, a ruby ; smaragdus, an plants ; as, asparagus, asparagus or sparrowgrass ; radish or colewort ; intybus, endive or succory, &c. Byssus, fine fax or linen, Costus, costmary. Crocus, saffron. Hyssopus, hyssop. Nardus, spikenard. IS, beryllus, the beryl ; carbun- emerald : And also names of dleborus, ellebore; raphanus, Exc. 2. The nouns which follow are either masculine or feminine : Atomus, an atom. ] Barbitus, a harp. Allan us, ihe fruit of the Camelus, a camel. palm tree, ointment. \ Colus, a distaff. Grossus, a green fig. Perms, a store-house. Phaselus, a litde ship. Exc. 3. Virus, poison ; peldgus, the sea, are neuter. 28 SECOND DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Exc. 4. Vulgus, the common people, is either masculine or neuter, but oftener neuter. Exc. 5. Sexus, i, a sex, of the Second Declension, is neut. ; but Sexus, us, of the Fourth Declension, is masc. EXCEPTIONS IN DECLENSION. §22» Proper names in ius lose us in the voca- tive ; as, Hordtius^ Hordti ; Virgilius^ Virgtli ; Geor- gius^ Georgij names of men: Ldrius^ Ldri; Mincius^ Mind; names of lakes. Filius^ a son, also has j^/l; genius^ one's guardian angel, geni ; and deus^ a god, has deus in the voc. ^d in the plural more frequently dii and diis^ than dei and deis. Meus^ my, an adjective pronoun, has mi, and sometimes meus^ in the vocative. Other nouns in ius have c; as tabellarius, tabellarie, a letter-carrier; pius, pie,&c So these epithets, Delius, Delie; T'lrynthius, Tirynthie; and these possessives, La'ertius, La'ertie ; Sdturnius, Saturnie ; &c. which are not considered as proper names. The poets sometimes make the vocative of nouns in us like the nominative ; as, fiuvius Latinus, for iluvie Latme. Virg. This also occurs in prose, but more rarely ; thus, Audi tu, populus, for papule. Liv. i. 24. The poets also change nouns in er into us ; as Evander, or Evandrus, vocative, Evander, or Evandre. So Meander, Leander, Tymher, Teucer, &c. ; and so an- ciently puer in the vocative had puere, from puerus. Note. When the genitive singular ends in ii, the latter i is sometimes taken away by the poets for the sake of quantity ; as, tuguri, for tugurii ; ingeni, for ingenii, &c. The Genitive plural drum in many words, especially those which denote money, weight and measure, is often contracted into iim, as Sestertium, nummum, modium, talentum, for Sestertiorum, nummorum, &c. So also, Deitm, liberum,fabrum, duum- virum, oppHum, exitium, prodigium, factum; and in poetry, Teucrum, Graiiim, Arg'ivum, Danaiim, Felasgum, &c., for Teucrorum, &c. DeuSf ' God,' masc. is thus declined. Singular. Plural. N. Deus, God, G. Dei, of God, D. Deo, to, or for God, A. Deum, God, V. Deus, O God, A. Deo, from, or by God. N. Dei, Dii, or Di, . . . the Gods, G. Deorum, or Deum, of the Gods, D. Deis, Diis, or Dis, to the Gods, A. Deos, the Gods, V. Dei, Dii, or Di, . . O the Gods, A. Deis, Diis, or Dis, from or by the Gods. GREEK NOUNS. § 23. Os and on are Greek terminations ; as, Alpheos^ a river in Greece ; Ilion^ the city Troy ; THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 2& and are often changed into us and wm, by the Latins ; Alplieus^ Ilium^ which are dechned hke dommus and regnum. Nouns in eos or eus are sometimes contracted in the Genitive ,• as, Orpheus, gen. Orphei, Orpheiy or Orphi. So Theseus, Promoiheus, &c. But nouns in eus, when eu IS a diphthong, are of the third declension. Some nouns in os have the genitive singular in o ; as, Androgeos, genitive An- drogeo, or -ei, the name of a man ; Athos, Atho, or -i, a hill in Macedonia : both of which are also found in the third declension; thus, nominative Androgeo, genitive Androgeonis. So Atho, or Athon, -dnis, &c. Anciently nouns in os, in imitation of the Greeks, had the genitive in u ; as, Menandru, Apolloduru, for Menandri, Apollo- dori. Ter. Panthus has Pan'hu in the vocative. Nouns in os have the accusative in um or on ; as, Delus, or Delos, accusative Delum or Delon, the name of an island. Some neuters have the genitive plural in on; as, Georgica, genitive plural at of husbandry, as, Virgil's Georgicks. Georgicbn, books which treat c Greek nouns of the second declension are thus declined :- Barbiton, a lyre. Singular. Singular. Plural. N. Delos, Androgeos, N. barbiton, barbita, G. Deli, Androgeo, or i, G. barbiti. barbiton. D. Delo, Androgeo, D barbito, barbitis A. Delon, or um. Androgeo, or on, A. barbiton, barbita, V. Dele, Androgeos, V. barbiton, barbita. A. Delo. Androgeo. A. barbito. barbitis. THIRD DECLENSION. § 24« There are more nouns of the third declen- sion than of all the other declensions together. The number of its final syllables is not ascertained. Its final letters are thirteen, a, e, i, o, y^ c, rf, /, ^^, r, 5, t^ X. Of these, eight are peculiar to this de- clension, namely, i, o, y, c, c?, /, /, x ; a and e are common to it with the first declension ; n and r, with the second ; and 5, with all the other declen- sions. A^ i, and y, are peculiar to Greek nouns. TERMINATIONS. Singular. Nom. a, e, i, &c. Gen. is. Dat. i. Ace. em, or like the nom. Voc. like the nom. Abl. e, or i. 3* Plural. Nom. Ace. Voc. Gen. Dat. Abl. um, or ium. > ibus. 30 THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Sermo, a speech^ masc. Singular. N. sermo, a speech, G. sermonis, of a speech, D. sermoni, to a speech, A. sermonem, a speech, V. sermo, O speech, A. sermone, with a speech, Honor, honor ; masc. Singular, N. honor, G. honoris, D. honori, A. honorem, V. honor, A. honore. Plural. honores, honorum, honoribus, honores, honores, honoribus. Rupes, a rock ; fem. Singular, N. rupes, G. rupis, D. rupi, A. rupem, V. rupes, A. rupe. Plural. rupes, rupium, rupibus, rupes, rupes, rupibus. Ars, art ; fem. Singular. N. ars, G. artis, D. arti, A. artem, V. ars, A. arte. Plural. artes, artium, artibus, artes, artes, artibus. Turris, a tower ; fem. Singular. N. turris, G. turris, D. turri, A. turrem, V. turris, A. turre, or ri Plural. turres. turrium, turribus, turres, turres, turribus. Plural. N. sermones, speeches, G. sermonum, of speeches, D. sermombus, to speeches, A. sermones, speeches, V. sermones, O speeches, A. sermombus, . . . with speeches. Nox, night ; fem. Singular. N. nox, G. noctis, D. nocti, A. noctem, V. nox, A. nocte. Plural. noctes, noctium, noctibus, noctes, noctes, noctibus. Miles, a soldier ; com. gen. Singular. N. miles, G. militis, D. militi, A. militem, V. miles, A. milite. Plural. milites, milttum, militibus, milites, milites, militibus. Pater, a father ; masc. Singular. N. pater, G. patris, D. patri, A. patrem, V. pater, A. patre. Plural. patres, patrum, patribus, patres, patres, patribus. Sedile, a seat ; neut. Singular. N. sedile, G. sedilis, D. sedili, A. sedile, V. sedile, A. sedili. Plural. sedilia, sedilium, sedilibus, sedilia, sedilia, sedilibus. THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 31 Carmen, a verse ; neut. Animal, an animal; neut. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. N. carmen, carmina, N. antmal. animalia. G. carminis. carminum, G. animalisj animalium. D. carmini, carmimbus, D. animali. animalibus, A. carmen. carm"fna. A. animal. animalia, V. carmen, carmina, V. animal. animalia. A. carmine. carmintbus. A. animali. animaltbus. Iter, a journey ; neut. Opus, a worh :; neut. Singular, Plural. Singular. Plural. N. iter, itinera. N. opus. opera. G. itineris. itinerum. G. operis, operum. D. itineri. itinerlbus, D. operi. opertbus, A. iter, itinera. A. opus. opera, V. iter. itinera. V. opus. opera, A. itinere. itinertbus. A. opere. operibus. Lapis, a stone ; fem. Caput, a head; neut. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. N. lapis. lapides. N. caput. captta, G. lapidis. lapidum. G. capitis. capttum, D. laptdi, lapidibus. D. capiti. capitibus, A. lapidem, lapides, A. caput. capita. V. lapis. laptdes. V. caput, capita. A. lapide. lanidibus. A. capite. capitibus. Virgo, a virgin ; fem. Parens, a parent ; com. gen. Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural. N. Virgo, virgtnes. N. parens. N. parentes. G. virgmis, virgtnum, G. parentis. G. parentum,* ]). virgini, virgin ibus, D. parenti. D. parentibus. A. virginem, virgmes. A. parentem. A. parentes. V. virgo. virgines. V. parens, V. parentes. A. virgine. virginibus. Poema, a p A. parente. oem; neut. A. parentibus. Singular . Plural N. poema. poemata. G. poematis. poematum. D. poemati, poematibus ,or poematis. A. poema, poemata. V. poema. poemata. A. poemate. poematibus , or poematis.^ * Nouns in na and as Ibrm their genitive plural in ium and iim, but oftener admit 51 syncope of tlic i. 33 THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS. short, OF THE GENDER AND GENITIVE OF NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. A, E, I and Y, § 25« Nouns in a, e, i, and y, are neuter. Nouns. in a form the genitive in dtis ; as, diadema, diademdtis, a crown ; dogma, dogmatis, an opinion. So, Niimisma, a coin. Phasma, an apparition. Poema, a poem. Schema, a scheme, or figiLre. Sophisma, a deceitful argu- ment. Stemma, a pedigree. Nouns in c change e mto is ; as, rete, retis, a net. So, AncTle, a shield. Aplustre, ihe flag of a ship. Campestre, a pair of draw- ers. iEnigma, a riddle. Apophthegma, a pithy saying. Aroma, sweet spices. Axioma, a plain truth. Diploma, a charter. Epigramma, an inscrip- tion. Stigma, a mark or brand, a disgrace. Stratagem a, aji artful con- trivance. Thema, a theme, a suhject to write or speak on. Toreuma, a carved ves- Cochleare, a spoon. Conclave, a room. . Crinale, a pin for the hair. Cubile, a couch. Equile, a stable for horses. Laqueare, a ceiled roof. MantTle, a towel. Monlle, a necklace. Navale, a dock ov place for shipping. OvTle, a sheep fold. Prajsepe, a stall; t hive. Sccale, rye. SiiTle, a sow-cote. Tibiale, a stocking. Nouns in i are generally indeclinable ; as, gummi, gum ; zingtberi, ginger ; but some Greek nouns add ztis ; as, hydromeli, hydrometilis, water and honey sodden together, mead. Nouns in y add os ; as, moly, molyos, an herb ; mlsy, -yos, vitriol. o. §26« Nouns in o are masculine, and form the genitive m oms ; as, Sermo, sermonis, speech ; draco, dracbnis, a dragon. Agaso, a horse-keeper. Aqmlo, the north vyind. Arrhabo, an earnest-penny, Balatro, a pitiful fellow. Bambalio, a stutterer. Baro, a blockhead. Bubo, an owl. Bufo, a toad. Calo, a soldier'' s slave. Capo, a capon. Carbo, a coal. Caupo, an inn-keeper. Cerdo, a cobbler, or one who follows a mean trade. Ciniflo, a frizzier of hair. Crabro, a wasp or hornet. Ciirio, the chief of a ward or curia. Equiso, a groom or ostler. Erro, a wanderer. Fullo, a fuller of cloth. Helluo, a glutton. Histrio, a player. Latro, a robber. Leno, a pimp. Ludio, & -ius, a player. Lurco, a glutton. Mango, a slave-merchant. Mirmillo, a fencer. Morio, a fool. Mucro, the point of a wea- pon. Miilio, a muleteer. Nebiilo, a knave. Pavo, a peacock. Pero, a kind of shoe. So, Prajco, a common crier. Prasdo, a robber. Pulmo, the lungs. Pusio, a little child. Salmo, a salmon. Sannio, a buffoon. Sapo, soap. Sipho, a pipe or tube. Spado, an eunuch. Stolo, a shoot or scion. Strabo, a goggle-eyed per- son. Temo, the pole or draught- tree. Tiro, a raw soldier. Umbo, the boss of a shield. Upilio, a shepherd. Volo, a volunteer. THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 38 Exc. 1. Nouns in io are feminine, when they signify any thing with- out a body ; as, ratio ^ rationis, reason. Captio, a quirk. Cautio, caution, care. Concio, a7i assemUi/, a speech. Cessio, a yielding. Dictio, a word. Deditio, a surrender. Lectio, a lesson. Legio, a legion, a body of men. Mentio, mention. NOtio, a notion or idea. Opinio, an opinion. Optio, a choice. Oratio, a speech. So, Pensio, a payment. Perduellio, treason. Portio, a part. Potio, driJik. PrOditio, treachery. Proscriptio, a proscription, ordering citizens to be slain, and confiscating their effects. QuaEstio, an inquiry. Rebellio, rebellion. Regio, a country. Relatio, a telUng. Religio, religion. Remissio, a slackening. Sanctio, a confirmation. Sectio, the confiscation or forfeiture of one's goods. Seditio, a mutiny. Sissio, a sitting. Statio, a station. Suspicio, mistrust. Titillatio, a tickling Translatio, a tran^erring. Usiicapio, the enjoyment of a thing by prescription. Vacatio, /reoZoTW from la- bour, . . c. Canalis, Cannabis, ..... Carthago, || . . . . Caro, Centassis, Civis, Classis, Cohors, Clavis, § Cor, Cos, Collis, Cucumis, . . . . Cutis, Adjectives. Capio, compounds of^ in -ceps, . . Caput, compounds of^ in -ceps, .... Celer, t Coelebs, * Compar, f Compos, * CoR color,* Color, comp. of, * . Corpus, cozn^. of, in -or, * Consors, t Concors, D. Decussis, Dos, Adjectives. Degener, t . . . . Dispar, t Dives, * Familiaris,t . . . Faux, Febris, § Finis, Fornax, ,. Fustis, Facio, camp, of in -fex, G. Gausape, (perhaps indecl.) Glis, Ace, Sing, em, im, im, em, im, . im, . im, em, Abl. Sing. 1. i or e. i or e. e or 1. e or i. 1 or e. e or 1. . e or i,. e or 1, ote, . . e or 1, i or e rarely, , e or 1, , e or i, e, sometimes i, i or e. 1, e. e, i. e or i. 47 Gen. PI. bourn, (bobus, to.) tium. dium, tium. um. um. um. um. um. um. um. um. um. ium. tmm. um. um. um. 48 Gummis, Genus, comp. of, in -er, THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Acc. Sing. H. Haeresis, Hospes, adj.* . I. Ig-nis, Imber, Infans, ...... Jus, Juvenis, Adjectives. Impos, * Impar, f Impubes, * . . . Inops, t L. Labes, Lar, Lens, § Linter, Lis, Locuples, adj. M. Mephitis, . . . . Messis, Molaris, t . . . . Mons, Mugil, Mus, Memor, adj.f {olim Memoris,) . . N. Natalis, X Navis, § Nix, November, (and such,) O. Occiput, § October, Orbis, Os, ossis, Ovis, P. Pelvis, § Par, m. Sff. . . . Par, n im, m, tim, tem, im, . im, em, em. em, im, im, em, Abl. Sing. 1. ite, e or 1. e or i. jure, . e, . . . ote, . . . e or i, . ere, . . . e or i, . e or i. ti, te. e or 1, . e or 1. e or i, 1 or e. i or e. 1. i or e. i. e or i. e or 1. 1 or e. e, Gen. PI tmm. um, ium seldom. um. um. um. um. um. mm. ium. tium. um, ium seldom. um. rium.' mm. ium. ' Semel apud Ciceronem murum. Palus, ........ Pars, Postis, Pugil, § Puppis, § Adjectives. Par,t Particeps, t . . . . Pauper, * Pes, comp. of* . Princeps, t . . , , Praeceps, * . . . . Plus, Pubes, * Quintilis (andsuchi) Quiris, R. Rails, Ravis, Restis, Rivalis,} Rus, § Rudis, S. Sal, Samnis, Securis, Sementis, § . . . Senex, Sentis, Septunx, Serapis, || . . . . Sextans, Sextilis, Sinapis, Sitis, Sodalis, t Sordes, Sors, Strigilis, Supellex, § . . . Adjectives. Senex, * Sospes, * Superstes, * . . Supplex, t T. Tibris, II Tigris, II Tridens, § . . . . THIRD DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Acc. Sing. Abl. Sing. 49 im, em, em,. em, im, im, im, em, im, em, im, em, em, im, im. em,, im, . im, . e or 1. e or i. i or e. i or e. e or 1, . ere, . . . e, . . . . e or i, . i, e, . . . ri, re, . ere,. . . e, L i. e. i or e. i or e. e or 1. e or i. i or e. e, . . . . e or i. em, im seldom^ . . I im, m, im, in. 1, e rare. i or e. e or i. e or i. e. ite, ite, ici, or e, . i, e, ide. i, e. i or e. 5 Gen. PI udium. lum. um. um. um. um. turn (ia, nom.) rium. um. itium, itum. tium. um. cium. tium. um. um. um. um. 60 TIIIKD DECLENSION OF NOUNS* Acc. Sing, Turris, § i im, em, Tussis, I ira, em, Adjectives. Tricorpor, * . . Tricuspis, * . . Tripes, * u,v. Vectis, Venter, Vigil,§ Vis, pi. vires, . Unguis, Volucris, t . . . Uter, Adjectives. Uber,t Vetus, * ' Vigil, t Volucris, t 1 . J. Abl. Sing, 1 or e. i or e. e or 1, e or i, . vi, . . . . e or 1. i or e, Gen. PluT. umr umr um. lum. um. rium. um. ium. e or 1, um, i, e seldom^ um. i, e, i, um, ium seldom, um, ium seldom. * Those thus marked, have e only in the ablative, and um in the genitive plural. I Those having" i, or e and /, in the ablative, and um in the genitive plural, are thus marked. \ Such substantives have t, because they are formed- from adjectives, having i only in the ablative. Though used as substantives, they are in reality adjectives, the substantive with which they agree being un- derstood. 5 Substantives, thus marked, take either termination indifferently : those not marked take, in general, the first termination mentioned. II Carthago and such nouns have e or i when at a place is signified^ that is, when the question is made by uhi * where V The names of gods, rivers, &c., in is, take, in general, im or in in the accusative, i or sometimes e in the ablative. FOURTH DECLENSION. § 50. Nouns of the fourth declension end in us and u. Nouns in us are masculine ; nouns in u are neu- ter, and indeclinable in the singular number. TERMINATIONS. Singtdar. Nom. \ „„ ^^ „ Nom Gen. us, Voc. Dat ui, Gen. Ace. um, , Dat Abl. u. Abl. Plural. hbus. FOURTH DECLE^NSrON OF NOUJfS. Fructus^ fruity masc. 51 Singular. N. fructiis, fruity G. fructiis, of fruit, D. fructui, , to fruity A. fructurn, , . . . . fruit, Y. fructus, O fruit, A. fructu, icith fruit. Plural, N. fructus, fruits, G. fnjctiium, of fruits, D, fructibus, to fruits, A. fructup, fruits, V. fructus, O fruits, A. fructibus, with fruits. Singular, N. cornu, a horn, G. cornu, of a horn, D. cornu, to a horn, A, cornu, a horn, V. cornu, O horn, A. cornu, with a horn. Cornu, a horn, neut. Plural. N. cornua, horns, G, cornuum, of horns, D. cornibus, to horns, A. cornua, horns, V. cornua, O horns, A. cornibus with horns. Exc. 1. The following nouns are feminine Acus, a needle. Anus, an old woman, Domus, a house. Ficus, a Jig. Idus, -uum, the ides of a month. Manuf?, the hand. Penus, a store-house. Porticus, a gallery. Specus, a den. Tribus, a tribe. Penus and specus are sometimes masculine. Ficus, penus, and domus, with seve- ral others, are also of the second declension. Capricornus, m. the sign Capricorn, although from cornu, is always of iJie second decl. and so are the compounds of manus ; unimanus, having one hand ; centimanus, &;c. adj. Quercus, an oak, has ^uercorum, and -uum, in the gen. pi. Versus has versi, versdrum, versis, as well as its regular cases. Senalus has also -ati, in the gen. ; so ornalus, -i : but these forms are not to be imitated. Domus is but partly of the second declension ; thus, Domus, a house, fern. Singular. N. domus, a house, G. domus, or -mi, of a house, D. domui, or -mo, . . . to a house, A. domum, , . . . a house, V. domus, O house, A. domo, loith a house. Plural. N. domus, houses, G. domorum, or -uum, of houses, D. dom ibus, to houses, A. domos, or -us, houses, V. domus, O houses, A. doraibus, with houses. Note. Domus, in the genitive, signifies, of a house ; and domi, at home, or of home ; as, memineris domi. Terent. Eun. iv. 7. 45. Exc. 2. The following nouns have uhus, in the dative and ablative pluraL Acus, a needle. Arcus, a bow. Artus, a joint. Genu, the knee. Lacus, a lal'e. Partus, a births Portus, a harbour. Specus, a den. Tribus, a tribe. Veru, a spit. Portus, genu, and veru, have likewise %us ; as, port^bus or portubus. 52 FIFTH DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Exc. 3. Jesus, the venerable name of our Saviour, has um in the accusative, and u in all the other cases. Nouns of this declension anciently belonged to the third, and were de- chned hke grus, grids, a crane ; thus, fructus, fructuis, fructui, fructuem, fructus, fruclue ; fruclues, fructuum, fructuihus, fructues, fructues, fructuibus. So that all the cases are contracted, except the dative singular, and genitive plural. In some writers, we still find the genitive singular in uis ; as. Ejus anuis causa, for anus. Terent. Heaut ii. 3. 46. and in others, the dative in m ,• as, Resistere impetu, for impetui. Cic. Fara. x. 24. Esse usu sibi, for usui. lb. xiii. 71. The gen. plur. is sometimes contracted ; as, currum, for curruum. FIFTH DECLENSION. § 51. Nouns of the fifth declension end in 65, and are of the feminine gender. TERMINATIONS. Singular. Nom. > ^^ Voc. <®^' Gen. I . Dat, S ' Ace. em, Abl. e. Res, a thingf fem. Singular. N. res, a things G. rei, of a thing, D. rei, to a thing, A. rem, a thing, V. res, O thing, A. re, with a thing. Plural, N. res, things, G, rerum, of things, D. rebus, to things, A. res, things, V. res, O things, A, rebus, with things. Acies, the edge of a thing, or an army in order of battle. Caries, rottenness. Caesaries, the hair. Facies, the face. Glacies, ice In like manner decline, Tngluvies, gluttony. Macies, leanness. Materies, matter. Pernicies, destruction. Proluvies, a looseness Rabies, madness. Sanies, gore. Scabies, the scab, or itch. Series, an order, or row. Species, an appearance. Superficies, the surface. Temperies, temperatenese. Except dies, a day, masc. or fem. in the singular, and always masc. in the plural ; and meridies, the mid-day, or noon, masc. The poets sometimes make the genitive, and more rarely the dative singular, in e; as, fde, for fdei. Ov. M. 3. 341. Gen. Die, Virg. G. i. 208. Sallust, Jug. 52, 106. Acie, Salliist. Dat. Die, Plant. Facie, Gell. Fide, Sallust, Jug. Hor. i. Sat. 3. 95. We find such Genitives also as, Adi, Pernicii, Fidi, &c. A few have their Genitive from the Third, as, Requies, ei, or etis, rest. Plebes, the common people, makes plebis, plebei, or pUbi ; Fames, hunger, famis, or famei. IRREGULAR NOUNS. 53 The nouns of this declension are few in number, not exceeding fifty, and seem anciently to have been comprehended under the third declension. Most of them want the genitive, dative, and ablative plural, and many, the plural altogether. All nouns of the fifth declension end in ies, except three ; Jides, faiih ; spes, hope ; res, a thing; and all nouns in ies are of the fifth, except these four; abies, a fir- tree ; aries, a ram ; paries, a wall ; and qules, rest ; which are of the third declen- sion Reqiues is of the third and fifth declension. Of the fifty-seven nouns of this declension, only two. Res, and Dies, are com- plete in the plural. The following plurals occur: Nom. or Accus., Aa'es, Fc/cie*, Eluvies, Progenies, Scabies, Species, SpZs, S^iperf^cies. — Gen. Facierum, Specierum, Sperum, MuLerieaiii, Luxarieuin. — Dat. or Abl. Speous, SiiperftciZhus. ' Specierum et Specilbus nolim dicere, ne si Latine quidera dici possit.' — Cicero. TERMINATIONS OF THE FIVE DECLENSIONS. I. Nom. Gen. Dat, a, 86, as, Ace. Voc. Abl. am, a, Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc. Abl. 8B, arum, is, as, 86, is. II. Singular, III. M. N. M. us, er, um, h um, e, er, um, o, is, em, e, or i N. IV. M. us, us, ui, um, us. N. u» u, u, ii, u, a, orum. is. OS, §, i, a, Plural. es, a, ia, ' us, ^ ua, um, or ium, | uum, thus, I thus, or ubus, es, a, ia, • us, au, es, a, ia, us, aii, thus. ] thus, or ubus. V. es, ei, ei, em, es, e, es, erum, ebus es, es, ebus, IRREGULAR NOUNS. § 53« Irregular nouns may be reduced to three classes, Variable^ Defective^ and Redundant. I. VARIABI^-:CiOUNS. - ■'.i^ Nouns are variable either in gender, of declension, or in both. Heterogeneous Mouns. Those which vary in gender are called heterogeneous, and may be reduced to the following classes : **^ 1. Masculine in the singular, and neuter' in the plural. Avemus, a take in Campania^ hell. Dindymus, a hilt in Phrygin. Ismarus, a hill in Thrace. Massicus, a hill in Campania, famous for excellent unnefi 5* Maenalus, a hill in Arcadia. Pangaeus, a promontory in Thrace. Teenarus, a promontory in Laconia. Taf larus, hell. Taygetus, a hill in Laconia. 54 IRREGULAR NOUNS. Thus, Avema, Avemorum ; Dindyma, -drum, ' numerous, and commonly end in lo, or, us, and ura ; as, lectio, a lesson ; amator, a lover; luctus, grief; creutura, a creature. ADJECTIVES. 67 ADJECTIVE. § 77. An Adjective is a word added to a sub- stantive, to express its quality; as, durus, hard; mollis, soft.^ Adjectives in Latin are varied by gender, num- ber, and case, to agree with substantives in all these accidents.t Adjectives are varied like three substantives of the same termination and declension. All adjectives are either of the first and second declension, or of the third only. Adjectives of three terminations are of the first and second declension ; but adjectives of one or two terminations are of the third. Exc. The following adjectives, though they have three terminations, are of the third declension : Acer, sharp. Alacer, cheerful. Campester, belonging to a plain. Celeber, famous. Celer, swift. Equester, belonging to a horse. Paluster, marshy. Ped ester, on foot Saliiber, wholesome. Sylvester, woody. Volucer, swift. Rule for the Gender of Adjectives, ' In adjectives of three terminations, the first is masc, the second fern., and the third neut. In those of two terminations, the first is masc. and fem., and the second neut. Adjectives of one termination are of all genders. § 78© ADJECTIVES OP THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSION. Bonus f masc. bona, fem. honum, neut. good. Singular, Plural, N. bon-us, -a, -um. N. bon-i. -86, -a. G. bon-i, -85, "m G. bon-orum. -arum, -orum, D. bon-o. -88, -0, D. bon-is. -is, -is, A. bon-um, -am, -um. A: bon-os, -as. -a, V. bon-e. -a. -um, V. bon-i, -se, -a, A. bon-o. -^, -0. A. bon-is, -is. -is. *We know things by their qualities only. Every quality must belong to some subject. An adjective therefore always implies a substantive expressed or under- stood, and cannot n!ake full sense without it. tAn adjective properly has neither genders, numbers, nor cases; but certain terminations answering to the gender, number, and case of the substantive with which it is joined. 68 ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSION* Tener, tenera, lenerum, tender. N. ten-er, G. ten-eri, D. ten-ero, A. ten-erura, V. ten-er, A. ten-ero, Singular. -6ra, -erse, -erae, -eram, -€ra, -er^. -erum, -eri, -ero, -erura, -erum, -ero. Plural. N. ten-gri, -ersB, -era, G. ten-erorum, -erarum, -erorum, D. ten-eris, -eris, -eris, A. ten-eros, -eras, -era, V. ten-eri, -erae, -era, A. ten-eris, -eris, -eris. Asper, rough. Ceeter, (hardly rest. used) the In like manner decline, Gibber, crook-backed. Lacer, torn. Liber, free. . I Miser, wretched. Prosper, prosperous. Also the compounds of gero and fero ; as, Idniger, bearing wool ; vp?fer, bring- ing iielp, &.C. Likewise, satur, satura, salurum, full. Bat most adjectives in er drop the e; as, uter^ atra^ atrum, black; gen. atri, atrllJME:iAL ADJECTIVES. »,s, hincB nupti They have loved. PLUPERFECT, had. S. Am-averam, I had loved. P. Am-averamus, We had loved. Am-averas, Thou hadst loved. Am-averatis, Ye or you had loved, Am-averat, He had loved. Am-averant, They had loved. FUTURE, shall or will. S. Am-abo, I shall lm)e. P. Am-abimus, We shall love. Am-abis, Thou wilt love. Am-abitis, Ye or you will love. Am-abit, He will love. Am-abunt, They will love. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT TENSE, may or can. S. Am-em, I may love. P. Am-emus, Vik may lave. Am-es, Thou mayest love. Am-etis, Ye or you may love. Am-et, He may love. Am-ent, They may love. IMPERFECT, might, could^ would, or should. S. Am-arem, I might love. P. Am-arcrr.us, We might love. Am-ares, Thou mighiest love. Am-arelis, Ye or you might love. Am-aret He might love. Am-arenl, They might love. PERFECT, may have. S. Am-averim, I may have loved. P. Am-averimiis, We may have laved. Am-averis, Thou mayest have loved. * ... ^ Ye or you may have Am-averit, He may fiave laved. Ara-averuis, ^ ^^^;^^ Am-averint, They may have loved. PLUPERFECT, might have. S. Am-avissem, I might have laved. P. Am-avisserans, We might have loved. Am-avisses, | Thou nnghtest have Am-avissetis, ^ ^^ ^J^;^ ^^^^« '^«^« Ara-avisset, He might have loved. Am-avissent, They might have laved. * The second person of the present subjunctive, and the second person of the perfect, are used for the imperative; as, ne me attingas, ' do not touch me' ; nee illos juvERis, ' nor assist them.' The first person plural of the present subjunctive is used only in encouraging or resolving ; as, juoriamur, • let us die ;' i?i, arma ruamus, • let us rush to arras.' FIRST CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 95 S. Ara-avero, I shall have loved. Am-averis, Thou wilt have loved. Am-averit, He will have loved. shall have, p. Am-averi'mus, We shall have loved. Am-aventis, | ^« ""{J^^^ ^'^^ ^"^^ Am-averint, They will have loved. IMPERATIVE MODE. Sing. % Am-a or am-ato, 3. Am-ato, Plur. 2. Am-ale, or ara-atote, 3. Am-anto, Lave thou, or do thou love. Let him love. Love ye, or do ye love. Lei them love. INFINITIVE MODE. PRES. Am-are, PERF. Am-avisse, FUT. Esse araaturus, -a, -uin, uisse amaturus, -a, -urn, To lave. To have laved. To be about to love. To have been about to lave. PRES. Am-ans, FUT. Am-aturus, -a, -um, PARTICIPLES. Laving. About to love* Nam. Am-andum, Gen. Am-andi, Dat. Am-ando, Ace. Ara-andum, Abl. Am-ando, GERUNDS. Laving. Of loving. 1 o loving. Laving. With loving. Former. Am-atura, Latter. Am-atu, SUPINES. To love. To lave, or to he loved. Prcs. Indie. § 119« Amor, PASSIVE VOICE. Pres. hifin. amari, Perf. Pari. amatus, To be loved. INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT TENSE, am. S. Am-or, lam loved. Am-aris or -are, Thou art loved. Am-atur, He is loved. P. Am-amur, We are loved. Am-amini, Ye or you are loved. Ara-antur, They are loved. S. Am-abar, , . Am-abaris, or y. -abare, Ara-abatur, IMPERFECT, was. I was loved. > Thou wast loved. He uxLS loved. P. Ara-abamur, We were loved. Am-abamini, Ye or you were loved. Am-abantur, They were loved. 96 FIRST CONJUGATION OF VERBS. PERFECT, have been, vms, or am. Sing. Amatus sum or fui, I have been loved. Amatus es or fuisti, Thou hast been laved, Amatus est or fuit, He has been loved. Plur. Amati sumus or fuTmus, We have been loved. Amati, estia or fuistis. Ye or you have been loved^ Amati aunt or fuerunt or fuere. They have been loved. PLUPERFECT, had been. Sing. Amatus eram or fueram. I had been loved. Amatus eras or fueras, Thou hadst been loved, Amatus erat or fuerat, He had been levied. Plur. Amati eramus or fueraraus, We had been loved. Amati eratis or fueratis, Ye or you had been loved, Amati erant or fuerant, 7' hey had been loved. FUTURE, shall or will be. S. Am-abor, I shall be loved. P. Am-abimur, We shall be loved. Am-aberis or ) ^,^ .^ ^ ^ ^ Am-abimini, Ye or you will beloved. -abere, J " Am-abuntur, They will be loved. Am-abitur, He will be loved. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT TENSE, may, or can be. S. Am-er, I may be loved. P. Am-emur, We may be loved. Am-eris or ere, Thou mayest be loved. Am-cmmi, Ye or you may be loved. Am-etur, He may be loved. Am-entur, T?iey may be Laved. IMPERFECT, might, could, would, or should he. S. Am-arer, / might be laved. P. Am-aremur, We might be laved. Am-areris or \ Thou mightest be » ^ „ ^- ( Ye or you misht be t 7^ J Am-aremmi, < i ^ j ° -arere, y laved. ' ( loved. Am-aretur, He might be loved. Am-arentur, They might be loved. PERFECT, may have been. Sing. Amatus sim or fuerim., I may have been loved. Amatus sis or fueris. Thou mayest have been loved. Amatus sit or fuerit, He may have been laved. Plur. Amati simus or fuerimus, We may have been laved. Amati sitis or fueritis, Ye or you may have been laved. Amati sint or fuerint. They may have been laved. PLUPERFECT, might, could, would, or should have been. Sing. Amatus essem or fuissem, I might have been laved. Amatus esses or fuisses, Thau mightest have been loved, Amatus esset or fuisset, He might have been loved. Plur. Amati essemus or fuissemus, We might have been loved. Amati essetis or fuissetis, Ye or you might have been loved. Amati essent or fuissent, They might have been loved. FUTURE, shall have been. Sing. Amatus fuero, / shall have been laved. Amatus fueris. Thou wilt have been loved. Amatus fuerit, He will have been laved. Plur. Amati fuerimus, We shall have been loved. Amati fueritis, Ye or you will have been loved. Amali fuerint, They will have been loved. SECOND CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 97 Sing. 2. Am-are, or am-ator, 3. Am-ator, Plur. 2. Ara-amini, 3. Am-antor, IMPERATIVE MODE. Be thou loved. Let him be loved. Be ye loved. Let them be loved. INFINITIVE MODE. PRES. Am-ari, PERF. Esse or fuisse amatus, -a, -um, FUT. Amatum iri, To be loved. To have been loved. To be about to be loved. PERF. Am-atus, -a, -um, FUT. Am-andus, -a, -um. PARTICIPLES. Loved. To be loved. SECOND CONJUGATION. ACTIVE VOICE. Pres. Ind. Doceo, Pres. Inf. docere. Perf. Ind. Supine. docui, doctum, To teach. INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. FUTURE. ttack^ or am teaching. S. Doc-eo, Doc-es, Doc-et, was. S. Doc-ebam, Doc-ebas, Doc-ebat, have. 5.Doc-ui, Doc-uisti, Doc-uit, had. S. Doc-ueram, Doc-ueras, Doc-uerat, shall or urill. S. Doc-ebo, Doc-ebis, Doc-ebit, P. Doc-emus, Doc-etis, Doc-ent. P. Doc-ebamus, Doc-ebatis, Doc-ebant P. Doc-uimus, Doc-uistis, Doc-uerunt, or -uere. P. Doc-ueramus, Doc-ueratis, Doc-uerant. P. Doc-ebimus, Doc-ebitis, Doc-ebunt SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. may or can. S. Doc-eam, Doc-eas, Doc-eat, P. Doc-eamus, Doc-eatis, Doc-eant. IMPERFECT. might, could, vootUd, or should. S. Doc-erem, Doc-eres, Doc-eret, P. Doc-eremus, Doc-eretis, Doc-erent. PERFECT. may have. S. Doc-uerim, Doc-ueris, Doc-uerit, P. Doc-uerimus, Doc-ueritis, Doc-uerint. PLUPERFECT. might, could, would, or should have. S. Doc-uissem, Doc-uisses, Doc-uisset, P. Doc-uissemus Doc-uissetis, Doc-uissent. FUTURE. shall have. S. Doc-uero, Doc-ueris, Doc-uerit, P. Doc-uerimus, Doc-ueritis, Doc-uerint. IMPERATIVE MODE. fil. 2. Doc-e or doc-eto, Teach thou. 3. Doc-eto, Let him teach. P. 2. Doc-ete or doc-etOte, Teach ye or you. 3. poc-ento, Let them teach. INFINITIVE MODE. 9 PRES. Doc-ere, PERF. Doc-uisse, _ FUT. Esse doc-tdrus, -a, -um, Fuisse doc-turus, -a, -um. To teach. To have taught. To be about to teach. To have been about to teach. 98 SECOND CONJUGATION OP VERBS. PARTICIPLES. PRES. Doc-ens, Teaching. FUT. Doc-turus, -a, -um, About to teach. SUPINES. Former. Doc-tum, To teach. Latter. Doc-tu, To teach or to be taught. GERUNDS. Norn. Doc-endum, Gen. Doc-endi, Dat. Doc-endo, Ace. Doc-endum, AU. Doc-endo, Teaching. Of teaching. To teaching. Teaching. With teaching. Pres. Indie. § 121« Doceor, PRESENT. am. S. Doc-eor, Doc-eris or do-cere, Doc-ctur, P. Doc-emur, Doc-emini, Doc-entur. PASSIVE VOICE. Pres. Infin. doceri, INDICATIVE MODE. IMPERFECT, toot. S. Doc-ebar, Doc-ebaris, or doc-ebare, Doc-ebatur, P. Doc-ebamur, Doc-ebaraini, Doc-ebantur. Per/. Part. doctus. To be taught. PERFECT. have been, t»a», or am. S. Doctus sum or fui, Doctus es or fuisti, Doctus est or fuit, P. Docti suraus or fuimu^ Docti estis or fuistis, Docti sunt or fuerunt o* fuere. PLUPERFECT. had been. S. Doctus eram or fueram, Doctus eras or fueras, Doctus erat or fuerat, P. Docti eramus or fuemmus, Docti eratis or fueratis, Docti erant or fuerant. FUTURE. shall or toill be. . Doc-ebor, Doc-eberis or -ebere, Doc-ebitur, '. Doc-ebimur, Doc-ebimini, Doc-ebuiitur. PRESENT TENSE. may, or can bt. S. Doc-ear, Doc-earis or -eare, Doc-eatur, p. Doc-^mur, Doc-eamini, Doc-eantur. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. IMPERFECT. might, could, would, or should be. S. Doc-erer, Doc-ereris or -erere, Doc-eretur, P. Doc-eremur, Doc-eremmi, Doc-erentur. PERFECT. may haxx been. S. Doctus sim or fuerira, Doctus sis or fueris, Doctus sit or fuerit, P. Docti simus or fuerimus, Docti sitis or fueritis, Docti sint or fuerint. PLUPERFECT. might, could, would, or should have been. S. Doctus essem or fuiasem, Doctus esses or fuisses, Doctus esset or fuii^et, p. Docti essemus or fuissemus, Docti essetis or fuissetis, Docti essent or fuissent. FUTURE. shall have been. S. Doctus fuero, Doctus fueris, Doctus fuerit, P. Docti fueriinus. Docti fueritis, Docti fuerint. Sing. 2. Doc-ere or doc-etor, 3. Doc-etor, Plur. 2. Doc-emini, 3. Doc-entor. IMPERATIVE MODE. Be thou taught. Let him be taught. Be ye taught. Let them be taught THIRD CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 09 INFINITIVE MODE. PRES. Doc-eri, PERF. Esse or fuisse doctus, -a, -um, FUT. Doctmn iri, To be tavghU To have been taught. To be about to he taught PERF. Doc-tus, -a, -urn, FUT. Doc-endus, -a, -um, PARTICIPLES. Taught To be THIRD CONJUGATION, ACTIVE VOICE, Pre$. tnd. Pres. Inf, Per/. Ind. h 122. L^o, legere. legi. Supitre, lectum, To read* INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT. r«od, or «m readins- S. Leg-o, Leg-is, Leg-it, p. Leg-imus, Leg-itis, Leg-unt IMPERFECT. vocu. S. Leg-ebam, Leg-ebas, Leg-ebat, p. Leg-ebamus, Leg-ebalis, Leg-ebant. PERFECT. have. S. Leg-i, Leg-isti, Leg-it, P. Leg-imus, Leg-istis, Leg-erunt or PLUPERFECT. had. S. Leg-eram, Leg-eras, Leg-erat, P. Leg-eram uts, Leg-eratis, Leg-erant FUTURE. shall, or totS. S. Leg-am, Leg-es, Leg-et, P. Leg-emuss, Leg-etis, Leg-ent SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. itJTURE, may, or can. might, andd, umtld, or shoiUd. may have. might, could, would. or should have. thaU haw. S, Leg-am, S. Leg-erera, S, Leg-erim, S, Legnissem, S. Leg-ero, Leg-as, Leg-eres, Leg-eris, Leg-isses, Leg-eris, Leg-at, Leg-eret, Leg-erit, Leg-isse t. Leg-erit, P. Leg-amus, P. Leg-eremus, P, Leg-erimus, P. Leg-issemus, P. Leg-erimus, Leg-atis, Leg-e re lis, Leg-eritis, Leg-isse tis, Leg-eritid» Leg-ant Leg-erent. Leg-erint- Leg-issent. Leg-erint IMPERATIVE MODE, S. 2. Leg-e or leg-ito. Read thou. a Leg-ito, Let him read. P. 2. lieg-ite or leg-itote. Read ye or yotu a Leg-mito, Let them read. INFINITIVE MODE. PRES. Leg-ere, To read. PERF. Leg-isse, To have read. FUT. Esse lecturus, -a, -um, To he about to read. Fuisse lee turus, -a, -uni, To have been about to read 100 THIRD CONJUGATION OF VERBS. PARTICIPLES. PRES. Leg-ens, Reading. FUT. Lecturus, -a, -ura, About to read. SUPINES. Former. Lec-tum, To read. Latter. Lectu, To read or to be read. GERUNDS. Nom. Leg-endum, Gen. Leg-endi, Dat. Leg-endo, Ace. Leg-endum Abl Leg-endo, Reading. Of reading. To reading. Reading. With reading. Pres. Indie. § 133« Legor, PRESENT. am. S. Leg-or, Leg-eris or -ere, Leg-itur, P. Leg-imur, Leg-imini, Leg-untur. PASSIVE VOICE. Pres. Injin. legi, INDICATIVE MODE. IMPERFECT. xoas, S, Leg-ebar, Leg-ebaris or rebare, Leg-ebatur, P. Leg-ebamur, Leg-ebamini, Leg-ebantur. Perf. Part. lectus, To be read. PERFECT. fiave been, was or am. S. Lectus sum or fui, Lectus es or fuisli, Lectus est or fuit, P. Lecti sumus or fuimus, Lecti estis or fuistis, Lecti sunt or fuerunt or fuere. PLUPERFECT. had been. S. Lectus eram or fueram, Lectus eras or fueras, Lectus erat or fuerat, P. Lecti eramus or fueramus, Lecti eratis or fueratis, Leoti erant or fuerant. FUTURE. $hall, or wiU'be. S. Leg-ar, Leg-eris or -ere, Leg-etur, P. Leg-emur, Leg-emini, Leg-entur. PRESENT. may or can be. S. Leg-ar, Leg-aris, or -are, Leg-atur, P. Leg-amur, Leg-amini, Leg-antur. PLUPERFECT. might, could, would, or should have been. S. Lectus essem or fuissem, Lectus esses or fuisses, Lectus esset or fuisset, p. Lecti essem us or fuissemus, Lecti essetis or fuissetis, Lecti essent or fuissent SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. IMPERFECT. might, could, would, or should be. S. Leg-erer, • Leg-ereris or -erere, Leg-eretur, P. Leg-eremur, Leg-eremini, Leg-erentur. PERFECT. may have been. S. Lectus sim or fuerim, Lectus sis or fueris, Lectus sit or fuerit, P. Lecti simus or fuerimus, Lecti sitis or fueritis, Lecti sint or fuerint. FUTURE. shall have been. S. Lectus fuero, Lectus fueris, Lectus luerit, P. Lecti fuerimus, Lecti fueritis, Lecti fuerint. S. 2. Leg-ere or -itor, 3. Leg-itor, p. 2. Leg-imini, 3. Leg-untor, IMPERATIVE MODE. Be thou read. Let him be read. Be ye read. Let them be read. THIRD CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 101 INFINITIVE MODE. PRES. Leg-i, tERF. Esse or fuisse lectij^ -a, -um, FUT. Lectum iri, To be read. To have been read. To be about to be read. PERF. Lec-tus, -a, -um, FUT. Leg-endus, -a, -um. PARTICIPLES. Read. To be read. § 124« Example of a verb of the third conjuga- tion ending in io. ACTIVE VOICE, Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Supine. Capio. Capere, Cepi, Captum, to take. INDICATIVE MODE, PRESENT. IMPERFECT, PERFECT. PLUPERFECT. FUTURE. S. Capio, 5!. Capiebam, -S. Cepi, S. Ceperam, /S. Capiam, Capis, Capiebas, Cepisti, Ceperas, Capies, Capit, Capiebat, Cepit, Ceperat, Capiet, P. Capimus, P. Capiebamus, P. Cepimus, P. Ceperamus, P. Capiemus, Capitis, Capiebatis, Cepistis, Ceperatis, Capietis, Capiunt, Capiebant Ccperunt, or cepere. Ceperant. Capient SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PERFECT. PLUPERFECT, FUTURE. S. Capiam, pisse. 2. Capite or Capitote^ FUT. ] "sse capturus, -a, um. 3. Capiunto. I Suisse captiirns, - a, um. PARTICIPLES. GERUNl D& PRESENT. Capiens. FUTURE. Caplurus. Nom.C 'apiendum. SUPINES. Gen. C Dat. C 'apiendi, apiendo, Former. Captum. Ace. C apiendum, Latter. Captu. Abl. C apiendo. ■^ 102 FOURTH CONJUGATION OF VERBS. PASSIVE VOICE. Fres. Indie. § 125* Capior, Pres. Inj Capi, Perf. Part. ^ Captus, To he made. INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT. S. Capior, Caperis or Capere, Capitur, P. Capimur, Capimmi, Capiuntur. IMPERFECT. S. Capiebar, Capiebaris, or -bare, Capiebatur, P. Capiebamur, Capiebammi, Capiebantur. PERFECT. S. Captus sum or fui, Captus es or fuisti, Captus es or fuit, P. Capti sumus or fuimus, Capti estis or fuistis, Capti sunt or fuerunt or fuere. PLUPERFECT. FUTURE. S. Captus eram or fueram, Captus eras or fueras, Captus erat or fuerat, P. Capti eramus or fuerami Capti eratis or fueratis, Capti erant or fuerant. IS, S. Capiar, Capieris or capiere, Capietur, P. Capiemur, Capiamini, Capiantur. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. iS. Capiar, Capiaris or capiare, Capiatur, P. Capiamur, CapiamVni, Capiantur. IMPERFECT. iS. Caperer, Capereris or -erere, Caperetur, P. Caperemur, Caperemini, Caperentur. PERFECT. S. Captus sim or fuerira, Captus sis or fueris, Captus sit or fuerit, P. Capti simus or fuerimus, Capti sitis or fueritis, Capti sint or fuerint PLUPERFECT. FUTURE. S. Captus essem or fuissem, Captus esses or fuisses, Captus esset or fuisset, p. Capti essemus or fuissem Capti essetis or fuissetis, Capti essent or f iiissent. us. S. Captus fuero, Captus fueris, Captus fuerit, P. Capti fuerimus, Capti fueritis, Capti fuerint. IMPERATIVE M( 3DE. INFINITIVE MODE. 2. Capere or capitor, 3. Capitor. 2. Capimmi, 3. Capiuntor. PRES, Capi. PERF. Esse or fuisse captus, -a, -um. FUT. Captum in. PERF. Captus, -a, -um. 1 FUT. Capiendus, -a, -um. FO URTH CONJUGATION. ACTIVE VOICE. Pres. Indie. ^ 126. Audfo, Pres. InJ audire, Perf. Im audivi iic. Supine. , audltum, To hear. FOURTH CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 103 INDICATIVE MODE. PRESENT. Hear, or am hearing. IS. Aud-io, Aud-is, Aud-it, P. Aud-Tmus, Aud-Ttis, Aud-iunt. IMPERFECT. S. Aud-iebam, Aud-iebas, Aud-iebat, P. Aud-iebamus, Aud-iebatis, Aud-iebant. PERFECT. have. S. Aud-ivi, Aud-Tvisti, Aud-ivit, P. Aud-ivimus, Aud-ivistis, Aud-iverunt, or -ivere. PLUPERFECT. had. S. Aud-iveram, Aud-iveras, Aud-iverat, P. Aud-ivera- mus, Aud-iveratis, Aud-iverant. FUTURE. shall or wilL S. Aud-iam, Aud-ies, Aud-iet, P. Aud-iemus, Aud-ietis, Aud-ient. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. may or can, S. Aud-iam, Aud-ias, A ud-iat, P. Aud-iamus, Aud-iatis, Aud-iant IMPERFECT. might, caidd, would, or thnuld. S. Aud-Trem, Aud-ires, Aud-Tret, P. Aud-iremus, Aud-iretis, Aud-irent. PERFECT. may have. S. Aud-iverira, Aud-iveris, Aud-iverit, P.Aud-iveri- mus, Aud-iveritis, Aud-iverint. PLUPERFECT. might, could, would, or should have. S. Aud-ivissem, Aud-ivisses, Aud-ivisset, P. Aud-ivisse- mus, Aud-ivissetis, Aud-ivissent. FUTURE. shall have. S. Aud-ivero, Aud-iveris, Aud-iverit, P. Aud-iverTmust Aud-iveritis, Aud-iverint. Sing. 2. Aud-i or -Ito, 3. Aud-ito, Plur. 2. Aud-ite or -itote, 3. Aud-i unto, PRES. Aud-ire, PERF. Aud-ivisse, FUT. Esse aud-itiirus, -a, Fuisse aud-itiirus, -a, PARTICIPLES. PRES. Aud-iens, Hearing. FUT. Aiid-itiirus, -a, -um, About to hear. SUPINES. Former. Aud-itum, To hear. Latter. Aud-itu, To hear, or to be heard. IMPERATIVE MODE. Hear thou. Let him hear. Hear ye or you. Let them hear. INFINITIVE MODE. To hear. To have heard. -um. To be about to hear. -um. To have been about to hear. GERUNDS. Nom. Aud-iendum, Hearing. Gen. Aud-i end i, Of hearing. Dat. Aud-iendo, To hearing. Ace. Aud-iendum, Hearing. Abl. Aud-iendo, With hearing. Pres. Indie. § 127. Audior, PRESENT. am. S. Aud-ior, Aud-Tris, or -Ire, Aud-Ttur, P. Aud-Tmur, Aud-imini, Aud-iuntur. PASSIVE VOICE. Pres. Infin. audiri, INDICATIVE MODE. IMPERFECT. was. S. Aud-iebar, Aud-iebaris or ) -iebare, ) Aud-i ebatur, P. Aud-iebamur, Aud-iebamtni, Audiebantur. Per/. Part. audltus, To be heard. PERFECT. have been. S. Audltus sum or fui, Audltus es or fuisti, Audltus est or fuit, P. Auditi sumus or fui/nus, Auditi estis or fuistis, Auditi sunt or fuerunt or fuere. 104 DEPONENT AND COMMON VERBS. PLUPERFECT. FUTURE. had been. shall OTUoiU be. S. Auditus eram or fiieram, S. Aud-iar, Auditus eras or fueras, Aud-ieris or -iere, Auditus erat or fuerat, Aud-ietur, P. AudTti eramus or fueramus, P. Aud-iemur, Auditi eratis or fueratis, Aud-iemini, Auditi erant or fuerant. Aud-ientur. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRESENT. IMPERFECT. PERFECT. may or can U. might, could, would, or should be. T/iay have been. S. Aud-iar S. Aud-irer, S. Auditus sim or fuerim, Aud-iaris, or ) -iare, j Aud-ireris or i -rere, S Auditus sis or fueris, Auditus sit or fuerit. Aud-iatur, Aud-iretur, P. Auditi simus or fueri- P. Aud-iamur, P. Aud-iremur, mus. Aud-iamini, Aud-ireraini, Auditi sitis or fueritis, Aud-iantur. Aud-irentur. Auditi sint or fuerint. PLUPERFECT. FUTURE. might, could, wculd, or should have been. shall have been. S. Auditus essem or fuissem, S. Auditus fiiero, Auditus esses or fuisses. Auditus fueris, Auditus esset or fuisset, Auditus fuerit,. p. Auditi essemus or fuisseraus, P. Auditi fuerimus, Auditi essetis or fuissetis, Auditi fueritis, Auditi essent or luissent, Auditi fuerint, IMPERATIVE MODE. S. 2. Aud-Tre or -itor, Be thou heard. 3. Aud-itor, Let him be heard. P. 2. Aud-imini, £e ye heard. 3. Aud-iuntor, Let them be heard. INFINITIVE MODE. PRES. Aud-iri, 7'o be heard. PERF. Esse or fuisse auditus, -a, -um, To have been heard. ruT. Auditumiri, To be about to be heard. PARTICIPLES. PERF. Aud-Ttus, Heard. FUT. Aud-iendus, To be heard. DEPONENT AND COMMON VERBS. § 128. A deponent verb is that v^hich, under a passive form, has an active or neuter signification ; as, Loquor^ I speak ; morior^ I die. A common verb, under a passive form, has either an active or passive signification ; as, crlmmor^ I accuse, or I am accused. DEPONENT AND COMMON VERBS. 105 Most deponent verbs of old were the same with common verbs. They are called Deponent^ because they have laid aside the passive sense. Deponent and common verbs form the participle perfect in the same manner as if they had the ac- tive voice ; thus, Lcetor^ Icetdri^ Icetdtus^ to rejoice ; vereor^ vereri, verttusj to fear ; fungor, fungi, functus^ to discharge an office ; potior, potlri, potltus, to enjoy, to be master of. Conjugation of the deponent verb Miror, * I admire.' Miror^ mi- rdris or -drCj mirdri, mirdius. INDICATIVE MODE. PRES. Miror, I admire ; miraris or -are, thou admiresty <^c. IMP. Mirabar, -abaris or -abare, &c., / admired, ^c. PERF. Miratus sum, or fui ; miratus es or fuisti, &«., / have, ^c. PLUP. Miratus eram, or fueram, &c., / had admired, <^c. FUT. Mirabor ; miraberis, or mirabere, &c., I shall admire, ^c. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. PRES. Mirer ; mireris or -ere, &c., I may admire, ^c. IMP. Mirarer ; areris or -arere, &c., I might admire, ^c. PERF. Miratus sim, or fuerim, &c., I may have admired, ^c. PLUP. Miratus essera, or fuissem, &c., I might have admired, ^c. FUT. Miratus ero, or fuero, &c., I shall have admired, ^c. IMPERATIVE MODE. PRES. Mirare or mirator, &c., admire thou, or do thou admire, ^c INFINrnVE MODE. PRES. Mirari, to admire. PERF. Miratus esse or fuisse, to have admired. FUT. Miraturus esse, to he about to admire. Miratum iri, to be about to he admired. Miratiirus fuisse, to have been about to admire. Mirandus fuisse, to have been about to be admired. PARTICIPLES. PRES. Mirans, admiring. PERF. Miratus, having admired. FUT. in Rus. Miratiirus, about to admire. Dus. Mirandus, to be admired. GERUNDS. Mirandum, -di, -do, and -dum. SUPINES. Miratum, miratu. 106 FORMATION OP VERBS. FORMATION OF VERBS. § 139« There are four principal parts of a verb, from which all the rest are formed ; namely, O of the present, / of the perfect indica- tive, RE of the infinitive, and UM of the supine.* A verb is com- monly said to be conjugated when only these parts are mentioned, be- cause from them all the rest are derived. The first person of the Present indicative is called the Theme, or the Root of the verb ; because from it the other three principal parts are formed. All the letters which come before -are, -ere, -ere, or -Ire, of the in- finitive, are called radical letters, because they always remain the same. By putting these before the terminations, all the parts of any regular verb may be readily formed, except the compound tenses. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. Indicative Mode, V 1 30 The Imperfect indicative is formed from the present, by changing o, in the first conjugation, into dbam ; as, am-o, am-dbam : — in the second conjugation, by changing o into barn ; as, doce-o, doce- bam : — in the third and fourth conjugations, by changing o into ebam ; as, leg-o, leg-ebam ; audi-o, audi-ebam. The Pluperfect indicative is formed from the perfect in all the conjugations by changing i into eram ; as, amdv-i, amav-eram ; docu-i, docu-eram; leg-i, leg-eram; audiv-i, audiv-eram. The Future indicative is formed from the present, by changing o, in the first conjugation, into dbo; as, am-o, am-dbo ; in the second conjugation by changing o into bo ; as, doce-o, doce-bo ; in the third and fourth conjugations, by changing o into am ; as, leg-o, leg-am ; audi-o, audi-am, Subjunctive Mode, § X3X« The Present subjunctive is formed from the present indicative by changing o, in the first conjugation, into em ; as, am-o, am-em ; in the second, third, and fourth conjugations, by changing o into am ; as, doce-o, doce-am ; leg-o, leg-am ; audi-o, audi-am. The Imperfect subjunctive is formed, in all the conjugations, from the present infinitive, by adding m ; as, amdre, amdrem ; docere, do- cerem ; legere, legerem ; audire, audlrem. 1. From o are formed am and em. 2. From i ; ram, rim, ro, sse, and ssem. 3. U, us, and rus, are formed from um. 4. All other parts from re do come. FORMATION OF TENSES. 107 The Perfect subjunctive is formed from the perfect indicative, by- changing i into erim ; as, amd-vi, amav-erim ; docu-i, docu-erim ; leg-iy leg-erim; audiv-i, audiv-erim. The Pluperfect subjunctive is formed from the perfect indicative, by changing I into issem; as, amdv-i, amav-issem; docu-i, docu- issem; leg-i, leg-issem; audiv-i, audiv-issem. The Future subjunctive is formed from the perfect indicative, by changing i into ero ; as, amdv-i, amav-ero ; docu-i, docu-ero ; leg-i, leg-ero ; audlv-i, audiv-ero. Imperative Mode. § 133* The Present imperative is formed from the present in- finitive, by taking away re; as, amdre, ama; docere, doce ; legere, lege; audire, audi. Infinitive Mode, § 133* The Present infinitive is formed from the present indi- cative, by changing o, in the first conjugation, into are; as, am-o, am-dre; in the second and fourth conjugations, by changing o into re ; as, doce-o, doce-re ; audi-o, audl-re ; in the third conjugation, by changing o or io into ere ; as, leg-o, leg-ere ; cap-io, cap-ere. The Perfect infinitive is formed from the perfect indicative, by changing i into isse ; as, amdv-i, amav-isse ; docu-i, docu-isse ; leg-i, leg-isse ; audiv-i, audiv-isse. The Future infinitive is formed from the supine, by changing m into rus, and adding esse, or fuisse ; as, amdtu-m, amatu-rus, esse or fuisse ; doctu-m, doctu-rus, esse or fuisse ; lectu-m, lectu-rus, esse or fuisse ; auditu-m, auditu~rus, esse or fuisse. Participles. V 134» The Present Participle is formed from the present in- dicative, by changing o, in the first conjugation, into ans ; as, am-o, am-ans ; in the second conjugation, by changing o into ns ; as, doce-Oy doce-ns ; in the third and fourth conjugations, by changing o into ens; as, leg-o, leg-ens ; audi-o, audi-ens. The Future Participle is formed from the supine, by changing m into rus; as, amdtu-m, amatu-rus; doctu-m, doctu-rus; lectu-m, lectu-rus ; auditu-m, auditu-rus. Gerunds. V 13 5« The Gerunds are formed from the present participle, by changing s into dum, di, and do ; as, aman-s ; aman-dum, aman-di, aman-do ; docen-s ; docen-dum, docen-di, docen-do ; legen-s; legen-dum, legen-di, legen-do,- audien-s ; audien-dum^ audien-di, audien-do. 108 FORMATION OF TENSES. FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. Indicative and Subjunctive Modes. § 1 36« The Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative ; and the Present, and Imperfect Subjunctive, are formed from the correspond- ing tenses in the active voice. From those tenses in the active voice which end in o, the same tenses in the passive are formed by adding r ; but from those which, in the active voice, end in m, the same tenses of the passive are formed by changing m into r. First Conjugation. Second Conjugation. Third Conjugation. Active. Passive. f Active. Passive. Active. — > Passive. Pres. Indie. amo, amor. doceo, doceor. lego, legor. Imp. Indie. amabam, amabar. docebam, docebar. legebam, lege bar. Fut. Indie. amabo, araabor. docebo, docebor. legam, legar. Pres . Subj. amem, amer. doceam, docear. legam, legar. Imp. Subj. amarera, amarer. docerem, docerer. legerera, legerer. The other five tenses, namely, the Perfect and Pluperfect Indica- tive ; and the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Subjunctive, are com- posed of the perfect participle, declined with the tenses of the verb Sum, Imperative Mode. § 137« The Imperative Passive is the same as the Infinitive Active, Infinitive Mode. § 138« The Present tense of the Infinitive mode is formed from the Infinitive Active, by changing e, in the first, second, and fourth conjugations, into i; as, amdr-e, amdr-i; docer-e, docer-i; audir-e, audir-i ; and in the third conjugation, by changing ere into i ; as, leg-ere, leg-i. The Future Infinitive is composed of the former supine, and iri, (which is the infinitive passive of the verb eo, to go,) as, amdtum iri ; doctum iri ; lectum iri. Participles. § 130* The Perfect Participle is formed from the former supine, by changing m into s ; as, amdtu-m, amdtu-s ; doclu-m, doctu-s ; lee- tu-m, lectu-s ; auditu-m, auditu-s. The Future Participle is formed from the present active participle, by changing s into dus ; as, amans, amandus ; docens, docendus ; legens, legendus ; audiens, audiendus. SIGNIFICATION OF THE DIFFERENT TENSES. 109 SIGNIFICATION OF THE TENSES IN THE VARIOUS MODES. V X40» The tenses formed from the present of the indicative or infinitive, signify in general the continuance of an action or passion, or represent them as pre- sent at some particular time : the other tenses express an action or passion com- pleted ; but not always so absolutely, as entirely to exclude the continuance of the same action or passion ; thus, AmOy I love, do love, or am loving; amubam, I loved, did love, or was loving, &c. Amdvi, I loved, did love, or have loved, that is, have done with loving, Sic. In like manner, in the passive voice ; Amor, I am loved, I am in loving, or in being loved, &c. Past time in the passive voice is expressed several different ways, by means of the auxiliary verb sum, and the participle perfect ; thus : Indicative Mode. Perfect. Amutus sum, I am, err have been loved, or oftener, I was loved. Amdtus fui, I have been loved, or I was loved. Pluperfect. Amdtus eram, I was, or had been loved. Amdtus fucram, I had been loved. Subjunctive Mode. Perfect. Amdtus sim, I may be, or may have been loved. Amdtus fuerim, I may have been loved. Pluperfect. Amdtus essem, I might, could, would, or should be, or have been loved. Amdtus fuissem, I might, could, would, cr should have been loved ; or I had been loved. Future. Amdtus fuero, I shall have been loved. The verb sum is also employed to express future time in the indicative mode, both active and passive ; thus : Amaturus sum, T am about to love, I am to love, I am going to love, or I will love. We chiefly use this form, when some purpose or intention is signified. Amdtus ero, I shall be loved. Obs. 1. The participles amdtus, amafurus are put before the auxiliary verb, be- cause we commonly find them so placed in the classics. Obs. 2. In these compound tenses the learner should be taught to vary the par- ticiple like an adjective noun, according to the gender and number of the different substantives to which it is applied ; thus, amdtus est, he is or was loved, when applied to a man ; amdta est, she was loved, when applied to a woman ; amdtum est, it was loved, when applied to a thing; amdfi sunt, they were loved, when ap- plied to men, &c. The connecting of syntax, so far as is necessary, with the inflec- tion of nouns and verbs, seems to be the most proper method of teaching both. Obs. 3. The past time and participle perfect in English are taken in different meanings, according to the diflferent tenses in Latin which they are used to express. Thus, " I loved," when put for amdhnm, is taken in a sense different from what it has when put for amdvi ; so amor, and amdtus sum, I am loved ; amdhar and amd- tus eram, I was loved ; amer, and omutus sim, &c. In the one, loved is taken in a present, in the other, in a past sense. This ambiguity arises from the defective nature of the English verb. Obs. 4. The tenses of the subjunctive mode may be variously rendered, Accord- ing to their connexion with the other parts of a sentence. They are often expressed in English as the same tenses of the indicative, and sometimes one tense is appa- rently put for another. 10 110 SIGNIFICATION OP THE DIFFERENT TENSES* Thus, Quasi hdelTlgant, qualix sif, As if they understood, what kind of person ho is. Cic. In fac^mus jurasse put(S,Y o\i would think, v?!zc^ Ov. Eloquar an sUeam? Shall I speak out or be silent ? Nee vos argu^rim, Teucri, for argvam, Virg. Si qiiid te fugerei, ego perierim, for 2)eT'.ho. Tcr. Hunc ego si potui iauium eperare dolorem ; El pcrferre, soror, potcto : for potuissem and possetn. Virg. SingTua quid referam? Why should I mention every thing? Id. Prcediceres mihi, You should have told me beforehand. Ter. Al. In dic'is, AlbUne, maneres. Ought to have stood to your word. Virg. Ciiius, crcdiderim, I should sooner believe. Juv. Hauserct ensis, The sword would have destroyed. Virg. Fucrint iroti. Grant or suppose they were angry. Si idfecissef, If he did or should do that. Cic. The same promiscu- ous use of the tenses seems also to take place sometimes in the indicative and infinitive ; and the indicative to be put for the subjunctive ; as, Animus meminisse horret, luctuque refugit, for refugit. Virg. Fturat melius, for fuisset. Id. InvidicB dilapsa era', for fuisset. Sail. Quamdiu in portum ve^is '( for venisfi. Plant. Qiiam mox naVigo Ephesum, for navigaho. Id. Ta si hie sis, aWer senfias. Ter. for esfies and sentires. Cato ajirmal, se vivo, ilium, nan triumpliure, for triumphaturum. esse. Cic. Persuadet Casltco, ut occuparet, for occupet. Obs. 5. The future of the subjunctive, and also of the indicative, is often ren- dered by the present of the subjunctive in English; as, nisi hoc faciei, or fccerit, unless he do this. Ter. Obs. 6. Instead of the imperative we often use the present of the subjunctive; as, valeas, farewell ; hue venias, come hither. Sic. And also the future both of the indicative and subjunctive; as, non occldes, do not kill; ne feceris, do not do; valcbis meque amabis, farewell, and love me. Cic. The present and the preter-imperfect of the infinitive are both expressed under the same form. All the varieties of past and future time are expressed by the other tW'O tenses. But in order properly to exemplify the tenses of the infinitive mode, we must put an accusative, and some other verb before each of them; thus: Dicil me scribere ; he says that I write, do write, or am w'riting. Dixit me scribere ; he said that I wrote, did write, or was writing. Dicit me scripsisse ; he says that I wrote, did write, or have written. Dixit me scripsisse ; he said that I had written. Dicit me scripturum esse ; he says that I will write. Dixit nos scripluros esse ; he said that we would write. Dicit nos scripluros fuisse ; he says that we would have written. Dicit littras scribi ; he says thai letters are written, writing, or in writing. Dixit literas scribi ; he said that letters were writing, or w ritten. Dicit literas scriptas esse ; he says thai letters are, or were written. Dicit literas scriptas fuisse ; he says tlial letters have been written. Dixit literas scriptas fuisse ; he said that letters had been written. Dicit literas scriptum iri ; he says thai letters will be written. Dixit literas scriptum iri ; he said that letters would be written. The future, scriptum iri, is made up of the former supine, and the infinitive pas- sive of the verb eo, and therefore never admits of any variation. The future of the infinitive is sometimes expressed by a periphrasis, or circum- locution; thus, scio fore or futurum esse nt scrihant, — ut litcrce scrihantur ; 1 know that they will write, — that letters will be written. Scivi fore or fufurum fSf^e ut scriberent, — ut literce scribcrentur ; I knew that they would write, &c. Scivi fu- turum fuisse id liftrcp, scriberentur ; I knew that letters would have been written. This form is necessary in verbs which v\ant the supine. Obs. 7. The different tenses, when joined with any expediency or necessity, are thus expressed : Scribendum est mihi, puero, nobis, &c., lith-as ; I, the boy, we, &c., must write letters. Scribendum fdt mihi, puero, nobis, &c., I must have written, &c. Scribendum erit mihi; I shall be obliged to write. PRETERITE AND SUPINE. Ill Scio scrihendum esse mihi Uteras; I know that I must write letters. scribendum fuisse mihi; that 1 must have written. Dixit scribendum fore mihi ; he said that I should be obliged to write* Or with the participle in c?ws; LiteroB sunt scribendcs mihi, -puKro, homintbus, &c., or a me, puero^ &c., letters are to be, or must be written by me, by the boy, by men, &c. So, Uteres scribendcB erant, fuerunt, erunf, &c. Si Uteres scrihendoe sint, essenf, forent, &c. Scio Uteras scri- bendas esse ; I know that letters are to be, or must be written. Scivi Uteras scri- bendas fuisse ; I knew that letters ought to have been, or mast have been written. FORMATION OF THE PRETERITE AND SUPINE. GENERAL RULES. § 141» Compound and simple verbs form the preterite and supine in the same manner; as, Voco^ vdcdvij vocdtum^ to call ; so, revdco, revocdvi, revocdtum, to recall. Exc. 1. When the simple verb in the preterite doubles the first syllable of the present, the compounds lose the former syllable ; as, pellOf pepidi, to beat; repello, repiili, never repepuli, to beat back. But the compounds otdo, sto, disco, and posco, follow the general rule ; thus, edisco, edldici, to get by heart ; deposco, depoposci, to demand : so, prcBcuri'o, prcecucurri ; repungOy repupugi. Exc. 2. Compounds which change a of the simple verb into t, have e in the supine or perfect participle ; as, facio, feci, factum, to make; perficio, perfect, perfectum^ to perfect. But compound verbs ending in do and go; ai^o the compounds of hdbeo, pldceo, sdpio^ sdlio, and stdtuOf observe the general rule. Il2 FIRST CONJUGATION OF VERBS. FIRST CONJUGATION. § 142* I. Verbs of the First Conjugation have are in the infinitive, dvi in the Perfect, and dtus in the Perfect Participle passive ; as, Amo,' amare, amavi, amatus, r. d. love. Verbs marked thus ^ have no Perfect Participle passive. Verbs thus marked t have no Perfect active. The Futures rus and dus are expressed by r. and D. ; and the Supines um and u, by m. and u. ; those verbs, therefore, which have not one or more of these letters prefixed to them, are deficient in those parts respectively which those letters signify. *Abundo,^ r overflow. Accuse,' R. D. M accuse. Adumbro,* delineate. iEdif ICO,* R. D build. ^quo,^ R. D level. ^stimo,'' R. D value. •Ambulo,^ D. M walk. Amplio,' D enlarge. *Aiigario,'° . . . press for public .'service. Appello,' ' D call. Apto,'2 D fit, ArOj^^* R. D. plough, *Ascio,'* chip with an axe. *Ausculto,' * . . . .- listen. *Autumo,''^ suppose. tBasio," D kiss. *Bello,'^ R. M wage war. Beo, ' ^ bless. *Boo,2« bellow. Brevio,^' shorten. In the following Notes are contained such Parti- ciples in Rus and Dus, and Supines of the verbs, as are found in the classics now extant ; together with the less frequent and irregular formations. ^Amaturus, Gell. 1. 3. 4. Amandus, Ovid. Amasse, Gell. Amasso, Plaut. — ^AbundatUrus, Tertull. — ^Accusdtum, Terent. Accusaturus, Li v. Accnsandns, Cic. — *The Participles in ns, rus and dus, do not occar. — ^ jKdificaturus, Cw.. Verr. jEdificand^is, Cic. Fam. — ^Mquaiurus, Claud. JEquandus, Ovid. — '^.«/i- mafSrws, Quintil. ^s'imandus, GeAl. — ^Ambuldtum,F\aut. OfHimbuldlum, Vlaut. Deamhddtum, Terent Ambulandus, Cels. Amlndafur, impers. Varr. — ^Ampli- andus, Cels. — ^°Avgario has no participles. — • ^ Appellandus, Cic. Appellassis ibr appellaver is, Terent. — *^Aptandus, Claud. — "The Participle A m77.s occurs only in Cic. de SenecL c. 16. Araturus, Tibull. Arandi/s, Virg. — '*0f this verb Ascieter only is found, Vitruv. vii. 2. — '^None of the Participles are to be found. Auscultabltiir, impers. Plaut. — '^ JNone of the Participles exist: aulumantur, pass. Plaut — ^''Basidvi seems not to exist: Basidtus, Mart xii. 59. Basiandus, Mart i. 95. ^^Belldtum, Nep. Debelldtum, Liv. Bellaturus, Claud. Bfllanlur, ' they fight,' Virg. yEn. xi. 6G0. — ^^Bcasti, Ter. Andr. Bedlus, said \o be the Perfect Participle of Beo, is used as an adjective. — ^°Bount, as if from Boo, bo'is, Pacuv. Bovantes, as if from B&vo. — ^^Brevidvit, Quint, xii. 10. Brevidtus, Sidon. FIRST CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 113 Caeco,' blind. Cffilo,' carve. Calceo,'' D shoe. •Calcitro,' ^ick. Canto,3 J, sing. Capto,* D. M seize. Carmino,* card wool. Castigo,^ D. M chastise. t*Catomidio, fiog on the shoulders. Celebro/ d make famous. Celo,^ D conceal. Centurio,^ divide into centuries. Certo,'° D. R strive. Cogito, " think. Coraparo, ' ^ d compare. Ccncilio,'^ r. d reconcile. Considero,'" R. D , consider. Cremo,' * d burn. Creo,'° R. D create. Crucio," D torment. Culpo,'^ R. D blame. Cuneo,'^ D wedge. Curo,2" R. D care. Damno,2" r. d. m condemn. Dec6ro,22 d adorn. Decurio,^^ divide into companies. *Delineo,2* delineate. Desidero,'-'* r. d desire. Destino,'^^ d tie, design. Dico,2' R. D. M dedicate. Dicto,^^ dictate. Dolo,'^^ hew, cut. Dono,^° R. D bestow. Dupllfco,^ ' R. D double. Duro,^^ R harden. Effigio,^' portray. tEmacio,'* emaciate. tEnucleo,^* d explain. Equito,^^ ride. Erro,'' wander. Existimo,^^ R. D. u think. ExplGro,'^ D. M search. tExsanio, .squeeze out blood. Exulo/° R. M be banished. FabrTco,''' d frame. tFascio,*'^ swathe. FatTgo,''^* R. D weary. Festino,"'^ r hasten. Firmo,*^ r. d strengthen. Flagito,*^ D. M demand. *Flagro,*' R be on fre. FW^ d blow. » The Participles in ns, rus, and du.% of Cccco, CcbIo, and Calcitro, do not occur in the classics. CfElassis for Ccelaveris, Festus. — ^ Calceandus, Phaedr. — ^ Cantd- fwm, Terent. — * Captdtum, Plant. Captandus, Plant. — ^The Participles ns, rus, and dus are not to be found. Carmindtns, Plin. N. H. ix. 38. — ^ Castigdtum, Plaut. Castigandus, Liv. xxxix. 25. — '' Celebrandus, Catul. — ^ Celandus, Just. — ^Cen- turidvit, Val. Max. Centuridtus, Liv. — '° Certaturus, Cscs. Cerlandus, Liv. Cer- tdtus, * contended for,' Sil. Multum certdto, ' after much contention,' Tacit. Ann. like aud'do, ' it being heard ;' comperto, * it being discovered.' CertUur, impers. Pacuv. — *' Cogitdturus, Hirt. — ^^ Comparandus, Terent. Comparassit for Cowr paraverif, Plaut. — ^^ Conciliaturus, Caesar. Conciliandus, Ovid. — ^* Consndera- turns, Curt. Considerandus, Apul. Flor. Consideravisse pro considerasse, Quint. — *^ Concrematurus, Liv. Cremandus, Ovid. — ^^ Creaturus, Liv. Creandus, Gell. The Participle in ns does not occur. — •' Cruciandus, Ovid. — '^ Culpaturus, Apul. Culpandus, Apul. — ^^ Cuneandus, Plin. — ^° Ciiraturus, Plaut. Curandus, Cels. Curassis, for cwravem, Plaut. — ^^ Damndtum, Qlu'mt. Damnatur us, Ovid. Dam- nandus, Ovid. — ^^ Decorandus, Cic. — ^^ Decuriasse, Cic. pro Plane. Deciiridtus, Liv. — 2'^ The simple Lineo, 'I draw lines,' has no Perfect now extant. Linedfus is found in Plaut. Delineavit, Plin. It has no participles. — ^^ Desideralurus, Plin. Desiderandus, Cic. — ^g £)estinandus, Vitruv. — ^''Dicdtum, Liv. i. 7. DicatHru.'s, Plin. Dicandus, Plin. — ^^ Dictdf.us, Juv. vi. 390. — "^ The Participles in ns, rus, and dus, do not occur. Dolavit, Cic. Dolatus, Juv. xii. 57. Dolere, 3d Conjugation, Lucr. ; hence, doHtus, Varr. — '° Donaturus, Apul. Met. Donandus, Hor. — ^ ' Du- plicaturiis, Cic. Att v. 18. Duplicandus, Liv. xxvii. IL — ^^ Duraturus, iMcan. ^^Effigidfus, Apul. — ^'^Emacidtvs, Colum. — ^'^The perfect of this verb cannot be found. Enucledtus, Cic. pro Plane. Enucleandus, Cic — ^^Equitdtus, 'ridden over;' Claud. Equitdta cohors, * infantry intermixed with cavalry;' Inscript. ap. Murat. — ^'^Errdtus, ' wandered over;' Virg. ^n. iii. 690. Errdtur, impers. Virg. G. iii. 249. Errdto mihi, for cum erravero, Cic. — ^^Existimdtu, Liv. Exlsfima- tur us, Cic. Exislimandus, Val. Max. — ^^Explordtum and Explorandus, Liv. — ^"Exuldtum, Liv Exulalurus, Justin. — '^^Fahricor, deponent, Cic. Off i. 4L Fabri- candus, Sil. — ^^Fascidtus, Mart. — '^^Falignndus, Cic. Off iii. 18. — "^"^Festijiafurus, Plin. Fe.?/mare;i^//r, Tacit. Hist. iii. 37. Festinanttir, TaciU Germ. c. 20. — "^F/r- fnaturus, Justin. Firinandns, Colum. — ^^F//is;itdtus, Tacit. Flagitdtum, Cic. Fla- giiandus, Justin. — '^"Flagraturus, Cic. Defiaffrutus, Cic. Cat. "iv. 6. — ^^ Flatus, ♦ blown ;' Flatus, ' cast,' • coined ;' Gell. Flandus, Cic. Confiandus, ibid. 10* 114 FIRST CONJUGATION OF VERBS. Formo,^ R. i) form, frame. tForo,'' D hore. Frseno,3 bridle. Fraudo,^ d defrauds tFrio,^ crumbie>. Fugo,^ R. D put to flight . Fundo,'' R found. tFurio,** madden. +Galeo,» put on a helmet. Gesto,!" D bear, tGlacio, » . to congeal. Gravo/^ d to weigh down. Gusto, 12 J, iQ taste. Habi to,i3 D. M to dwell. t*Halo, breathe. *Hio,''* D to ^ape. Humo,'^ R. D to bury. Hyemo,^^ m winter. IgnGro," R. D be ignorant. lra}>ero,i^ r. d command. Impetro,^^ r. D obtain by request. Iiichoo,2" r begin. Indago,2i r. D trace out. Indico,** R. D. M show. tlnebrio,^^ inebriate. Initio,'^* initiate. Inquino, pollute. Instauro,'^^ d renew. Intro,^^ R. D enter. Invito,^^ D. invite. Irrito,^^ D provoke. Itero,29 D. u .do again. Jacto,^ R. D throw, boast. Judico,^^ R. D judge. Jugo,22 D couple. Jugulo,33 D. M butcher. Juro,3* D swear. Laboro,35 r. d labour. Ijacero,^*' D tear. *Lacto, suckle, wheedle. Lanio,^' d butcher. Laqueo,^^ ensnare. Latro,3» bark. Laudo,4o R, D praise. Laxo,*» D loose. Lego,^2 _ depute, bequeath. Levo/3 R. D lighten. Libero,^* r. d free. ^ Formaturus, Justin. Formandus, Stat. Syl. — 'The Participles ns and rws are not in use. Fordtus, Vitruv. Forandus, Cels. — ^ The Participles ns, rus, and dus, do not occur. Frcendlus, Hirt. — ^The Participles ns and rus are not in use. Fiau' sus, ' having committed a fraud ;' Plant. Asin. Fraudandus, Quint. Curt. Frau- dassis for Fiaudaveris, Plaut. — ^ Fricdiis, Lucr. — ^Fvgaturus, Ovid. Fugandus, ibid. — ' The Participles ns and rus do not occur. — ^ Furidtus, Virg. ^n. ii, 407. — » Galedtits, Juv. — ^^ Qestandus, Stat. Theb. — ^^ Gravdtus, ' weighed down,' 'over- powered ;' Liv. XXV. 24. Gravdtus, ' indignant,' * weary of bearing,' ' disdaining to carry;' as if from a deponent Gravor, Hor. iv. Od. ii. 27. Grava/uh/s, Propert. — "The Participle Gus:a7is occurs only in Petron. c. 33. and Callus i. 98. 7'he Parti- ciple in r?/s is not in use. Gustandus, Ceh. — ^^Hahitdtum, Plaut. Hahitandus, Ovid. — ^^Hiandus, Pers. — ^^The Participle 72s is not to be found in the classics. Hvmaturus, Sueton. Humandus, Virg. ^n. vi. 161. — -'^Hi/emdtum, Nepos. — ^'' Ignordtus, 'not known;' Cic. Ignordtus, 'undiscovered;' Salust. — ^^Impeiatu- rws, Caesar. — ^^The Participle in ns seems not to exist. Impctraturus^liAx. Im- pefrandus, Val. Max. Impetrassere for imperaturum esse, Plaut. — '^^ Inchoaturus, Curt. Ad inchoandam rem. Liv. — ^^ Lulagatur, depon. The Participle in ns does not occur. Lidagatiirus, Apul. Indagandus, Gell. — ^ Indicatum, Liv. Indica- Inrvs, ibid. Indicosso for indicovero, Plaut. — ^^ Inebrialus, Plin. — ^* Inilidri, depon. ' to begin.' Inifidtus, Cic. Tusc. Initiantes for qui initiantur, Vitruv. No other participle. — ^^ Inslaurandus, Gell. — ^^ Intretur, pass. Tacit. Intrdri, ibid. Infrdri, impers. Caes. IntratHrus and Inirandus, Liv. — ^'' Invitandus, Suet. In- vitnssiiis lor invitaveritis. — ^ Irritandus, Liv. Irritassis for irritaveris, Plaut. — ^ Iterdtu, Plaut. Iterandus, Colum. — ^^ Jactaturus, Cic. Jacfandus, Ovid. — 81 Judicaturus, Caes. Judicandus, Cic. Judicassit for judicaverit, Cic. de Leg. iii. 3. — ^Jugandus, Hor. — ^ Juguldtum, Cic. Jugulandus, Vai. Max. — ^Jurdtus, 'sworn;' passim. Jurdtus, 'sworn by;' Ovid. Jurdtus, 'having sworn;' Cic. — ^^ Tjobordtus, 'wrought with labour;' Virg. -iS^n. i. 643. Labordtus, 'calamitous;' Val. Flac. Laborandus, Plin. Labordtur, impers. CaBS. — 36 Lacerandus, Lucan. — ^ Lnnidtus, Met. Laniandns, Liv. — ^^ Laquedre^ Manil. Laqueans, ibid. Laqued- vit, Luctat. No other parts of this verb are to be found. Illaqueo is more usual, though its Perfect is not found. Illaqucdtus, Cic. — ^ Lalrdtus, ' barked at.' La- ir efur, Impers. — ^" Laudalurus, Nep. Laudandus, Tibull. — *^ Laxavdus, Plin. — *2The Participles in ns, rus, and dus, do not occur. Legdtus, ' left by will.' Lfgd- and / are generally dropped before -si^ -suSy -tus ; as, Claudo, I shut, clausi^ clausus^ Dlvidoj I divide, divisi^ dlvisus ; Lcedo^ I hurt, Icesi^ Icesus ; Liido^ I play, lusi^ liisus ; Plaudo^ I applaud, plausi^ plausus ; Rddo^ I shave, msi, rdsus ; Trudo^ I thrust, trusij trusus ; Vddo^ I go, vdsi ; Flecto^ I bend, (^fiecsi^ jlexi^ (^jicGsus^ Jlexus^ &c. § 163« D and / sometimes become 5 before s; as, Cerfo, I yield, cessi^ cessus ; Mitto, I send, mlsi, mis- sus ; Qudtio, I sliake^ quassia guassus, &c. § 164« G is sometimes dropped before -si and -5W5 ; as, Spargo^ I scatter, sparsi^ spaf^us ; VergOj I incline, i;er5z, versus ; Mergo^ I dip, mersi^ mersus^ &c. So Parco^ I spare, drops c in par sums; and Pasco^ I feed, drops c in pastus. § 105o Verbs in -5co change -5co into -vi for the Perfect, and drop sc before -tus ; as, Cresco^ I grow, crevi^ cretus ; Nosco, I learn to know, uovi^ 7i6tus. § 166* ilf and n are frequently dropped both in the Perfect and Perfect Participle Passive ; as, Tcmno^ I despise, temsi; Fraiigo^ I break, y'reg'i, THIRD CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 131 fradus ; Riimpo^ I burst, rupi^ ruptus, &ic. M be- comes s before -si in Premo^ I press, pressi^ pressus : n becomes s in Pono^ I place, posui, positus. § 167^ Verbs changing -o into -^ for the Perfect, and into -itus. tusj or -siis^ for the Perfect Participle Passive : *Abnuo,^ abiiuSre, abnui, , abim'iturus, abnuendus, refuse. Acceiido," accendere, acceiidi, accensus, set on fire. Acuo,^ acuere, acui, acutus, acuendus, sharpen. Appendo, appendere, appendi, appensus, weigh. Arguo/ arguere, argui, argutus, argutum, arguiturus, arguendus, shoWf prove, accuse. *Batuo,° batuere, batui, , batuendus, beat. Btbo,° Wbere, bibi, btbitus, bibendus, drink. *Con£rruo/ congruere, congrui, , come tog-ether, agree. Defendo,^ defendere, defendi, defensus, r. d. ward off. ^Dego," degere, degi, , degendus, , live, dwell. Edo,^" edere, edi, esus, esum, esurus, edendus, eat. Emo," emere, emi, emtus, emttirus, emendus, ftify. Excudo/'' excudere, excudi, excusus, shake out, starhp. Exuo,^^ exuere, exui, exutus, exuendus, put off, strip. Fervo. See Ferveo, Second Conj. List. viii. Pindo/^ findere, f]di, fissus, findendus, cleave. Fundo,** fundere, fudi, fusus, fusurus, fundendus, pour. Ico,^° icere, ici, ictus, icturus, strike, 1 Neither the Participle Alvutns nor the Supine Almulvm are found except in dictionaries. Ati77My(22n/s, Sallust. Fragm. Hist. i. Abvvendvs, Senec. — ^'Accen- dcndis offensionibus callidi,' Tacit. Ann. — ^Aculrs, Prise; but it is used as a mere Adjective. Acnendv?, Cic. Phil. ii. — ^Argui, Liv. Argu!vs,V\2iUt. Argu- lujn. Supine, Festus. ArguUurns, Sallust. Argveridvs, Tacit. — ^ BdUii, Cic. Fam. Batueiidus, Nsbv. ap. Fulgent. 21. Some incorrectly write Pa//?/o,' hence BaltU' turn. Veil. Gloss. — « Bihltus, Piin. Valer. BiUndns, Ovid. — "^ Congrui, Val. Flac. — e Drfensurns, Claud. Dcfcndciidus, C^rs. B. G. & Terent. Defensiim, JN'epbs. jD^/e7;,s//, Sallust. — ^The Perfect of Dcgo occurs only in Auson. Epist. xvii. ad Symmach., where some copies have Dcgulmns. Degendus, Cic. de Amic. — '''See Irregular verbs. — ^^ Emths, not Fmjjfvs ; because P. is never inserted in the Pre- sent Emn. So Snmfvs, Cvm'us, Demfiis, Y:7eZicw7, Ovid. Trist. — ^^Detitui, Cffis. B. G. Though DYliteo does not exist now, yet we find its Participle Dcllfens in Plin. xxxv. 1. — ^^ Dulcui, Paulin. Nolan. Didcit occurs in Lucr. ii. 473., where some road Dulcis ; others Dulcet, as if from Didceo. — ^^ Durui, Ovid. Met. Durro, mentioned by Prise, and by Servius on Virg. Georg. i. 91., does not exist. — ^^ Elan- g}ii,Yii\. Fiac. iv. 572. — ^'^ Emarcui, Plin. — ^^Erubui, Ovid. Fast. — ^^ Evanui, Virg. ^^n. ix. G58. Evdniturus, Lactant. — ^'' Ev'dui, Sueton. Claud. — ^^Exf/rui, Cic. Fam. — ^^ Excandui, Cie. Tusc. — ^^ Exhorrui, Ovid. Met. Yet Exhorreat is found in Colum. x. 154. — ^i Expallui, Hor. — 22 Exfimui, Terent. Hec. Extimeren- tur occurs in Tacit. Ann. xv. 71., but it is rendered doubtful by various readings. — ^ Fracui, Cato, R. R. — 24 jjtarui, Colum. — "^ Some prefer writing Increbesco. See Crebresco. Increbrui, Cic. Orat. c. 20. Phil. xiv. 5. 144 TniTlD CONJUGATION OF VEKB9. *Tndulesco,^ indolescere, indolui, , indolescendus, ....... grieve. *rnnotesco,'' innotescere, innotui, — , become known. *Intiimesco,^ intumescere, intiirnui, , begin to swell. *Irraucesco/ irraucescere, irraucui, , grow hoarse. *Macresco,^ macrescere, rnacrui, , grow lean. *Maturesco,' maturescere, maturui, , ripen. *Obbrutesco,' obbrutescere, obbrutui, , become brutish, or senseless. *Obcallesco,® obcallescere, obcallui, , become callous. *Obduresco,' obdurescere, obdurui, grow hard. *Obmutesco,^° obmutescere, obmutui, , grow dumb, become silent. *Obstupesco," obstupescere, obstiipui, , be amazed. *Obsurdesco," obsiirdescere, obsurdui, , grjow deaf. *Peraresco/'' pgrarescere, perarui, , grow dry. *Percr6bresco," percrebrescere, percrebrui or percre- bui, be divulged, prevail. *Perhorresco, " perhorrescere, perhorrui, , shudder, dread. *Perttmesco,^* perttmescere, perttmui, , pertt- mescendus, fear greatly. *Recrudesco," recrudescere, recrudui, , grotc raw, be sore again. ♦Relanguesco,^® relanguescere, relangui, , be languid. *Revtresco,^* revtrescere, revtrui, , become green again. *Vilesco,^ vilescere, vilui, , become worthless. § 179. These make -evi: Adolesco," adSlescere, adolevi, adultus, grow up. Exolesco,^ exolescere, exolevi, exoletus, grow old. Mansuesco,'® mansuescere, mansuevi, mansuetus, grow mild, become tame; make tame. To which add : Exardesco,'" exardescere, exarsi, exarsus, be injlamed. ♦Refrigesco,'^ refrig^escere, refrixi, , grow cool. *Revivisco,'*" reviviscere, revixi, , revicturus, revive, come to life. * Indolui, Ovid. Trist. Indolescendus, Sidon. — ' Innotui, Ovid. Am. — ^ Intumui, Ovid. Fast. — * Irrancnerit, Cic. Or. i. 61., where some read irrauserit. — ^Mdcrui, Festiis in ' Curionem.' — ^ Maturui, Ovid. — ' Obbrutui, Festus in ' Obrutuit.' — ^ Ob- callui, Ceh.—^ObdUrui, Cic. Tusc. — i" Obmutui, Plin. Virg. JEn. iv. 279. — ^Ob- slupui, Cic. de Div. — ^"^ Obsurdui, Cic. Somn. Scip. — ^^ Perrarui, Colum. — ^^ Per- crebrui, Caes. B. C. Percrcbui, Cic. Verr. Tacit. Ann. xii. 6. — ^^ Perhorrui, Ovid. Met. vi. 704. — ^^ Perttmui, Nepos in Alcib. c. 5. Yet Pertimens, Lactant. Pertz- mescendus, Cic. Fam. i. 9. — ^''Recrudui, Liv. x. 19. — ^^ Relnngui, Ovid. Amor. ii. 9. 27. — ^^ Revirui, Auct. ad Heren. iv. 34. Revtrens occurs in Albinor. ii. 113. — ^ Vllui, Avien. in Arat. 318. Of this Verb the Perfect only is found. See Evl- lesco. — '■^',22 gee Oleo, Second Conj. List. ii. Adolui, in the same sense, Varr. ap. Prise. Adultus, Cic. Tusc> Exoleo, mentioned by Prise, does not exist in the classics. — ^ Mansnevi, Lucan. Mansuetus, Varr. R. R. ; but it is generally used as a mere Adjective. — "^^ Exarsi, Virg. ^n. viii. 219. Exarsus, Cod. Justin. — ^5 j^g, frixi, Cic. RPfr'/gui, Veget. R. V. — '^'^ Revixi, Cic. Verr. Yet Revlvent, Paulin. Nolan. Revicturus, Senec. Med. THIRD CONJUGATION OP VERBS. 145 § 180« The following Inceptives, though having no other verbal form, want the Perfect : *^gresco, grow sick. *DTtcsco, grow rich. ♦Grandesco, grow big. *Gravesco, grow heavy. *Fatisco, g(^pe> grow faint. *Incurvesco bow down. *Integrasco, be renewed. ♦Juvenesco grow young. ♦Lapidesco, petrify. *MItesco, grow mild. *Mollesco grow soft *Pinguesco, grow fat. *Plumesco, be fledged. *Puerasco, pl^^y the child. *Rancesco, grow mouldy. *Repuerasco, become childish. *Sienlesco, grow barren. *Tenerasco, or *Teneresco, grow tender. *Uvesco, grow moist. § 181. Twelve Verbs of the Third Conjugation end in -io: Allicio/ allicere, allexi or allicui, allectus, alliciendus, allure, Aspicio,'^ aspicere, aspexi, aspectus, aspiciendus, behold, Capio,^ capere, cepi, captus, capturus, capiendus, take. Cupio, cupere, cupui or cupii, cupitus, cupiendus, desire, Facio/ facere, feci, factus, factum, factu^ facturus, faciendus, do make, Fodio,^ fbdere, fodi, fossus, dig. *Fu^io,^ fiigere, fugi, , fiiglttirus, fiigiepdus, j/?y. Jacio,' jacere, jeci, jactus, jaciendus, cast, Pario,® parere, peperi, partus, partturus, pariendus, bring forth, pro- cure, get, Conciitio,' concutere, concussi, concussus, conciitien- dus, shake, move violently, ^Allexi, Plaut. AlUcui, Piso. Hist. ap. Prise, et Hygin. Poet. Astron. Charis. iii. p. 217., and Diomed. i. p. 364., give Allzceo, -es ; and the latter adds that Allicio was the ancient form. Allecturus comes from ALlego. Allidendus, Ovid. Art. Am. Eticio, I draw out, makes Eltcui, Li v. v. 15. Elexi, Arnob. Illicio, I inveigle, lUexi, Plaut. Sallust. Cat. c. 59. PelUcio, I entice, deceive, Fellexi, Cic. pro Cluent. Terent. PelUcui, Liv. Laodam, ap. Prise. Pelliceo, -es, Charis. — ^Aspexi, Cic. passim. Aspexit, for aspexerit, Plaut. Aspectus, Tacit. Agric. c. 40. Aspiciendus, Ovid. Inspecturus, Virg. -^n. ii. 47. Inspiciendus, Ovid. Perspectu, P'estus. — 3 Cepi, Propert. Captus, Cic. Cat. iii. 7. et passim. Excepium iri, Cic. Capturus, Sueton. Vesp. Capiendus, Terent. Capsis, for cape si vis, Cic. Orat. 45. Quintil. i. 5. Capso, is, it, for cepero, is, if, Plaut. — ^Feci, Virg. Eel. i. 6. et passim. Fac- tus, Cic. Verr. vi. 18. et passim. Factum 'iri, Cic. Fam. Factu, Id. ibid. vii. 3. Facturus, Liv. xxvi. 25. Faciendus, Val. Flac. Face, for fac, Val. Flae. Faciem, for faciam, Cato ap. Quintil. Faxo, -is, -it. See Irreg. Verbs. — ^ Fcdi, Sil. Fos- sus, Plin. ' Ad fodieridos, puteos,' Hirt. B. Alex. — ^ Fugi, Stat. Theb. Albinov. shortens the first syllable : ' Sic ilii vixere, quibus fuit aurea virgo, Qua3 bene praEcinctos postmodo pulsa fugit ,•' unless this can be accounted for by Heterosis. Fugiturus, Ovid. Ftigiendus, Cic. Off. * Mors f ii^itur,' Cic. de Leg. — '' Jeci, Liv. i. 12. et passim. Jactus, Virg. Eel. vi. 41. et passim. Dejectum, Hor. Rejectum, Cic. Jaciendus, CutX. AbjectHrns, Cic. Ad j icie?idu s, Clmntil — ^ PepeW, TibuU. Parii, for peperi, Cato, R. R. Pccribit, for pariet. Pompon, ap. Non. Parire, for parere, Enn. ap. Varr. L. L. Partus, Virg. ^n. vi. 89. Partus is used like the Participle of a Deponent in Colum., having brought forth. Pariturus, Cic. Orat. Pariendus, Cic. Fam. — ® See Quatio, List xxviii. Concussi, Juv. Sat. x. 328. Con- cussus, Virg. Georg. i. 159. Concutiendus, Cels. Discussurus, Liv. Discutiendus, Gels. Decussu, Plin. 13 146 THIRD CONJUGATION OF V£RBS« Rapio,* rSpgre, rSpui, raptus, rapturus, rapiendus, snatch, *Sapio,* sapere, sapivi or sapii, , savour^ he wise, § 182. To which add four Deponents in -ior: Gradior,^ graderis or gradere, [gradi,] gressus, . . . go, walk, advance, Morior/ moreris or morere, mori or moriri, mortuus, moriturus, die, Orior,*^ oreris or orere, oriri, ortus, oriturus, oriundus, rise, spring up, Patior," pateris or patere, pati, passus, passurus, pati- endus, , suffer, endure, k 183. The following have neither the Perfect nor the Perfect Participle Passive : ♦Amblfgo, dauht. ♦Clango,' sound as a trumpet. *Claudo, he lame. *Cluo,^ he famous. *Glisco,* grow, increase. *Gruo,'* crunk like a crane. ♦Nexo," bindytie. *Satago, he busily employed. Salloj^^l reason with salt, makes salsuSy salsurusi biit has no Perfect § 184» The Perfects of the following are doubt- ful: Frendo," frendere, firendi, fressus or fresus, . . gnash the teeth, break, bruise, ^R&pui, Phaedr. Raptus, Virg. ^n. i. 382. et passim. Rapturus, Stat. Theb. R&piendus, Ovid. Direptum, Sil. Ereptum, Terent. PrcBreptum, Plaut. — ^Sa- pivi, Naev. ap. Prise. Sapisti, Mart. ISapisset, Plaut. Rud. iv. 1. 8., where Pris- cian, vii. p. 328. ed. Krehl. reads sapuisset ; but two of Krehi's Mss. of Priscian have sapisset, and another sapivisset. The editio princeps of Plautus in the British Museum, the Mediol. an. 1490., and the edd. of Carpentar, Lucas Olchi- nensis, and Lambinus, exhibit sapuisset ; but the Burney Ms., No. 228., in the British Museum, all the Palatine Mss. and the edd. since Lambinus, have sapisset. The Mss. of Bohte seem to have the same, since he does not mention a various reading. Re^pio, I savour of, makes Ivi, ii, or ui : Resiprvi, Sueton. Resipui, Cic. Re^pisli, Plaut Resipiisse, Terent. Consipui and Dcsipui, the Perfects of Con- apio, I am perfectly in my senses, and Desipio, I am foolish, occur only in gram- mars and dictionaries. — ^The infinitive does not occur except in the Compounds. Gressus, Virg. ^n. vi. 633. The Compounds make grtdior : Progredior, I ad- vance, progrederis or progredere, progredi, progressus, progressurus, &c. — * Morl- mur, Enn. ap. Prise. Mori, Tibull. Moriri, Ovid. Met. Mortuus, Cic. passim. M oriturus, Tacit. Hist. iii. 10. — ^ Oriri, Lucr. Cic. Quintil. Ortus, Hor. Orilu- rus, ibid. Oriundus, descendet, Liv. i. 49. et passim. — « Passus, Virg. ^n. i. 203. et passim. Passurus, Ovid. Pdtiendus, Id. Trist. — ' Some give this verb the Per- feet Clanxi, others Clangui ; but we have not any authority for either. — « Cluit. Prudent. Clu^rent, Auson. Prof — " Glisco seems to be an Inceptive. Glisceretur^ pass. Sempron. ap. Non. — i^'This Verb occurs in the Carmen de Philom. v. 23., and in Paul, ex Festo. — " Neither Nexo, t% nor Nexo, as, has a Perfect. See Necto, List. xiii. — ^^ Sallerenf, Sallust. ap. Prise. Sallere, Lucil. Sallunt, Id. ap. Diomed. Salsus, salted. Colum. Salsurus, Mummius ap. Prise. See Sallio, Fourth Conj. List. iv. — " Frendi and Frendui are given in some grammars and dictionaries. See Frendeo, Second Conj. List. ix. THIBD CONJUOATION OF VERBS. 147 Prigo/ frigere, frixi, frictus or frixus, , fry, parch, *Furo,' f iirere, f urui, , be mad, rage. Lingo/ lingere, linxi, linctus, lingendus, lick. Pando/ pandere, pandi, passus or pansus, open, Quado,^ quatere, quassi, quassus, shake, agitate, *Viso,* visere, visi, , go see, visit. § 185. DEPONENTS. Amplector/ amplecteris or amplectere, amplecti, am- plexus, amplectendus, embrace, encircle, Apiscor/ apisceris or apiscere, apisci, aptus, get. Commtniscor,^ commtnisceris or commtniscere, com- mtnisci, commentus, devise, invent, Complector/" complecteris or complectere, complecti, complexus, embrace, compass, comprehend, *Defetiscor," defetisceris or defetiscere, defetisci, , , , , be weary. Expergiscor," expergisceris or expergiscere, exper- gisci, experrectus, awake, rise, Fruor," frueris or fruere, frui, fruttus or fructus, fruttu- rus, fruendus, enjoy, reap the fruits of, ^ Frixi, Diomed. Frictus, Cels. Frixus, Cels. Sidon. — ^ Furui, Serv. ad. Mn, i. 45. Furuerunt, Sedul. i. 196., where some read ferverunt ; Furuit, Plin. xxxiii. 53. edd Harduin. Bipont Miller. Franz. Fuirit in the edd. before Harduin. Furit, Brotier. ,• but he does not say on what authority. Furo, furitis, and all the per- sons of the Futures and Imperative are nowhere to be found. We meet with Furimus and furant in Senec. Ep. 95. Furio, is, Sidon. Carra. xxii. 94. — ^ Linxi, given in grammars and dictionaries, does not occur in the classics now extant. Yet we have Linctus, Plin. xxxv. 15. and Lin^endus, xxxi. 9. — * Pandi, Prise, x. p. 891. ; but he cites no authority. Passus, Ovid. Virg. ^n. i. 483. et passim. Pan- sus, Vitruv. The Compounds also want their Perfects. Dispando, I spread abroad, has only Dispansus, Plin. Expando, I spread out, Expassus, Tacit. Hist. Caecil. ap. Non. Expansus, Plin. Oppando, I spread over against, Oppassus, Tertull. Apol. Oppansus, Id. Propando does not occur; yet Prdpassus, Apul. Florid. Propan- sus. Id. — 5 Quassi is found only in grammars and dictionaries. Quassus, Ovid. JDecussu, Plin. See Concutio, List. xxv. — ^The Perfects Vlsi, Invisi, Revlsi, are found only in grammars and dictionaries. ''Amplecto, is, Prise, and Diomed. Amplexelur, amplecti, pass. Prise, viii. p. 791. Amplector, arts. Prise, ibid. Amplexus, having embraced, Ovid. Amptexus, pass. Petron. ap. Prise. Amplectendus, Manil., where some Mss. have amplectandus. — ^Apiscuntur, pass. C. Fannius ap. Prise, viii. p. 791. Aptus, Plaut. * Apiscendi, favoris facultas,' Tacit Ann. i. 31. The compounds make -cptus. — ^ Comminisci- mus, act Apul. Met Commentus, having devised, Cic. Nat Deor. Commentus, pass, feigned, fictitious, Ovid. — ^® Complecto, act. Pompon, ap. Non. Complecti, pass. Cic. ap. Prise. Complexus, having embraced, Stat. Sylv. Complexus, enfold- ed, interwoven, Lucr. and Plaut Amph. — ^^ Defatiscens, Plin. as if from Defdtis COT. Defessus is a mere adjective. The simple Fatiscor occurs in Lucr. v. 309. F^fisco, I faint am exhausted, Val. Flac. and Stat Sylv. passim. — ^^Experrectus essem, Cic. Att — ^^ Fruttus, Senec. Epist. Fructus, Lucr. iii. 953. Perfructus, Cic. Fragm. ap. Prise, x. p. 883. Fruiturus, Cic. Tusc. Frutturum, Apul. Apol. where some read Fructurum. See Voss. Anal. iii. 32. Fruendus, Ovid. 148 THIRD CONJUGATION OF VERBS. Fungor,^ fungeris or fungere, fungi, functus, functtirus, discharge, per- form a duty. ♦Irascor,'' irasceris or irascere, irasci, , he angry. Labor,' laberis or labere, labi, lapsus, lapsurus, glide, slip, err, fall gently, decay. Loquor,* loqueris or loquere, loqui, locutus, locutu- rus, loquendus, speak. Nanciscor,^ nancisceris or nanciscere, nancisci, nactus, find by chance, find, obtain, Nascor,' nasceris or nascere, nasci, natus, natu, nasclf- turus, be horn, spring up. Nitor,' niteris or nitere, nili, nixus or nisus, nisurus, strive, endeavour, be in labour. Obliviscor,* oblivisceris or obliviscere, oblivisci, obli- tus, obliviscendus, forget. Paciscor," pacisceris or paciscere, pacisci, pactus, pa- ciscendus, bargain, PrOftciscor,^" profYcisceris or proftciscere, proftcisci, profectus, profecturus, set out on a journey, go. Queror,^^ quereris or querere, queri, questus, questum, questurus, querendus, lament, bewail. *Remtniscor,^" reminisceris or remtniscere, remtnisci, , call to mind, recollect, *Ringor, ringeris or ringere, ringi, , .... grin, show the teeth, Sequor,^' sequeris or sequere, sequi, secutus, secuturus, sequendus, follow. ^Fungi, pass. Sex. Pedius ap. Paul. Dig. Functus, Hor. Functurus, Apiil. Met * Ad suum munus fuvgendum,* Cic. Tusc. iii. 7. — ^Irascere, act. for Irasci, Pompon. Irdius is an adjective. — ^Lapsus, Val. Flac. Some Mss. of Virgil have lapsus, Georg. iii. 448. and Uahsus, ii. 306. Lapsurus, Ovid. — "^ Loquere, loquis, act Petron. Frag. Trag. Locutus, Cic. Locuturus, Ovid. Loquendus, Mart v. 26. — ^ Nadus, Cic. in Orat et passim. Nanctus, optt codd. Liv. xxiii. 2. and Plant — ^ Nutus, Terent. Andr. et passim. Natu, Plin. vi. 33. Nasciturus, Pallad. Jun. Nascere, for nasci, Cato R. R. ; but the reading is doubtful. — ' Nixus, Ovid, passim. N'lsus, Cic. pro Cluent c. 57. Vitruv. i. 2. In all the Mss. of Livy, Nisus is more frequent than Nixus. Some distinguish them from each other, thus : Nixus CORPORE, nisus ANiMO ,' but this distinction does not appear from the classics. Nisu- rus, Cses. B. C. ii. 37. Ann'itor, I lean upon, makes Annixus, Virg. ^n. i. 148. et passim. ; Annisus, Liv. v. 25. Conmtor, I struggle, bring forth, Connixus, Liv. i. 33. et passim; Conmsus, Val. Flac. iii. 193. Enitor, I struggle hard, bring forth, JEnixus, Liv. vi. 24. et passim. Enlsus, Cic. an Q, Fr. iii. 9. Diomed. i. p. 371. confines Enixus to the labour of bringing forth, and takes Enlsus in a sense of general exertion ; but this distinction is not favoured by Mss. authority. Innltor, I lean upon, Innixus, Caes. B. G. ii. 27. et passim ; Inmsus, Tacit. Obmfor, I struggle against, Obnixus, Virg. ix. 724. et passim. Obnlsus, Liv. xxxiv. 46. Renltor, 1 re- sist, has no Perfect Participle Passive. Submlor is not found in the classics; yet Suimixus, Virg. JEjCi. i. 510. et passim. — ^ Oblltus, Cic. ObUviscendus, Hor. — ^ Pa^ CISCO, NaBV. ap. Non. Pactus sum, Cic. Ser\'ius on Virg. ^n. xi. 133. gives this Verb another Perfect, PMigi. See Pango and Pago, Lists, xiii. xvi. Paciscendus, Ammian. xxxi. 12. — ^^Proftcisco, Plaut Mil. iv. 8. 19. Profectus sum, Cic. pas- sim. Profecturus, Justin. — ^^ Quesfus sum, Liv. Questum, l^epos in Chabr. Plant. Questurus, Stat. Theb. Querendus, Ovid. Met — ^^ R^mlnisco, Rufus ap. Auson. Epigr. — ^^ Secutus sum, Virg. Eel. x. 23. et passim. Secuturus, Lucan. Sequendus, Ovid. Sequo, Prise, viii. p. 799. THIRD CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 149 Tuor/ tueris or tuere, , tutus, tuendus, see^ protect, Ulciscor," ulcisceris or ulciscere, ulcisci, ultus, ultum, ulciscendus, avenge, punish. Utor,^ uteris or utere, titi, usus, usurus, utendus, use. ♦Vescor,* vesceris or vescere, vesci, , vescendus, .... feed upon. IMPERSONALS. Ningit," ningere, ninxit, it snows. Vesperascit,^ vesperascere, , it draws towards evening. * See Tueor, Second Conj. p. 140. — ^ Ultus sum^ Propert. Ultum, Sallust. Jug. c. 71. Tacit. Ann. iv. 73. Ulciscendus, Cic. Fam. xii. 23. Ulciscerem, Enn. ap. Non. Ulcisci^ pass. Sallust. Jug. c. 34. Hence UltuSy avenged, punished, Liv. ii. 17. — ^ Utor, pass. Novius ap, Gell. Uto, is, Cato R. R. Usus sum, Nepos Att Usurus, Cic. Verr. Utendus, Cic. Verr. iv. 18. — * Vescet, Tertul. de Jejun. c. 5., quoting the Old Test. Num. xi. 4., where the Vulgate has, ' Quis dabit nobis ad ves- cendum carnes?' Vescendus, Plin. xx. 5. — ^ Ningitur, pass, irapers. Apul. Florid, i. 2. 2. Nin^unt, Lucr. ii. 627., where some read pingunt. Ninxerit, Accius ap. Prise. Ninguit is approved of by Pierius on Virg. Georg. iii. 367. ; and by Prise, ibid. Ningit by Caper de Verb. Dub. p. 2249. — ^ Vesperascit has no Perfect. Vesph'asoens occurs in Nepos Pelop. c. 2., and in Tacit. Ann. xvi. 34. 13^ 150 FOURTH CONJUGATION OF VERBS. FOURTH CONJUGATION § 186# Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation end in -10, and change -io into -is long in the Second Per- son Present ; into -ivi long in the Perfect ; into -ire long in the Infinitive, and into -itus long in the Per- fect Participle Passive ; as, Audio,^ audire, audivi or audii, auditus, auditum, auditu, auditurus, audiendus, hear. — So, *Cio,2 cTvi, move, excite. Condio,^ ivi or ii, season. Custodio,* Tvi or ii, D keep. *Dormio,^ ivi or ii, m. R. D sleep. Eriidio,^ Tvi or ii, D instruct. Esurio, Tvi, to desire, to eat. Expedio,' Tvi or ii, disentangle. FTnio,^ Tvi or ii, R. D finish. *Gestio,9 Tvi or ii, leap, desire. Impedio,io Tvi or ii, D entangle. *Insanio," Tvi or ii he tnad. Irretio,*'* Tvi or ii ensnare. Lenio,^^ Tvi or ii, d mitigate. Mollio,'* Tvi or ii, D soften. *Miigio,'^ Tvi or ii, bellow. Munio,*^ Tvi or ii, r. d fortify. Mutio," Tvi, mutter. Nutrio,^^ Tvi or ii, D nourish. Partio,^^ Tvi or ii, R divide. Polio,'^? Tvi, D polish. 1 Audlbam, Ovid. Audiibis, Plaut. Many of the Verbs of this Conj. making -m, have also -ii in the Perfect. Audii, Virg. Eel. vi. 83. Auditum, Hor. Auditu, Caes. B. Afr. AuditHrus, Lucan. Audiendus, Cses. B. G. — ^Civi, Tacit. Ann. xv. 33. & Plaut. The Participle Cttus exists only in the Compounds, Concitus, sum- moned, Val. Flac. excited, Lucan. v. 597. Excitus, called out, Virg. ^En. x. 38. Excititrus, Liv. Excibat, Liv. xxxii. 13. See Cieo, Second Conj. — ^Condlvi, Cic. pro Cluent. Colum. Gondii, Varr. R. R. Conditus, Cic. de Orat. iii. 25. — 4 Cus- todibant, Catull. Custodlbttur, Plaut. Custodivi, Plin. Custodii, Sueton. Custo- disset, Auson. Epist. Custodltus, Ovid. Custodiendus, Cses. B. G. — ^ Dormibo, Plaut. Dormivi, Ovid. Dormii, Cic. Att. Dormltum, Hor. i. Sat. 5. 48. Dorml- turus, Cels. Dormiendus, Catull. — ^ Erudivi, Cic. Tusc. i. 26. Erudii, Val. Flac. Eruditus, Cic. passim. Erudiendus, Ovid. — ' Expedlbo, Plaut. Expedlvi, Liv. ix. 9. Expedii, Val. Flac. Expedisses, Cic. Expeditus, Cic. Mil. c. 10. ♦ Ad ex- pediendas pecunias,' Sueton. Jul. — ^Fimvi, Ovid. Met. Finii, Id. Fmltus, Ovid. Trist. Fimturus, Id. Art. Am. Finiendus, TertuU. Scorp. — ^ Gesfibant, Plaut. Gestlvi, Cell. Gestierunt, Veil. — ^^ Impedivi, Cic. Impedii, Hor. i. Sat. 6. 27. Ovid. Met. Impedltus, Cic. pro Coel. et passim. ImpMiendus, Ovid. Met. — ^^In- sdmvi, Plaut. Insanisti, Cic. Or. c. 67. — ^^ Irretlvi, Colum. Irretisses, Cic. Catil. i. 6. Irretitus, Cic. Fin. v. 18. et passim. — ^^ Lenibam, Lenibo, Virg. ^n. v. 527. vi. 468. Propert. Lemvi, Cic. Att. vi. 2. Lenii, Id. Phil. ii. 45. Lemtus, Liv. i. 16. Leniendus, Cels. Leniundus, Sallust. Cat. c. 48. — ^*Mollwi, Veil. Mollii, Ovid. Met. MoU'dus, Sil. Molliendus, Cic. — ^^ Mugivi, Propert. Mugissent, Liv. i. 7. — ^^ Moanio, anciently. ' MUmvi, Cic. Cat. i. 4. MUnii, Nep. Hannib. c. 3. Liv. ix. 29. et passim. Mumtus, Cic. passim. MUmiurus, Hirt. MUniendus, Cic. Mumbis, Veget. de R. V. — " Mutivi, Plaut. Mutitxis, Terent. — is Nutrlbam, Virg. iEn. vii. 484. Nutribo, Rhemm. Nutrimus, for Nutrivimus. Nutritor, for niiirtto, Virg. Georg. ii. 425. Nutrivi, Senec. NUtrii, Pers. Sat. Nutrissent, Ovid. Nu- tritus, Ht3r. Nutriendus, Cels. — ^^ Partior, depon. Virg. JEn. i. 198. et passim. Partivi, Sallust. Jug. c. 47. Partisses, Lucil. Partitus, Cic. Orat. iii. 30. Partilu- rus, Caes. B. Civ. i. 4. — ^ PoUvi, Phaedr. PoUtus, Cic. passim. Poliendus, Vitruv. Pollbant, Virg. iEn. viii- 435. FOURTH CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 151 Punio,* ivi or ii, D punish. Redimio,^ ivi, crown, encircle. Scio,3 SCI vi, u. R know. ♦Servio,* ivi or ii, m serve, obey. Sopio,^ ivi or ii, luU asleep. StabTlio,^ ivi or ii, establish. Tinnio/ Ivi or ii, r tinkle. Vestio,^ Ivi or ii, clothe. § 187. The following are irregular either in the Perfect, or Perfect Participle Passive, or in both : Amtcio,^ amtcire, amixi or amicui, amictus, amtciendus, clothe, Aperio/" aperire, aperui, apertus, aperturus, aperiendus, open. Bullio," bullire, bullii, bullitus, boil, bubble. Comperio," comperire, com peri, compertus, Jind out. Farcio," farcire, farsi, farctus, cram. Fastidio," fastidire, fastidii, fastiditus, fastidiendus, disdain. Fulcio,^^ fulcire, flilsi, fultus, fulciendus, prop. *Glutio,*'' glutire, glutii, , swallow. *Grunnio," grunnire, grunnii, , grunt. Haurio," haurire, hausi, rarely haurii, haustus, haus- turus or hausurus, hauriendus, draw, drink up, absorb. ♦Lascivio,^^ lascivire, lascivii, , be wanton, frisk. ^ Punivi, Apul. Met. Pwmz, Sueton. Jul. c. 74. Pwnme, Tib. c. 61. PUnltus, punished, Cic. Inv. Punitus, having punished, Cic. Mil. PUniendus, Cic. Poenl- oat, anciently, Lucr. See MUnio in this List. — ^ Redimlvit, Sueton, where Baum- garten-Crusius reads redimiit. Redim'ttus, Tibull. passim. Redlmibat, Virg. -^n. X. 538. — ^ Scivi, Terent. * Pro scivisse, rectius dicimus scisse.' Facciolat. Scisse, Liv. Ovid. Fast. Scisti, Ovid. Scissent, Cic. Att. The Participle Scitus is used in an active signification, knotmng, shrewd. Sciturus, Liv. iii. Senec. Epist. 6. Scitu facile, Terent. — < Servlvi, Plant. 2L Servii, Veil. Servisset, Cic. Servislis, Liv. Servltum, Virg. iEn. ii. 786. Servttum est, impers. Cic. Or. Servibas, Plaut. Servlbo, Merc. — ^ Sopivi, Liv. Sopiil, Veil. Sopierat, Tibull. Sopistis, Ovid. Met. Sdpitus, Virg. jEn. x. 642. et paaaim. — ^ SimUvi, Plin. Staklissef, GeW. StabiUtus, Lucr. — "^ Tinmvi, Tinnii, Plant. Tinniturus, Sueton. — ^ Vestlvi, Cic. de Nat. Deor. Vestierint, Colum. Vestitus, Propert. passim. — ^Amtcui, Brut. ap. Diomed. Amixi, Varr. ibid. Some add Amicivi, but without authority. Amictus, Hor. A7n5?aenc?MS, Fronton, ad M. Aurel. — ^^Aperlbo, Plaut Aperui, Liv. pas- sim. Some think the Perfect Aperii might also be used, reading in Cic. Att. vii. 3. Aperiertmus, where the true lection is Aperuerimus. Apertus, Cic. passim. Aperturus, Liv. Aperiendus, Sallust. Cat. c. 58. — " Bullii, A pic. BuUilus, Veget. Veter. — ^^ Comperi, Cic. passim. Compertus, Cic. passim. Comperior, depon. / know assuredly. Sail. Jug. c. 49. Hence Compertus est, for comperit, Tertull. — "Farsi, Senec. Epist. Farctus, Cic. passim. *Ita in melioribus libris exaratum est.' Voss. Anal. iii. 33. Some write Partus. The Oxford Annotators on Lily quote Farcltus from Cicero; others quote it from Varro; but this appears to be a mistake. Farsus, Hygin. Fab. — ^* Fastidii, Mart. Fastidlvi is found only in grammars and dictionaries. Fastiditus, Ovid. Trist. Fastidiendus, Plin. — ^^ Fulsi, Cic. Fulxi, Prise. Fulclvi, Vet. Inscript. sub Honor, et Theodos. ap. Murator. p. 466. Fultus, Virg. Eel. vi. 53. Fulcitus, Coel. Aurel. Tard. Fulciendus, Cels. — 16 Glutisse, Juv. Sat. iv. 28. Glutivi, found in grammars and dictionaries, does not occur in the classics. 'Mors glutita,' Tertull. adv. Marc. — ^'' Grunnisse, Juv. Grunnwi is found only in grammars and dictionaries. — '^ Hausi, Virg. ^n, i. 742. Haurii, Varr. ap. Prise. Haustus, Val. Fiac. et passim. Hauses, Solin. Haurdus, Apul. Met. Hauritum, ibid. Hauritu, ibid. Hausturus, Cic. Hausurus, Virg. ^n. iv. 384. Hauriturus, Juvenc. Hauriendus, Colum. Hauribant, Lucr. — ^^ Lasclvisset, Gell. 152 FOURTH CONJUGATION OF VERBS. *Ltgurio,^ Itgurire, Itgurii, , feed delicately, *Obedio,'' obedire, obedii, , obediturus, obey. Operio,^ operire, operui, opertus, operiendus, cover, hide, *Prostlio,^ prostlire, prostlui or prostlivi, , sally forth, Reperio,^ reperire, reperi, repertus, reperturus, d find, *S€evio,'' saevire, seevii, , saeviturus, rage, *Salio,' salire, salui or salii, , leap, Sancio,^ sancire, sanxi or sancii, sancitus or sanctus, sanciendus, establish, ratify, Sarcio," sartus, sarci, sarcire, patch, repair, Sarrio,^" sarrire, sarrivi or sarrui, sarritus, sarriendus, . . . weed with a hook, hoe, Sentio," sentire, sensi, sensus, sensurus, feel, perceive, Sepelio," sepelire, sepelivi, sepelii or sepeli, sepultus, sepulturus, sepeliendus, bury, inter* Sepio," sepire, sepsi, septus, hedge in, enclose. *Sttio," sitire, sttii, , thirst, thirst after, ^ Liguriij Hot. Ohtigurii, Cic. . Catil. it 5. Ligurlvi, given in grammars and dictionaries, does not exist. — * Ohldiho, Afran. ap. ]\on. Obedisse, Apul. Florid. Obedivi is not found in the classics. Obediturus, Plin. — ^ Qperui, Terent. Oper- tus, Virg. Georg. i. 465. et passim. Operiendus, Cels. — *Prds2lui, Val. Flac. Lucan. PrdslUvi, Curt. vii. 4., and so some read in Liv. 1. c. ; but the Perfect in ui seems more correct. See Salio in this List. Transilio, I leap over, makes TransiLui, Liv. i. 7. Transirm, Plin. et Plant, or TransUii, Hirt. Transiliendus, Ovid. — * Reperi, Ovid. Met et passim. When the first syllable of this Perfect is made long, some double the P. Ripertus, Virg. ^n. vi. 343. RepertHrus, Curt. Rtperiendus, Cic. Rep^ribo, Caecil. et Pompon, ap. Non. — ^ ScBvii, Cell. ScBvit, for ScBviit, Ovid. Met. Scevitum est impers. cruelty was exercised, Liv. i. 1. Curt, viii. 10. 6. SiEmturus, Liv. Savibat, Lucr. — ' iSaZwi, Virg. Georg. ii. 384. Ovid. Said, Claud. See Heins on Ovid. Salivi, found in grammars and dictionaries, does not exist in the classics. So DelUio, I dismount, I alight, desllui, Vir^. ^n. xi. 50L desllii, Caes. B. G. iv. 12. ExsUio, I spring forth, ex^lui, Plant, exsuii, Sil. SubMio, I spring up, subsUui, Propert. iv. 8. 46. subsilii, Senec. Epist. 13. Three have ui only: Assllio, I leap upon, assilui. Val. Flac. i. 258. Dissnlio, I fly asun- der, I burst, dissilui, Virg. JEn. iii. 415. Insilio, I leap upon, insilui, Ovid. Met. iii. 367. & Plant See Prosilio. — ^ Sanxi, Cic. Tusc. i. 27. Liv. xxiv. 8. Propert Sancii, Pompon, ap. Diomed. Sancwi is quoted by Nizolius from Cic. pro Plane, where.no such form is to be found ; and by others from Liv. x. 9., where the Mss. and best edd. have sarud. SancUus, Cic. de Harusp. Resp. Sanctus, Liv. x. 9. & Quintil. Sanciendus, Liv. viii. 7. — ^ Sarci, Cato R. R. Sartus, Juvenal, iii. 254. et passim. * Sarciendcs infamise,' &c. Cses. B. C. iii. 74. — ^° Sarrtvi, Colum. Sarrui, Cato R. R. Sarrii, given in some dictionaries, does not occur, except in the vari- ous reading of Cato. Sarritus, Colum. Sarriendus, Colum. — ^^ Sensi, Caes. B. G. V. 32. & Hor. Sensti, for sensisti, Terent Sensus, Arnob. Sensurus, Ovid. Met — " Sep^dvi, Senec. Epist. Sepelii, Petron. Sepeli, Pers. Sat. Sepultus, Virg. Mn. ii. 265. et passim. SepStitus, Cato. ap Prise. Sepulturus, Sidon. Carm. Sepelien- dus, Cic. Tusc. ii. 13. — ^^pausqu. Cellar. Noris. Pier, write Scepio, with a diph- thong ; Voss. Heins. Erythraeus and others write it with a single vowel. Sepsi, Cic. Fam. xv. 4. Nat. Deor. Virg. JEn. i. 415. & Tacit Ann. Dictionaries give Seplvi, Sepltum ; but neither sepilus, nor sepltum have any place in the classics ; nor is seplvi to be found, with the exception of the contracted form sepissent in Liv. xlvi. 39., where the true reading is sepsissent. See Gronov. on the passage, Voss. Anal, iii. 33. Septus, Virg. .^n. ix. 551. et passim. — " Sitisti, Justin. Sitlvi, given by grammars and dictionaries, does not occur in the classics. FOURTH CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 153 SuiFio/ suffire, suffii, sufFitus, sufRendus, fumigate, ♦Vagio,'* vagire, vagii, ■, cry as a child, *Venio,^ venire, veni, , venturus, come, Vincio,* vincire, vinxi, vinctus, vinctunis, vinciendus, hind, § 188« These Verbs end in -eo : *Eo,* ire, ii or ivi, , iturus, go, *Queo," quire, quivi or quii, , be able, *Nequeo,' nequire, nequivi or nequii, , cannot, Veneo,® venire, venii, , veniturus, be sold, § 189. The Perfects of the following Verbs are doubtful : *Cambio,^ campsi, exchange. *Dementio,^*' ivi, be mad. Effiitio," Ivi, itus, .... speak foolishly. *Ferio," f erii, d strike. *Lippio,'3 Ivi, R he blear-eyed. *Raucio,i* raasi, r be hoarse. SailiOji** ivi, itus, r. d. season with salt. § 190. These have neither Perfects nor Perfect Participles : ♦Balbiitio,^^ stammer. ♦Csecutio, be dim-sighted. *Ferocio, be fierce. *Gannio, yelp, whine. * Siijfii, Propert. iv. 8. 83. See Broukhus & Burman on the passage. Svffitus, Ovid. Fast. Suffiendus, Colum. — " The author of the Carmen de Philom. makes the first syllable short. Vagii, Ovid. — ^ Vembo, Pompon, ap. Non. Veni, Cic. Venturus, Virg. vi. 66. Vemtur, ventum est, impers. passim. Inventu ardua, Plin. ii. 46. — ^ Vinxi, Virg. ^n. xi. 81. Vinxtus, Ovid, et passim. Vincturus, Virg. Georg. ii. 94. Vinciendus, Cic. — ^ Ivi is rare ; it occurs in Aul. Cell. xiii. 12. 3. Ii, Liv. Cic. Fara. Virg. ^n. i. 376. et passim. These Compounds make ii : Aheo, I depart, ahii ; Adeo, I approach, adii ; Anteeo, I go before, anteii ; Coeo, I meet, ' coii ; JExeo, I go out, exii ; Intereo, I die, interii ; Introeo, I enter, introii ; Prodeo, I come forth, prodii ; Transeo, I pass over, transit But Ineo, I enter, makes ?n«, Cic. et passim ; ini, Stat. Theb. Obeo, I go about, undergo, die, oh'ivi, Virg. iEn. vi. 802. Ohii, Lucr. Pereo, I perish, ptrii, Ovid. Ptrmi occurs only in Apul. Met. Prceeo, I go before, prcmvi, Plin. prceii, Liv. Prcetereo, I go beyond, prceterii, Ovid. Art. Am. et passim ; prcBt^fivi, Apul. Met. Redeo, I return, redii, Cic. et passim ; redivi, Lucil. ap. Non. Subeo, I go under, suMvi, Ovid, mbii, Hor. i. Sat. 9. 21. Iturus, Cic — « Quivi, Virg. -^n. vi. 463. Terent. Quii, Lucr. vi. 855. See Irregular Verbs. Quitus, Accius ap. Diomed. — ''Nequivi, Virg. ^n. vi. 507. Nequii, Sail. Jug. c. 18. See Irregular Verbs. — ^ Venii, Cic. Cato R. R. et passim. Venisse, Liv. ii. 14. Vemvi, given in grammars and dictionaries, does not occur in the classics. Some give this Verb a Supine, Venum, which is a noun, and one of its component parts, {Venum eo,) and of which the ablative Veno occurs in Tacit. Ann. xiii. 51. Vemtus, Sedul. Hymn. Veniturus, Senec. de Const. Sap. c. 3. See Irregular Verbs. — « Campsi, Prise, x. p. 906. — i° Dementivi, Grammatici. — " Ejfu- tivi, Grammatici. Effutitus, Cic. Div. — ^^ Ferii, Acron in his commentary on Hor. i. Od. 7. 11. The Perfect of the Compound Referio, I strike again, does not oc- cur. — ^3 Lippivi, Grammatici. Lipplturus, Plin. — " The Perfect Rausi, and Su- pine Rausum occur only in Prise, x. p. 907. Rausurus, Lucil, ap. Prise, ibid. — 18 SalHvi, or saUvi, Grammatici. Satlitus, or salttus, Colum. Salliturus, Naev. ap. Prise, ibid. Salliendus, Colum. The Participles Salsus, Colum. and Salsurus, Mumm. ap. Diomed. 1. c. come from Sallo, is, of the Third Conjugation — ^^ Bal' butivi in some dictionaries. 154 FOURTH CONJUGATION OF VERBS. *Glocio, duck as a hen* *Grandio, make great. ♦Hinnio, neigh. ♦Ineptio, tryie. *Prurio, itckytickle. *Rugio, roar as alien. *Sagio, foresee. *Scaturio, gush out *Singuitio, sob. *Tus8io, cough. Favio, I beat, pave, has no Perfect ; but the Perfect Participle Pdvltus is found in Varr. R. R. i. 51. 1. and in Plin. ix. 10. § 191. DEPONENTS. Blandior,* -iris or -ire, -iri, -itus, soothe^ flatter,— -^o, Partior,** d divide. Largior,* give liberally, lavish. Mentior,' r lie. Molior,* D. aUempl something dijjicult, contrive^ plan. Potipr,^ R. D. obtain, enjoy. Sortior,' r. ..,.,..,.,.,.... draw lots. § 192«, EXCEPTIONS. Assentior,' assentiris or assentire, assentiri, assensus, assensurus, assent. Experior,' experiris or experire, experiri, expertus, experturus, experiendus, try. Metior,^" metiris or metire, metiri, mensu^ or metitus, metiendus, measure, Opperior/^ opperiris or opperire, opperiri, oppertus or opperitus, opperiendus, wait for. Ordior/- ordiris or ordire, ordiri, orsus, ordiendus, begin, 1 Blanditus, Ovid. Met Blanditus, pass. Verrius ap. Prise, viii. p. 792. — ^ Largio, Accius ap. Non. Hence Larg'dus, pass. TibulJ. Largttus, having bestowed, Cic. — ' MeiUio, Prise. Hence Menfdus, pass. Virg. ^n. ii. 422. Ovid. Menilbor, Plaut. Mentltvs, having lied, Propert. Menfdurus, Ovid. — ^Mdliebdtur, pass. Apul. Met. Motdus, Ovid. Ara. Virg. Georg. i. 494. Moliendus, Cic. Orat. — ^Par- titus, Cic. de Univ. Partiendus, Cic. See Partio, List. i. — 6 Tj^jg yg^ i^ jg some- times used by the poets in the Third Conj. in the Pres. Indie, and Imperf. Subj. See Virg. -^n. iii. 55. Ovid. Met. xiii. 130. Also in the Pres. Infin. Poti, Pacuv. ap. Non. vii. 66. Pofivit, Plaut. Pofitus, Caes. B. G. et passim. Potlturxis, Cic. Tusc. i. 37. Putiundus, Ovid. Met. — ' Sorfitus, Virg. Mn. viii. 444. & Ovid. Sor- (iturus, Cic. — ^ Assentio, act passim. Hence Assensus, pass. Cic. Acad. iv. 31. Assensus, having assented, Cic. Assensurus, Cic. — ^ Expefibis, Catull. Expertus, Val. Flac. ExpertUrus, Plaut Experlturus, Calo R. R. Experiendus, Ovid. — ^" Metidtur, pass. Arnob. Hence Mensus, measured, Cic. N. D. ii. 27. Mensus, having measured, Val. Flac. v. 476. MeCitus, Claud. Ep. Metiendus, Cic. Orat c. 57. — " Oppertus, Terent Opperitus, Plaut. Opperiendus, Tacit. Ann. iv. 6. — " Orsus, Virg. Mn. vi. 125. et passim. Orditus, pass. Sidon. Ep. Ordiendus, Cic Leg. i. 7. LIST OP VERBS. 155 [AN ALPHABETICAL LIST of the preceding verbs of the four conjugations for easy reference. If the compound verb cannot be found in this list, look for the simple ; then refer to it on its page, and the compound may be found in the notes.} Abdo.... Page 139 Abnuo 131 Abominor 117 Absisto 142 Absterreo .... 123 Abundo 112 Accendo 131 Accumbo 136 Accuso 112 Aceo 123 Acuo 131 Addo 139 Adhibeo 123 Admoneo 122 Adolesco 144 Adulor 117 Adumbro 112 -^dilico 112 ^gresco 145 iEmulor 117 iEquo 112 .^Estimo 112 Agnosco 142 Ago 142 Albeo 128 Algeo 126 AUicio 145 Alo 137 Ambigo 146 Ambulo 112 Amicio 151 Araplector 147 Amplio 112 Angario 112 Ango 135 Aperio , . 151 Apiscor 147 Appello 112 Appendo 131 Apricor 117 Apto 112 Arbitror 117 Arcesso 138 Areo 123 Argao 131 Aro 112 Arceo 122 Ardeo 125 Ascio 112 Aspernor 117 Aspicio 145 Assentior 154 Assero 137 Assisto 142 Aucupor 117 Audeo 125 Audio 150 Augeo 126 Ausculto 112 Autumo 112 Auxilior 117 Aveo 128 Aversor 117 Balbutio 153 Basio 112 Batuo 131 Bello 112 Beo 112 Bibo 131 Blandior 154 Boo 112 Brevio 112 Bullio 151 Cado 138 Caeco 113 CaBCutio 153 CcEdo 139 Cslo 113 Calceo 113 Calcitro 113 Caleo.. 123 Calumnior 117 Calveo 128 Cambio ...... 153 Candeo 123 Caneo 123 Cano 139 Canto 113 Capesso 138 Capio 145 Capto 113 Careo 123 Carmino 113 Carpo 133 Castigo....... 113 Catomidio .... 113 Cansor 117 Caveo 127 Cedo 1.33 Celebro 113 Celo 113 Censeo 126 Centurio 113 Cerno 141 Certo 113 Ceveo 128 Cieo 126 Cingo 135 Cio 150 Clango ]46 Clareo 123 Claudo (he lame) 146 Claudo (shut).. 133 Ciepo 133 Clueo 128 Cluo 146 Coalesco 143 Coerceo...:.. 123 Cogito 113 Cognosce 142 Colubeo 123 Colo 137 Comissor 117 Comitor 117 Comrainiscor . . 147 Coramereo 123 Commoneo . . . 122 Como 133 Compare 113 Comperio 151 Compesco .... 137 Complector . . . 147 Compleo 126 Concilio 113 Concionor 117 Concutio 145 Condio 150 Condo 139 Confabulor ... 117 Confido 140 Confiteor 128 Congrao 131 Conniveo 127 Conor 117 Conquinisco . . 140 Considero 113 Conspicor 118 Consanesco ... 143 Consenesco . . . 143 Consero 137 Consisto 142 Consulo 137 Contemplor . . . 118 Conterreo 123 Conticesco 143 Convalesco 143 Coquo 135 Crebresco 143 Credo 140 Cremo 113 Creo 113 Crepo 120 Cresco 142 Criminor 118 Criicio 113 Cubo 120 Culpo 113 Cuneo 113 Cunctwr 118 Cupio 145 Curo 113 Curro 139 Custxjdio 150 Damno 113 Debeo 123 Decet 129 Decoro 113 Decurio 113 Dedo 140 Defendo 131 Defetiscor .... 147 Dego 131 Deleo 126 Delineo 113 Deliquesco... . 143 Delitesco 143 Dementio 153 Demereo 123 Demo 133 Denseo 128 Deprecor 118 Depso 137 Desero 137 Desidero 113 Desisto 142 Desterto 137 Destino 113 Deterreo 123 Dico,-are 113 Dico, -ere 135 Dicto 113 Dido 140 Diffiteor 128 Digladior 118 Diligo 135 Diribeo 127 Disco 139 Disscro 137 Ditesco 145 Divido 133 Do 120 Doceo 124 Doleo 123 Dolo 113 Dominor 118 Domo 120 Dormio 150 Dono 113 Daco 135 Dulcesco 143 Dupiico 113 Duresco 143 Duro 113 Edo ieat) 131 Edo {publish).. 140 Effigio 113 Effutio 153 Egeo 123 156 Elanguesco ... 143 Emacio 113 Emarcesco . . . 143 Emereo 123 Emineo 123 Erao 131 Emungo.. .... 135 Enucleo 113 Eo 153 Epulor 118 Equito 113 Erro 113 Erubesco 143 Erudio 150 Esurio 150 Evanesco 143 Evilesco 143 Exardesco .... 144 Exaresco 143 Excandesco... 143 Excello 137 Excudo 131 Exerceo 123 Exhibeo 123 Exhorresco . . . 143 Existimo 113 Existo 142 Exolesco 144 Expallesco 143 Expedio 150 Expergiscor.. . 147 Experior 154 Eiploro 113 Exsanio 113 Exsero 137 ExqIo 113 Exterreo 123 Extinguo 135 Extimesco . . . . 143 Exuo 131 Fabrico 113 Facesso 138 Facio 145 Fallo 139 Famulor 118 Farcio 151 Fans, or Fare.. 118 Fascio 113 Fastidio 151 Fateor 128 Fatigo 113 Fatisco 145 Faveo 127 Ferio 153 Ferior 118 Fero 140 Ferocio 153 Ferveo 127 Fervo 131 Festino 113 Figo 135 Findo 131 Fingo 135 LIST OF VERBS. Finio 150 Firmo 113 Flacceo 123 FJagito 113 Flagro 113 Flaveo 128 Flecto 135 Fleo 126 Fligo 135 Flo 113 Floreo 123 Fluo 135 Fodio 145 Foeteo 128 Formo 114 Foro 114 Foveo 127 Fracesco 143 Fraeno 114 Frango 142 Fraudo 114 Fremo 137 Frendeo 127 Frendo 146 Frico 120 Frigeo 127 Frigo 147 Frio 114 Frondeo 127 Frumentor.. .. 118 Frungo ^. 142 Fruor 147 Fugio 145 Fugo 114 Fulcio 151 Fulgeo 126 Fundo, -are.. . 114 Fundo, -ere... 131 Fungor 148 Furio 114 Furo 147 Furor 118 Fundo 131 Galeo 114 Gannio 153 Gaudeo 125 Gerao 137 Geno 137 Gero 133 Gestio 150 Gesto ........ 114 Gigno 137 Glabreo 128 Glacio 114 Glisco 146 Glocio 154 Glorior 118 Glutio 151 Gradior 146 Grandesco .... 145 Grandio 154 Gratulor 118 Gravesco 145 Gravo 114 Grunnio 151 Gruo 146 Gusto 114 Habeo 123 Habito 114 Haereo 126 Halo 114 Haurio 151 Hebeo 128 Hinnio 154 Hio 114 Horreo 123 Hortor 118 Humeo 128 Hurao 114 Hyemo 114 Ico 131 Ignoro 114 Ignosco 142 Imbuo 132 Imitor 118 Impedio 150 Impero 114 Impetro 114 Inaresco 143 Incesso 138 Inchoo 114 Increbresco . . . 143 Incurvesco . . . 145 Indago 114 Indico 114 Indignor 118 Indo 140 Indolesco 144 Indulgeo 126 Induo 132 Ineptio 154 Inebrio 114 Inhibeo 123 Infitior 118 Initio 114 Injurior 118 Innotcsco 144 Inquino ...... 114 Insanio 150 Insector 118 Insero 1.37 Insidior 118 Instauro 114 Insuo 132 Integrasco .... 145 Intclligo 135 Intro 114 Intumesco .... 144 Invito 114 Irascor 148 Irretio 150 Irrito 114 Irraucesco .... 144 Itero 114 Jaceo 123 Jacio 145 i Jacto 114 Jaculor 118 Jocor 118 Jubeo 124 Judico 114 Jugo 114 Jugulo 114 Jungo 135 Juro 114 Juvenesco .... 145 Juvo 120 Labo 121 Labor 148 Laboro 114 Lacero 114 Lacesso 138 Lacteo 128 Lacto 114 Lsedo 133 Laetor 118 Lambo 132 Lamentor .... 118 Langueo 123 I^anio 114 ^(Lapidesco .... 145 Laqueo 114 Lascivio 151 Largior 154 Lateo 123 Latro 114 Laudo 114 Lavo 121 Laxo 114 Lego, -ere .... 132 Lego, -are .... 114 Lenio 150 Lenteo 128 Levo 114 Libero 114 Libet 129 Liceo 123 Liceor 128 Licet 129 Lignor 118 Ligo 115 Ligurio 152 Linquo 132 Lingo 147 Lino 142 Lippio 153 Liquet 129 Liquo 115 Lito 115 Liveo 128 Loco 115 Loquor 148 Lubet 129 Luceo 125 Luctor 118 Ludo 133 Lugeo 126 Luo 132 Lustro 115 LIST OF VERBS. Luxurio 115 Maceo 128 Macresco 144 Macto 115 Maculo 115 Madco 123 Malo 137 Mando, -ere ... 1 32 Mando, -are... 115 Manduco 115 Maneo 126 Mano 115 Mansuesco . . . 144 Marceo 128 Mature 115 Maturesco .... 144 Medeor 128 Medicor 118 Meditor 118 Memoro 115 Mentior 154 Meo 115 Mercor 118 Mereo 123 Mergo 133 Meridio 115 Metior 154 Meto 140 Metuo 132 Mico 121 Migro 115 Milito 115 Minio 115 Mingo 135 Ministro 115 Minor 118 Minuo 132 Misceo 124 Misereor 128 Miseret 129 Miseror 118 Mitesco 145 Mitigo 115 Mitto 140 Moderor 119 Modulor 119 Moereo 128 Molo 137 Molior 154 Mollesco 145 Mollio 150 Moneo 122 Monstro 115 Mordeo 125 Morior 146 Moror 119 Moveo 127 Muceo 128 Mugio 150 Mulceo 125 Mulgeo 126 Miingo 135 Munio 150 Mutio 150 Muto 115 Mutuor 119 Nanciscor 148 I Narro .... 115 Nascor 148 Nato 115 Nauseo 115 Navigo 115 Navo 115 Neco 121 Necto 135 Negligo 135 Nego 115 Negotior 119 Neo 126 Nequeo 153 Nexo, -are 121 Nexo, -ere .... 146 Nideo 128 Nigreo 123 Ningit 149 Niteo 123 Nitor 148 No 115 Noceo 124 Nolo 137 Nomino 115 Nosco 142 Noto 115 Novo 115 Nubo 133 Nudo 115 Nugor 119 Nuncupo 115 Nimtio 115 Nuto 115 Nutrio 150 Obbrutesco .... 144 Obcallesco 144 Obdo 140 Obduresco 144 Obedio 152 Obliviscor 148 Obmutesco . . . 144 Obsecro ...... 115 Obstupesco . . . 144 Obsurdesco . . . 144 Obtempero... . 115 Obtestor 119 Obtrunco 115 Occulo 137 Oleo 124 Onero 115 Operio 152 Operor 119 Opinor 119 Opitulor 119 Oportet 129 Opperior 154 Opsonor 119 Opto 115 Orbo 115 14 Orior 146 Ordior 154 Orno 115 Oro 115 Otior 119 Pabulor 119 Paciscor 148 Paco 115 Pago 139 Palleo 124 Palor 119 Pando 147 Pango 136 Parco 139 Pareo 124 Pario 145 Pare 115 Partio 150 Partior 154 Pasco 142 Pateo 124 Patior 146 Patro 115 Paveo 127 Pavio 154 Pecco 115 Pecto 136 Pedo 139 Pello 139 Pendeo 125 Pendo 139 Peraresco 144 Percalleo 124 Percello 140 Percontor 119 Percrebresco . . 144 Perdo 140 Pergo 136 Perhibeo 123 Perhorresco . . . 144 Periclitor 119 Permereo 123 Perterreo 123 Pertimesco . . . 144 Peto 138 Piget 129 Pinguesco .... 145 Pinso 132 Pio 115 Piscor 119 Placeo 124 Placo 115 Plango 136 Plaudo 134 Plecto 136 Plico 121 Ploro 115 Piumesco 145 Pluo 132 Poenitet 129 Polleo 128 Polio 150 PoUiceor 128 157 Pono 138 Populor 119 Porto 115 Posco 139 Posthabeo .... 123 Postulo 115 Potior 154 Poto 121 Praebeo 123 Praedor 119 Pr^lior 119 Praemior 119 Prasmoneo 122 Prandeo 125 Precor 119 Pj-ehendo 132 Premo 134 Prendo 132 Privo 115 Probo 115 Prodo 140 Proficiscor .... 148 Profiteor 128 Profligo 115 Prohibeo 123 Promereo 123 Promo 134 Propero 115 Propino 115 Propitio 116 Presilio 152 Prurio 154 Psallo 132 Pubeo 124 Pudet 129 Puerasco 145 Pugno 116 Puiso 116 Pungo 139 Punio 151 Purgo 116 Puteo 124 Puto 116 Putreo 124 Quffiro 138 Quasso 116 Quatio 147 Queo 153 Queror 148 Quiesco 142 Radio 116 Rado 134 Rancesco 145 Rapio 146 Rapto 116 Raucio 153 Recorder 119 Recrudesco. . . 144 RecQpero 116 Recuso 116 Reddo 140 Redimio 151 Refrigesco .... 144 158 Rego 136 Relanguesco . . 144 Reminiscor . . . 148 Renideo 128 Reor 128 Reperio 152 Repo 134 Repudio 116 Repuerasco . . . 145 Resero IIG Retalio 116 Revivisco .... 144 Reviresco .... 144 Rideo 125 Rigeo 124 Rigo 116 Rimor 119 Ringor 148 Rixor 119 Rodo 134 Rogo 116 Roto 116 Rubeo 124 Rudo 140 Rugio 154 Ruo 132 Rurapo 132 Rusticor 119 Sacrifico 116 Sncro 116 SaBvio 152 Sagino 116 Sagio 154 SaRo 152 Sallio 153 Sallo 146 Salto 116 Saluto 116 Sancio 152 Sano 116 Sapio 146 Sarcio 152 Sarrio 152 Satago 146 Satio 116 Saturo 116 Saucio 116 Scabo 132 Scalpo ....... 134 Scando 132 Scateo 128 Scaturio 154 Sdo 151 Scindo 140 Scisco 143 Scissitor 119 Scitor 119 Screo 116 Scribo 134 Scrutor 119 Sculpo 134 Seco 121 Secundo 116 LIST OP VERBS. Sedeo 125 Sedo 116 Seneo 127 Sentio 152 Sepelio 152 Sepio 152 Sequor 148 Sero 141 Serpo 134 Servio 151 Servo 116 Sibilo 116 Sicco 116 Sido 132 Signo 116 Sileo 124 Simulo 116 Singultio 154 Sino 141 Sisto 141 Sitio 152 Socio .. ...... 116 Soleo 126 Solor 119 Solvo 132 Somnio 116 Sono 122 Sopio 151 Sorbeo 124 Sordeo 124 Sortior 154 Spargo 134 Spatior 119 Specto 116 Speculor 119 Sperno 141 Spero 116 Spiro 116 Spolio 116 Splendeo 127 Spondeo 125 Spumo 116 Spuo 133 Squaleo 124 Statuo 133 Stabiiio 151 Sterilesco 145 Sterno 141 Sternuo 133 Sterto 138 Stillo 116 Stimulo 116 Stinguo 136 Stipo 116 Stipulor 119 Sto 122 Strepo 138 Strideo 127 Strido 133 Stringo 136 Strio 116 Struo 134 Studeo 124 Stupeo 126 Suadeo 125 Suavior 119 Subdo 140 Succenturio. . . 116 Sudo 116 Suesco 143 Suffio 153 Suflbco 116 Sugillo 116 Sugo 136 Sumo 134 Supero 116 Suppedito .... 116 Surgo 136 Suspicor 119 Sustollo 141 Susurro 116 Taceo 125 TjEdet 129 Tango 139 Tardo 116 Taxo 116 Tego 136 Temno 134 Tempero 116 Tendo 139 Teneo 127 Tenerasco .... 145 Tento 116 Tepeo.. 124 Terebro 116 Tergeo 126 Tergo 134 Tero 141 Terreo 123 Testor 119 Texo 138 Tinieo 124 Tingo 136 Tinnio 151 Titubo 116 Tolero 116 Tollo 141 Tondeo 125 Tono 122 Torpeo 124 Torqueo 127 Torreo 127 Tracto 116 Trado 140 Traho 136 Tremo 138 Tribuo 133 Tripudio 116 Trucido 116 Trudo 134 Tueor 128 Tumeo 124 Tundo 139 Tuor 149 Turbo 116 Turgeo 126 Tussio 154 Tutor 120 Ulciscor 149 Unibro UG Ungo 136 Urgeo 126 Uro 134 Utor 149 Uveo 128 Uvesco 145 Vaco 116 Vado 134 Vagio 153 I Vagor 120 j Valeo 124 Vapulo 117 Vario 117 Vasto 117 Vegeo 128 Veho 136 Vellico 117 Velio 141 Vendo 140 Venio 153 Veneror 120 Venor 120 V^erbero 117 Vereor 128 Vergo 134 Verrio 153 Verro 133 Versor 120 Verto 133 Vescor , 149 Vesperascit 149 Vestigo 117 Vestio 151 Veto 122 Vexo 117 Vibro 117 Video 125 Vieo 127 Vigeo 124 Vilesco 144 Vineio 153 Vinco 133 Vindemio 117 Violo 117 Viieo 124 Vso 147 ViiJo 117 Vi!o 117 \ivo 136 Vociferor 120 Voco 117 Volo, -vis 138 Volo, are 117 Volva 133 Vomo 138 Voro 117 VoV( o 1 27 Vulgo IIT Vulnero. 117 IRREGULAR VERBS. 159 IRREGULAR VERBS. § 194# The Irregular Verbs are, Sum^ ' I am ;' jEo, 'I go ;' Qiieo^ ' I am able ;' Volo, ' I am willing;' Fero^ ' I bear or suffer ;' Fio^ ' I am made,' ' I be- come ;' Edo^ ' I eat,' and their compounds. SUM has already been conjugated. After the same manner are formed its compounds.* Prosura, to do good, has a d where sum begins with e. Prosum, prodesse, profui. Indicative Mode, Pr. Pro-sum, prod-es, prod-est; pro-sumus, prod-estis, &c. Imp. Prod-eram, prod-eras, prod-erat; prod-eramus, &c. Per. Pro-fui, pro-fuisti, pro-fuit; pro-fuimus, pro-fuistis, &c. Plu. Pro-fiieram, pro-fueras, pro-fuerat ; pro-fueramus, &c. FuT. Prod-ero, prod-eris, prod-erit ; prod-erfmus, &c. Subjunctive Mode pR. Pro-sim, pro-sis, pro-sit; pro-simus, pro-sitis, pro-sint. Imp. Prod-essem, prod-esses, prod-esset ; prod-essemus, &c. Per. Pro-fuerim, pro-fueris, pro-fuerit; pro-fuerimus, &c. Plu. Pro-fuissem, pro-fuisses, pro-fuisset; pro-fiiissemus, &c. FuT. Pro-fuero, pro-fueris, pro-fuerit; pro-fuertmus, &c. Imperative Mode. pR. 2. Prod-es or prod-esto, 2. Prod-este or prod-estote, 3. Prod-esto; 3. Pro-sunto. * Compounds of iSuw : — Absum,l am absent; Adsvm, I am present; Desum,l am wanting ; Inter sum^ I am present ; Obsum, I am against, I hurt ; Possum, I am able ; Prcesum, I am before, I preside over ; Prosum, I avail, I do good ; Subsum, I am under, I lurk; Supersum, I am over and above, I survive ; and Insum, I am in, which wants the Perfect. Prosum takes d after jjro, when the simple Verb begins with E ; as, Prosum, prodesf, prodesse, &c. Compounds of Eo : — Abeo, I depart ; Adeo, I approach ; Anteeo, 1 go before ; Coe'o, I assemble, I meet ; Exeo, I go out ; Ineo, I enter ; Intereo, I perish, I die ; Introeo, I come in ; Obeo, I am about, I man- age, I die ; Pereo, I perish ; Prceeo, I go before ; Prcelcreo, I pass by ; Prodeo, I go forth ; Rcdeo, I return; Sw^eo, I go under; Transeo, I pass over; Vcneo, I am sold. Compound of Queo: — Negueo, I am unable. Compounds of Vo/o: — Nolo, I am un- willing: Mrdo, lam more willing. Compounds of Fero: — Aftro, I bring; Ante- fero, I prefer; Aufero, I take away; Circvmfero, I carry round ; Coirfero, I contri- bute ; Defero, I convey ; Differo, I disperse ; Effero, I carry forth ; Jtnfcro, I bring in; Offero, I offer; Perfero,! carry through; Prcsfero, I prefer; Profero, I bring forward ; RPfero, I bring back ; Sufero, I take up, I endure. Compounds oi Edo: — Adedo, I devour; Ambedo, I eat around, I gnaw; ComMo, I eat up; Exedo, I consume ; Peredo, I eat through. 160 IRREGULAR VERBS. Infinitive Mode. Pr. Prod-esse. Fut. Esse pro-futurus, -a, -um. Per. Pro-fuisse. Fuisse pro-futurus. Participle. Fut. Pro-futurus. § 195« Possum is compounded of potis, able, and sum: and is thus conjugated : Possum,' posse, potui. To be able. Indicative Mode, Pr. Possum, potes. Imp. Pot-eram, -eras, Per. Pot-ui, -uisti, Plu. Pot-ueram, -ueras, -uerat ; Fut. Pot-ero. -€ris, potest ; -erat ; possumus, -eramus. potestis, -eratis, possunt. -erant. -uit; -utmus, -uistis, < -uerunt or -uere. -uerat ; -ueramus, -ueratis, -uerant. -erit; -ertmus, -erttis, -erunt. Subjunctive Mode, pR. Pos-sim, -sis, -sit; -simus. Imp. Pos-sem, -ses, -set; -semus, Per. Pot-uerim, -ueris -uerit; -uertmus, Plu. Pot-uissem, -uisses, -uisset; -uissemus, Fut. Pot-uero, -ueris, -uerit; -uertmus, -sitis, -sint. -setis, -sent, -ueritis, -uerint. -uissetis, -uissent. -ueritis, -uerint. Pr. Posse. Infinitive Mode, Per. Potuisse. The rest wanting. Note : Possum wants the Fut. Infin. and has no Gerunds or Supines. Patens is considered as a mere Adjective, and not as a Participle. ' Possum is compounded of potis and sum. They sometimes occur separately, (Virg. ^n. III. 671. xi. 148. Ter. Eun. ii. 2. 32. Adelph. iv. 1. 5. Lucr. i. 451. ii. 849. 911. IV. 718. V. 718. CatuU. lxxi. 7. lxxv. 24. Varr. R. H. ii. 2. Cic. Tusc. ii. 16. Gell. xix. 9, &c.) and then potis is Masc. Fem. or Neut. and Plur. as well as Sing. Cf Plant. Poen. i. 2. 17. We find the following forms also : — Potessim, Plant. Pers. I. 1. 41. Potesset, Lucil. ap. Non. v. 98. where some read Pvtissef. Cf. Ascon. in Divin. Verr. 13. Potissum, Plaut. Cure. v. 3. 23. Possiem, es, et, Cic. in Arat 304. Plaut Bacch. iv. 5 2. Most. ii. 2. 34. iv. 2. 68. Potestur, Lucr. iii. 102^1. Pacuv. ap. Non. x. 34. cf Pier, ad Virg. ^n. viii. 402. Possltur, Cat. R. R. 154. Possetur, Claud. Quadrig. Ap. Non. x. 30. Potesse, Lucr. i. 665. Ter. Eun. IV. 3. 24. Charis. iii. p. 231. cites, Poteste, potesto, pdtestdte, possunto, but without authority. IRREGULAll VERBS. 161 § 196« EO,' ire, ivi, itum. Togo. Indicative Mode, pR. Eo, is, it; imus, itis, eunt. Imp. Ibam, ibas, ibat; ibamus, ibatis, ibant. Per. Ivi, ivisti, ivit ; ivtmus, ivistis, iverunt or ivere. Plu. Iveram, iveras, iverat ; iveramus, iveratis, iverant, FuT. Ibo, ibis, ibit; ibimus, ibttis, ibunt. i Subjunctive Mode, pR. Earn, eas, eat; eamus, eatis, eant. Imp. Irem, ires, iret; iremus, iretis, irent. Per. Iverim, iveris, iverit; iverimus, iverttis, iverint. Plu. Ivissem, ivisses, ivisset; ivissemus, ivissetis, ivissent. FuT. Ivero, iveris, iverit ; ivertmus, iverttis, iverint. Pr. Imperative Mode. ilto,^^^5 lltote, eunto. Infinitive Mode, Pr. Ire. Per. Ivisse. FuT. Esse iturus, -a, -um. Fuisse iturus, -a, -um. Participles, Pr. lens, Gen, euntis. FuT. Iturus, -a, -um. Gerunds, Eundum. Fundi. Eundo, &c. Supines, 1. Itum. 2. Itu. The compounds of Eo are conjugated after the same manner; ad-, ah-, ex-, co-, in-, inter-, ob-, rM-, sub-, per-, prcs-, ante-, prod-eo ; only in the perfect, and the tenses formed from it, they are usually contracted ; thus, Adeo, adii, seldom adivi, aditum, adire, to go to ; perf. Adii, adiisti, or adisti, &c. adieram, adicrim, &c. So likewise veneo venii, , to be sold, compounded of venum and eo.) But ambio, -tvi, 'Itum, -Ire, to surround, is a regular verb of the fourth conjugation. » Of this Verb the Infinitive Passive Iri occurs frequently joined with the Perfect Participle Passive of other verbs. We also find the Impersonals, Itur, eatiir, ihatur, iretur, ihitur, Itum, est, ^c. Virg. ^n. vi. 179. Plant. True. iii. 1. 21. Senec. Med. 460. Cic. Att. II. 1. Eundus occurs in Claud. Eutrop. ii. 419. Issem, Isse, Cic. Phil. XII. 12. Verr. in. 44. and in Ovid. Propert. Stat. Sil. passim. Istls, Lucan. VII. 834. lam, ies, iU, Cic. Agr. ii. 25. Cf TibuU. i. 4. 23. Senec. Benef ii. 1. Apul. Met. vi. p. 122. Most of the Compounds oi Eo make n in the Perfect, rather than 'tvi. Adeo, Jneo, PrcBtereo, Subeo, Transeo, being used transitively, are found in the Passive. Cic. Q. Fr. i. 2. 5. Offic. i. 19. Cses. B. G. vii. 9. Cic. Tusc. v. 19. Manil. iv. 398. Juv. xvi. 2. Ambio is conjugated regularly like Audio, Veneo, venii is conjugated like Eo; yet we find Veniet, Murator. p. 1311. ii. n. 2. Venear, and Venedtur, Diomed. I. p. 365. Venltus, Sedul. Hymn. i. 21. Venitum, (Supine) Priscian. x. p. 907. 14* 162 IRREGULAR VERBS. £o, like other neuter verbs, is often rendered in English under a passive form thus, it, he is going ; wit, he is gone ; tverat, he was gone ; iverit, he may be gone, or shall be gone. So, venit, he is coming ; venit, he has come ; venerat, he was come, &c. In ihe passive voice these verbs for the most part are only used imper- sonally ; as, itur ah illo, he is going ; ventum est ab illis, they are come. We find some of the compounds of eo, however, used personally ; as, pericula adeuntur, are undergone. Cic. Libri sibyUini adlti sunt, were looked into. Liv. Flumen pedt- bus trans'iri potest. Caes. InimidticB subeaniur. Cic. QUEO, I can, and NEQUEO,^ I cannot, are conjugated the same way as eo ; only they want the imperative and the gerunds ; and the participles are seldom used. § 197. VOLO* velle, volui. To will, or to be willing. Indicative Mode, pR. V61-0, vis, vult; Imp. Vol-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; Per. Vol-ui, -uisti, -uit; Plu. Vol-ueram, -ueras, -uerat; FuT. Vol-am, -es, -et ; voliimus, vultis, volunt. -ebamus, -ebatis. -ebant. -utmus, -uistis, -uerunt or -uere. -ueramus, -ueratis, -uerant. -emus, -etis. -ent Subjunctive Mode, Pr. Velim, Imp. Vellem, Per. Vol-uerim, Plu. Vol-uissem, FuT. Vol-uero, velis, velles, -ueris, -uisses, -ueris, velit ; vellet ; -uerit; -uisset ; -uerit ; veliraus, vellemus, -uertmus, -uissemus, -uerfmus. velitis, velletis, -uerttis, -uissetis, -ueritis. velint. vellent. -uerint. -uisserit. -uerint. Infinitive Mode, Participle, pR. Velle. Per. Voluisse. Pr. Vol ens. The rest not used. * Of Qiieo and Nequeo these forms occur : Quii, Priscian, x. p. 905. 907. Quiit, Accius ap. Macrob. vi. 1. Quislis, Juvenc. Hist. Ev. ii. 679. Quissent, Auson. Epigr. cxxxix. 7. Quisse, Lucr. v. 1421. Quiens, Apul. Met. vi. 113. ix. 206. Quitur, CaEcil. ap. Diomed, i. p. 380. Quitus, Id. ibid. Apul. Apol. p. 402. Terent. Hecyr. iv. 1. 57. Queuntur, Caecil. ap. Diomed. i. p. 380. Queafur, Lucr. i. 1043. Qiieantur, Plant. Pars. ii. 2. 12. Qui-tvm, (Supine) Priscian, ix. p. 867. Nequissent. Lucr. IV. 1248. Sallust. Jug. c. 18. Nequitur, Sallust, Jug. c. 34. Plaut. Kud. iv. 4. 20. Nequitum, Pacuv. ap. Fest. et Cato ibid. Neqmtus, Caper Priscian. x. p. 899. Nequievs, Sallust, Fragm. Apul. Met. viii. p. 162. Auson. Prof ii. sub. fin. Ammian. xv. 10. 2 Vis, vulf, vuUis, or, as they were anciently written, volt, voltes, (Auson. Epigr. XXXIX. Ter. Andr. v. 3. 1. Plaut. Most. in. 2. 68. 71. Novius ap. Non. x. 18, &c.) are contractions of vol^s, voTit, volHis. In Lucil. lib. xxvii. ap. Non. vii. 88. and Plaut. Asin. i. 2. 26. we find Volam for vUim. IRREGULAR VERBS. 163 § 198» NOLO,* nolle, nolui. To be unwilling. Indicative Mode, pR. Nolo, non-vis, non-vult; Imp. Nol-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; Per. Nol-ui, -uisti, -uit; Plu. Nol-ueram, -ueras, -uerat ; FuT. Nolam, noles, nolet; nolumus, -ebamus, -uimus, -ueramus. non-vultis, -ebatis, -uistis, \ -ueratis. -nolemus, -nol^tis, nolunt. -ebant. -uerunt or -uere. -uerant. -nolent. Subjunctive Mode, Pr. Nolim, nolis. nolit ; nolimus. nolitis. nolint. Imp. Noliem, nolles, nollet ; noliem us, nolletis, nollent. Per. Nol-uerim, -ueris, -uerit ; -uertmus, -uerttis. -uerint. Plu. Nol-uissem, -uisses. -uisset ; -uissemus, -uissetis, -uissent. FuT. Nol-uero, -ueris. -uerit ; -uerimus. -uerttis. -uerint. pR. Imperative, . Sing, 2. Plur, SNoli or S nolite or Nolito. I nolitote. Infinitive. Pr. Nolle. Per. Noluisse. Participle. Pr. Nolens. The rest wanting. § 199» MALO,^ malle, malui. To be more willing. Pr. Mal-o, Imp. Mal-ebam, Per. Mal-ui, Indicative Mode, mavis, -ebas, mavult ; -ebat ; -uisti, -uit ; Plu. Mal-ueram, -ueras, -uerat; FuT. Mal-am, -es, -et; &c. malumus, -ebamus, -utmus, -ueramus, mavultis, malunt. -ebatis, -ebant. -uMis, ^"^^""' ' { or -uere. -ueratis, -uerant. This is scarcely in use. ^ Nolo is a contraction of non vole. For nonvts we find nems, Plant. Trin. v. 2. 32. Most. III. 2. 75. for nonvult, nevolt, Plant. Most. i. 2. 29. Noltis for nonvulds, Lucil. ap. Diomed. i. p. 381. Putsch. 2 Malo is a contraction of magis, or mage volo. Of this Verb we find the follow- ing forms : Mdvolo, Plant. Asin. v. 1. 8. Poen. i. 2. 90. mdvolet, Asin. i- 1- 108. md- volunt, Naev, ap. Fest. in ♦ Stuprum ;' mdvoluit, Petron. Fragm. mdvelim, Plant. True. IV. 2. 29. mdvelis, Capt. ii. 2. 20. Pseud, i. 2. 8. mdveht, Trin. II. 2. 25. ma- vellem, Plaut. Mil. ii. 2. 16. Amph. 1. 3. 14. Pseud, i. 1. 128. 164 IRREGULAR VER a: Subjunctive Mode. pR Malim, malis, malit; malimus, malitis, malint. Imp. Mallem, malles, mallei; mallemus, malletis, mallent. Per. Mal-uerim, -ueris, -uerit; -uertmus, -uerttis, -uerint. Plu. Mal-uissem, -uisses, -uisset; -uissemus, -uissetis, -uissent. Fur. Mal-uero, -ueris, -uerit; -uertmus, -uerttis, -uerint. Pr. Malle. Infinitive Mode, Per. Maluisse. The rest not used. § 300« FERO, ferre, tiili, latum. To carry, to bring, or suffer. ACTIVE VOICE. Indicative Mode. pR. Fero, fers, fert; fertmus, fertis, ferunt. Imp. Fer-ebam, -ebas, -ebat; -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. Per. Tuli, tulisti, tulit ; tultmus, tulistis, tulerunt or -ere. Plu. Tul-eram, -eras, -erat; -eramus, -eratis, -erant. FuT. Feram, feres, feret; feremus, feretis, ferent. Subjunctive Mode. pR. Feram, Imp. Ferrem, Per. Tul-erim, Plu. Tul-issem, FuT. Tul-ero, feras, ferat ; ferres, ferret; -eris, -erit ; -isses, -isset ; -eris, -erit ; feramus, ferremus, -ertmus, -issemus, -erimus, feratis, ferretis, -erttis, -issetis, -erttis. ferant. ferrent. -erint. -issent. -erint. Imperative Mode. Infinitive Mode, T» Fer, n . 5 ^erte, r«^,«f« PR- Ferre. P^-Ferto,^^'^°' Uertoie,^^"^"^- Per. Tulisse. FuT. Esse laturus, -a, -um, Fuisse laturus, -a, -um. Participles, Gerunds. Supines, „ Ferens, Ferendum, 1. Latum, rr. Laturus, -a, -um. Ferendi, Ferendo, &c. 2. Latu. IRREGULAR VERBS. 165 PASSIVE VOICE. Feror, ferri, latu3. To be brought • * Indicative Mode, Pr. Feror, \ ^'?^' Sfertur; ferimur, ferimini, fenintur. ( or lerre, \ ' Imp. Fer-ebar, \ '^ ^ k-',^ { -ebatur ; -ebamur, -ebamini, -ebantur. I or -ebare, ) Per. Latus sura, Sic. latus fui, &c. Flu. Latus eram, &c. latus fueram, &c. FuT. Ferar, J ^^fer're (feretur; ferernur, feremini, ferentur. Subjunctive Mode. Pr. Ferar. < or fefire \ ^^^^^^^ '* ^eramur, feramini, ferantur. Imp. Ferrer. < ^^S!!!5,« { ferretur ', ferremur, ferremini, ferrentur. ( or lerrere, > Per. Latus sim, &c. latus fuerira, &c. Plu. Latus essem, &c. latus fuissem, &c. FuT. Latus fuero, &c. Imperative Mode, Pr. Ferre or fertor, fertor ; ferimtni, feruntor. Infinitive Mode, Participles, Pr. Ferri. Per. Latus, -a, -um. Per. Esse or fuisse latus, -a, -um. Fut. Ferendus, -a, -urn. In like manner are conjugated the Compounds oifero ; as, afero, attuli, allatum ; aufero, abstuliy ahlatum ; differo, distTili, dUfdum ; confero, coniuli, cdldtum ; infero, intuli, illatum; offero, obtuli, ohlaium; effero, exiuli, eldlum. So, circum-, per-, trans-, de-, pro-, ante-, prcB-, re-fero. In some writers we find adferu, adtuLi, adld- tum ; conldlum ; inldtum ; obfero, &c. for affero, &c. Obs. 1. Most part of the above verbs are made irregular by contraction. Thus, nolo is contracted for non veto ; malo for magis volo ; fero, fers, fert, &c. for feris, ferit, &c. Ferror, ferris or ferre, fertur, for ferr^ris, &c. Obs. 2. The imperatives of dico, duco, and facio, are contracted in the same manner with fer : thus we say, die, due, fac ; instead of dice, duce, face. But these often occur likewise in the regular form. 166 IRREGULAR VERBS. § 20 lo FIO,' fieri, factus. To he made or done, to become. Indicative Mode. pR. Fio, fis, fit; fimus, fitis, fiunt. Imp. Fiebam, fiebas, fiebat; fiebamus, fiebatis, fiebant. Per. Factus sum, &c. factus fui, &c. Plu. Factus eram, &c. factus fueram, &c. FuT. Fiam, fies, fiet; fiemus, fietis, fient. Subjunctive Mode, pR. Fiam, fias, fiat; fiamus, fiatis, fiant. Imp. Fierem, fieres, fieret ; fieremus, fieretis, fierent Per. Factus sim, &c. factus fuerim, &c. Plu. Factus essem, &c. factus fuissem, &c. FuT. Factus fuero, &c. Imperative Mode, Infinitive Mode. i>o S Fit tiir. . S fi^®' fi„r,t« PR- Fieri. ^*- \ Fito, ^^ • \ fitOte, ^^^- Per. Esse or fuisse factus, -a, -urn. FuT. Factum iri. Participles, Supine, Per. Factus, -a, -um. Factu. FuT. Faciendus, -a, -um. Note.— -The Compounds of facio which retain a, have also fo in the passive, and fac in the imperative active ; as, calefacio, too warm. calHio, calefac: but those which change a into i. form the passive regularly, and have/Vce in the imperative ; as, conficio, confice ; conjicior, confici, confectvs. We find, however, covjit, it is done, and confieri ; deft, it is wanting ; injit, he begins. § 302* Edo,'' edere, edi, or esse, esiis, eat. Infinitive Mode, Present. Edere, or esse. Past. Edisse. Future. Esiirus, or esiirura esse. 1 Factor, the Passive of Facio, very rarely occurs in the classics. Flo was used in its stead. Facitur, however, is read Nigid. ap. Non. x. 19. Faciatur, Petron. Frag. Priscian. viii. p. 101. Putsch. The Indicatives, Fls, Fimus, and the Impe- ratives, Ft, Flto, File, Fitcte, rarely occur. Fis is read in Hor. ii. Ep. 2. 211. Ftmus, ArnoD. ii. p. 53. and in some edd. of Terent. Heaut. iii. 1. 74. ubi. al. Sumus. Ft, Hor. ii. Sat. 5. 38. Plant. Cure, i- 87. Fito, 2d Pers. Cato ap. Non. VII. 62. Fite, Plant. Cure. i. 1. 89. F'dote, Cato. Crassus, IJv. in Odyss. ap. Non. 1. c. Of Filis no trace can be found. Fiens occurs only in Diomed. i. pp. 352. 177. F'ttur, Cato ap. Priscian. viii. p. 789. Fiehantur, id. ibid. Fitum est, Liv. in Odyss. ap. Non. 1. c. — Fio is sometimes used impersonally : Fit, it happens ; Fte- bat, it happened, &c. 2 Edo is a regular Verb of the third Conjugation ; but in the Infinitive and Im- perative Modes, in the Present-imperfect Indicative, and the Imperfect Subjunc- IRREGULAR VERBS. 167 Indicative Mode. Pres. Edo, edis, ( or es. edit, or est; edimiis, editis, or estis , edunt. Imp. Ed-ebam, -ebas. -ebat; -ebamus, -ebatis. -ebant. Per/. Ed-i, -isti, -It; -imus, -istis, ( -erunt, I or -ere Plup. Ed-erara, -eras, -erat; -eramiis. -eratis, -eiant. Fui. Ed-am, -es, -et; -emus, -etis. -ent. Subjunctive Mode. Pres. Ed-am, -as, -at; -amus, -atrs. -ant 1 C Ed-erem, -eres, -eret. -eremus. -eretis, -erent, Imp. 2 or or or or or or ( Essem, esses. esset ; essemus, esset is. essent. Per/. Ed-erim, -ens. -erit; -erimus, -eritis. -erint. Plup. Ed-issem, -isses, -isset ; -issemus -issetis, -issent Fut. £d-ero. -erls. -erit; -erimus. -eritis, -erint. Singidar. No first ^rson. 2. Ede, edito, or es, esto, 3. *£dat, edito, or csto. Imperative Mode. Plural. 1. *Edamus, 2. Edite, editGte, or este, estote, 3. *Edant, edunto. Pres. Per/. Edens. Esus. Participles. Fut. in -RUS, Esurus. Fut. in -DUS, Edendus. Gerunds. Gen. Eden-di, Dat. ^ AU. Eden-do, Nmn. ^ Ace. Edendum. Supines. Former, Esum. Latter, Esu. live, it assumes other forms, as if from the Verb Sum. Esse, Cic. Nat. Deor. ii. 3. Esse, ♦ to be eaten,' Plant. Most. iv. 2. 42. Es, Plant. Cas. ii. 3. 32. Est, Hor. ii. Sat. 2. 57. I. Epist. 2. 39. Virg. ^n. iv. 66. v. 683. Esses, Val. Max. iv. 3. Esset, Virg. Georg. i. 151. Essemus, Terent. Eun. iii. 4. 2. Esto, Cato R. R. 156. Este, Plant. Most. 1. 1. 61. Esus, Gell. ix. 6. Esurus, Ovid. Heroid. Epist. ix. 37. Edens, Ovid. Met. ii. 768. Edendus, Cic. de Amic. 69. Ovid. Heroid. Epist. i. 95. Esum, Plant. Stich. i. 3. 29. Esu, Plant. Pseud, in. 2. 35. Estum, Priscian x. p. 893. These forms also occur; Esus sum, * I have eaten,' Solin. 17 — 27. Edim, is, it, for Edam, as, at. Plant. Anl. iii. 2. 16. Pcen. in. 1. 34. iv. 2. 45. Capt. in. 1. 1. Editis for Eddtis, Caecil. Nov. and Pomi^n. ap. Non. ii. 114. x. 18. Cf Virg. ^n. xii. 801. Hor. Epod. III. 3. Comedim, is, it, Cic. Fam. ix. 20. Plant. Cure. iv. 4. 4. EsSrim, for Ederim. Apul. Met. iv. p. 152. 32. Estur, Sen. de Ira, in. 15. Cels. v. 27. 3. Ovid. ex. Pont. i. 1. 69. Plant. Poen. iv. 2. 13.— Of the quantity of Es no proof can be found. It would therefore be better to follow Servius, Vossins, Alvarex, and others, who suppose it long, than pronounce it short with some later grammarians. 168 DEFECTIVE VERBS. V 203» NEUTER PASSIVE VERBS. To irregular verbs may properly be subjoined what are commonly called Neuter Passive Verbs, which, like^o, form the preterite tenses according to the passive voice, and the rest in the active. These are, soleo, solerCf solitus, to use ; audeo, audere, ausus, to dare ; gaudeo, gaudere, gavisus, to rejoice ; fido,'Jidere, fisusj to trust. So, confido, to trust ; and diffido, to distrust ; which also have confidi, and diffidi. Some add mcereOf mcorere, mcBstuSy to be sad ; but m toork. Pando, as, bend, bow. Pando, IS, open, spread. Paro, as, prepare. ♦Pareo, es, appear. Pario, 13, beget. *Pario, as, -.. balance. *Pedo, IS, irep6(t>. Pedo, are, prop up. *Pendeo, es, hang. Pendo, IS, weigh. PercGlo, as, Jilter. Percolo, IS, adorn. ♦Permaneo, es, remain. *Permano, as, flow over. PraEdico, as, publish. Praedico, is, foretel. Praelego, as, . . bequeath in the first place. Praelego, is, read to one. Prodo, IS, betray. *PrGdeo, es, acme forth. ♦Recede, is, retire. *Recido, is, fall hack. RecTdo, IS, cut off . Reddo, ys, restore. *Redeo, Is, return. Ref ero, refers, bring back. ♦Ref erio, is, strike again. Relego, as remove. Relego, IS, read over. Sedo, as, allay. *Sedeo, es, sit. *SIdo, IS, sink. *Sero, IS, sow. Sero, IS knit, join. Sero, as, lock, bolt. *SuccTdo, IS, fall down. SuccTdo, IS, cut down. *Vado, IS, go, walk. Vador, aris, give bail. ♦Veneo, Is, be sold. ♦Venio, is, come. Venor, aris, hunt. Vincio, Is, bind. Vinco, IS, conquer. Voio, as, fly, hasten. *Volo, vis, be willing. § 224:« Verbs having the same Perfect: *Aceo, acui, be sharp. Cresco, crevi, grow. ♦Fulgeo, fulsi, shine. *Liiceo, luxi, shine. Mulceo, mulsi, soothe. *Paveo, pavi, fear. *Pendeo, pependi, hang. Acuo, acui, sharpen. Cerno, crevi, take possession. Fulcio, fulsi, prop. *Lugeo, luxi, mourn. *Mulgeo, mulsi, milk. Pasco, pavi, feed. Pendo, pependi, weigh. To these add Sto, Sisto, and some of their Compounds. § 225« Verbs having the same Perfect Participle: Cemo, crctus, sift. Cresco, cretus grow. Pasciscor, pactus, bargain. Pago, pactus, lay a wager. Pango, pactus, fasten. Pando, passus expand. Patior, passus, suffer. Vergo, versus, incline. Verro, versus, brusL Verto, versus, turn. REMARKS ON THE VERB. 176 DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION OF VERBS. § 226. Verbs are derived either from nouns or from other verbs. Verbs derived from nouns are called Dewomma- tive ; as, Caeno, to sup ; laudo, to praise ; fraudo, to defraud ; laptdo, to throw stones ; operor, to work ; frumentor, to forage ; lignor, to gather fuel ; &c. from coeim, laus, fraus, &c. But when they express imitation or resemblance, they are called Imi- tative ; as, Patrisso, Grcecor, bubula, cornlcor, &c. I imitate or resemble my iather, a Grecian, an owl, a crow, &c. from pater, GrcBCus, bubo, cornix. Of those derived from other verbs, the following chiefly deserve attention ; namely, Frequentalives, Inceptives, and Desideratives. §227« FREQUENTATIVES express frequency of action, and are all of the first conjugation. They are formed from the last su- pine, by changing dtu into Uo, in verbs of the first conjugation ; and by changing u into o, in verbs of the other three conjugations ; as, clamo^ to cry, clamtto, to cry frequently ; terreo, territo ; verto, verso ; dor- mioy dormito. 1. In like manner, Deponent verbs form Frequentatives in or; as, minor, to threat- en ; minitor, to threaten frequently. 2. Some are formed in an irregular manner ; as, nato, from no ; noscito, from nosco , scitor, or rather sciscitor, from scio ; pavtto, from paveo ; sector, from sequor ; loquitor, from loquor. So, qucerito, fundito, agito, jluito, &c. 3. From Frequentative verbs are also formed other Frequentatives ; as, curro, curso, curstto ; pello, pulse, pulsito, or by contraction j)ulto ; capio, capto, captito ; cano, canto, canttto ; aefendo, defenso, defenstto ; dico, dido, dictito ; gero, gesto, gesltto ; jacio, jacto, jactito ; venio, vento, ventito ; mutio, musso, (for mutlto,) musslto, &c. 4. Verbs of this kind do not always express frequency of action. Manjr of them have much the same sense with their primitives, or express the meaning more strongly. § 228« INCEPTIVE Verbs mark the beginning or continued increase of any thing. They are formed from the second person singular of the present of the indicative, by adding co ; as, caleo^ to be hot ; coles, calesco, to grow hot. So in the other conjugations, labasco, from labo ; tremisco, from tremo ; obdormisco, from obdormio. Hisco, from hio, is contracted for Masco. Inceptives are likewise formed from sub- stantives and adjectives; as, puerasco, from puer ; dulcesco, from dulcis ; juvenesco, from juvenis. All Inceptives are neuter verbs, and of the third conjugation. They want both the preterite and supine ; unless very rarely, when they borrow them from their primitives. § 229* DESIDERATIVE Verbs signify a desire or intention of doing a thing. They are formed from the latter supine by adding riOf and shortening the u ; as, cxendturio, I desire to sup, from ccdndtu. 176 REMARKS ON THE VERB. They are all of the fourth conjugation ; and want both preterite and supine, except these three, esurio, -ivi, -Itum^ to desire to eat; par- turioy 'ivij — to be in travail ; nupturio, -ivi, — , to desire to be married. 2. There are a few verbs in LLO^ which are called Diminutive ; as, cantillo. sorbillOy -are, I sing", I sup a little. To these some add albico, and candico, -are, to be, or to grow whitish ; also, nigrico, fodico, and vellico. 3. Some verbs in SSO are called Intensive; as, Capesso,facessOy petessOj or petisso, I take, I do, I seek earnestly. 4. Verbs are compounded with nouns, with other verbs, with adverbs, and chiefly with prepositions. Many of the simple verbs are not in use; as Fulo, fendo, specioy gruo, &c. The component parts usually remain entire- Sometimes a letter is added; as, prodeo, for pro-eo; or taken away; as, asporto, omitto, trado, pejeroy pergo, debeo, presbeo, ^c. for absporto, obmitto, transdo, perjuro, perrego, dekibeo, prcBkibeo, <^c. So, demo, promo, sumo, of de, pro, sub, and emo, which an- ciently signified, to take, or to take avxiy. Often the vowel or diphthong of the simple verb, and the last consonant of the preposition is changed ; as, damno, con- demno; calco, conculco; Icedo, coWido ; audio, obedio, ^c. AJ'tro, aufero, cullaudo- imptico, ^c. for adfero, af^ftrOj conclaudo, inptico, ^c. § 230. REMARKS ON THE VERB. Rem. 1. A Verb has been defined as a word which signifies doing, sufering, or being. It would have been more simple and much more intelligible to have said, A verb is that part of speech which mentions some act, event, or circumstance of or concerning peksons, places, things, or ideas; as, CcBsar vicit, Caesar con- quered ; Roma ruit, Rome falls ; Argerdum splendet, silver shines ; Probitas tauda- tur et alget, honesty is praised and starves. A Verb being the most essential word in a sentence, and without which a sentence cannot subsist, any word that, placed after the names of Persons, Places, Things, or Ideas, will make full sense, is a Verb. An English Verb may be known by its making sense with the words he will, or it shall, placed before it ; as. He wilt conquer, It shall fall. Rem. 2. The letters which precede the Infinitive terminations, -are, -ere, -^re, Ire, are called Radicals, and always remain unchanged, l^hus, Ain is the radical part ofAmare ; Man of Monere ; Reg of Regtre ; Aud ofAud'ire. By prefixing the radicals to the changeable parts, or terminations, which are the same in all Verbs of a similar Conjugation, every person of tiie simple Tenses of a regular Verb may be formed with the greatest facility. Rem. 3. Verbs seem to have had but one uncontracted Conjugation originally. At present there are four Conjugations ; one uncontracted in -ere, as Legere ; and three contracted in (acre) -are, as Amdre ; in {esre) -ere, as Monere ; and in (rcre) -ire, as Audlre. Charis. lib. ii. and some other ancient grammarians admit of but three Conjugations ; and Vossius de Anal. iii. 33. shows the fourth to be a mere contraction of the third. Rem. 4. The Participles in -rus and -dus in the Future Infinitive and the Perfect Participle in the Past Infinitive Passive are used only in the ]\om. and Accus. but in all Genders and Numbers; as, Amdlurus, -a, -urn, esse; Amatur-um, -am, -um, esse ; Amatur-i, -cb, -a esse ; Amatur-os, -as, -a esse ; Amatur-ns, -a, -um fuisse ; Amatur-um, -am, -um fuisse, &c. Amat-us, -a, -um esse ; Amat-um, -am, -um esse ; Amat-i, -cb, -a esse, &c. In the Future Infinitive Passive the termination -um of the Supine remains always unchanged. The Past Infinitive Passive seems to have been anciently of no certain Gender. In Plautus, Amph. Prol. 33. we read, Jus'am rem et facilem esse oratum a vobis volo ; and in Cic. Att. viii. 18. Cohortes ad me missum facias. The Neuter of the Future in -rus is found construed in the same manner. See Cic. ii. Ver. v. 65. Aul. Gell. i. 7. Lambin. ad Plant. Casin. in. 5. 37. Jan. Gulielm. QusDst. Plaut. p. 4. Voss. de Anal. in. 16. Perizon. ad Sanct. Min. I. 15. p. 125. REMARKS ON THE VERB. 177 Rem. 5. To the Present Infinitive Passive the syllable -er was occasionally Eidded by the early poets ; as, Amarier for Amari ; Fdrier for Fari. So Dicier, Pers. Sat I. 28. Rem. 6. The Future Infinitive Active occurs sometimes in -ssere ; as, Expugnas- 9tre, Plaut. Araph. i. 1. 55. Impetrassere, Aul. iv. 7. 6. Casin. ii. 3. 53. Mil. iv. 3. 35. Stich. I. 2. 23. Peconcitiassere, Capt. i. 2. 65. Rem. 7. The Perfect Infinitive Active is frequently contracted ; the syllable vi is omitted before s ; as, Amasse, Complesse, Nosse, Isse, &c. Also, Cesse, Lucr. i. 1104. Consumse, i. 234. Divisse, Hor. ii. Sat. 3. 169. Dixe, Non. v. 17. Prdduxe, Ter. Ad. iv. 2. 22. Promisse, Catul. ex. 5. Subduxe, Varr., &c. In the 4lh Conj. vi or V only is omitted ; as, Perisse, Plaut. Capt. in. 5. 35. Periisse, Aul. ii. 4. 21. A similar contraction takes place in the Perfects of the Indicative and Subjunctive ; vi is dropped before s, and ve before r. Of Perfects in -ovi, Novi and Movi alone admit of contraction. Also, Dixli and Dixis, Cic. pro Caecin. c. 29. Quintil. ix. 3. Terent. And. iii. 1. 1. Gell. vii. 17. Accesti, Virg. JEn. i. 205. Rem. 8. The Imperfect Indicative in the 4th Conj. anciently ended in -ibam, and the Future in -260; thus, Scibo, Plaut. Asin. i. 1. 13. Most. iv. 3. 5. True. 11. 6. 69. Servlbas, Ter. And. i. 1. 11. Plaut. Capt. 11. 1. 50. Custodihant, CatuU. lxiv. 319. Vestibat, Virg. ^En. viii. 160. Expedibo, Plaut. True. i. 2. 36. Larglbere, Bacch. IV. 7. 30. Servtbo, Terent. Hec. in. 5. 45. MdUbit, Hor. in. Od. 23. 19. Reddibi- tur, Plaut. Epid. 1. 1. 22. &c. &c. Rem. 9. The termination -ere in the third Person Plur. Perf. Indicative is not so usual as that in -erunt, especially in prose. Rem. 10. In the second Person Sing, of the Present Indie. Passive the termination -re for -ris is rare. In Cicero -re for -ris in the Imperfect and Future Indicative, and the Present and Imperfect Subjunctive, occurs frequently. Rem. 11. The Present Subjunctive anciently ended in -im; as, Duim,Du{s, Duitf Duint for Dem, Des, ^c. Perduim, is, it, int, for Perdam, as, <^c. Vid. Plaut. Amph. II. 2. 215. Aul. i. 1. 23. iv. 6. 6. Terent. Andr. iv. 1. 42. Cic. Cat. i. 9. Att. XV. 4. Deiot c. 7. Liv. x. 19. xxii. 10, &c. We also find such forms as Perduunt, Plaut. Rud. Prol. 24. Creduis, Amph. 11. 2. 40. Capt. iii. 4. 73. True. II. 2. 52. Creduam, as, at, Plaut. Poen. in. 5. 2. Trin. in. Bacch. iv. 8. 6. Siem, es, et, for Sim, <^c. Plaut. Amph. Prol. 57. Lucr. 11. 1078. Terent. Eun. 1. 1. 21. Fuat, for sit, Virg. ^n. x. 108. Rem. 12. The Future Subj. in a few instances occurs in -sso, and the Perfect Subjunctive in -ssim; thus, Lcvasso, Cic. de Senect. c. 1. Abjurassit, Plaut. Pers. IV. 3. 9. Invitassitis, Rud. iii. 5. 31. Irritassis, Amph. i. 1. 298. Pers. v. 2. 47. Stich. n. 2. 21. Servassint, Asin. iii. 3. 64. Casin, in. 5. 16. Pseud. 1. 1. 35. Ser- vassit, Cistel. iv. 2. 76. Servasso, Most. i. 3. 71. Licessit, Asin. in. 3. 13. Prohi- hessis, Plaut. Pseud, i. 1. 11. Cic. de Leg. in. 3. So Jusso for Jusstro, Virg. ^n. XI. 467. Rem. 13. The Imperatives of Dlco, Duco, Fero, and Facio, drop the final e ; thus, Dzc, Due, Fer, Fac. So Inger, CatuU. xxvii. 2. But the Compounds of Facto retain the e ,• as, Confice, Perfich Did, Duce, Face, occur sometimes in the early poets. Vid. Voss. Gr. p. 131. Rem. 14. The Present Subjunctive is frequently used for the Imperative ; as, Ne f acids, do not do it ; and sometimes the Future-Indic ; as, Non occides, thou ehalt not kill. So Vdlebis and Videbis in Cic. for Vale and VMe. The Perfect Subjunctive is used also in the same manner; as, Tu vlder^s, see you to it ; Ne dix- ir^s, do not say it. Rem. 15. The termination -mtno in the second Person Sing. Passive, and -mUnor^ for 'rriini, in the Plural, are exceedingly rare. Arbitrdvrinor, Plaut. Epid. v. 2. 30. Progredirriinor, Pseud, in. 2. 70. Fdirdno for Fqre, Cato, R. R. c. 141. 178 PARTICIPLES. Rem. 16. The third Person in 4o and -nto is used chiefly in law-giving ; as, Ad Dlvos adeunto caste, pielatem coluntoy Cic. Leg. ii. 19. Sometimes in the comic writers ; as, Phormionem lacessito, Ter. Phorm. v. 7. 38. Rem. 17. The termination -idle is rare. It occurs in Ermius, Cicero, Ovid, and Plautus. See Voss. Anal. iii. 4. Rem. 18. The Participle in -rus, and the Participle in -dus are found joined with most of the tenses of Sunu But the Participle in -rus does not occur joined with Fucro, PARTICIPLE. § 231* A Participle is a kind of Adjective formed from a verb, which in its signification implies time. It is so called because it partakes both of an adjective and of a verb, having in Latin, gender and declension from the one, time and signification from the other, and number from both. Participles in Latin are declined like adjectives; and their signification is vari- ous, according to the nature of the verbs from which they come ; only Participles in dus, are always passive, and import not so much future time, as obligation or necessity. § 232. Latin verbs have four Participles, the present and future active ; as, Amans, loving ; drnd- turusj about to love ; and the perfect and future passive ; as, amdtus^ loved ; amandiis^ to be loved. § 233* The Latin language has no participle perfect, that is, no participle of a completed action, in the perfect ; as, having written ; nor, in the passive voice, any participle present, that is, one that ex- presses a state of suffering still going on ; as, being written (that is, being in the act of being written). The deponent is the only kind of verb which has a participle of completed action ; imitatus^ ' having imitated.' This defect must be supplied by a circumlocution. Thus, to express the perfect participle active in English, we use a conjunc- tion, and the pluperfect of the subjunctive in Latin, or some other tense, according to its connexion with the other words of a sentence ; as, he having loved ; quum arnavisset, &c. § 234* Neuter verbs have commonly but two Participles ; as, Sedens^ sessurus ; starts^ aturus. From some Neuter verbs are formed Participles of the perfect tense ; a?, Errd- tus^ festhiatus, jurdtus, laboraius, vigilalus, cessatus, suddius, triumphdtus, regmduSf decnrsiis,desitus, emeritus, emersus, obitus, placilus, successus, occasus, &c. ; and also of the future in dus ; as, Jurandns, vigilandus, regnandus, carendus, dormiendus, erubescenrlus, &c. Neuter passive verbs are equally various. Veneo has no parti- ciple : Fido, only fidens and fisus ; soleo, salens, and sotttus ; vapido, vapidans, and vapulalurus ; Gaudeo, gaudens, gav'isus, and ^avisurus ; Audeo, audens, ausus, ausu- rus, audendus. Ausus is used both in an active and passive sense ; as, Ausi omnes immane, nefds, ausoque pot'di. Virg. .^En. vi. 624. PARTICIPLES. 179 § 235* Deponent and Common Verbs have com- monly four Participles ; as, Loquens, speaking ; locuiarus, about to speak ; locutus, having spoken ; loquenduSy to be spoken. Dignans, vouchsafing: dignaturus, about to vouchsafe; aignatus, having vouchsafed, being vouchsafed, or having been vouchsafed; dignandus, to be vouchsafed. Many participles of the perfect tense from Deponent verbs have both an active and passive sense ; as, Abominatus, conatus, confessus, adortus, am- plexus, bland'dus, larg'itus, mentUus, oblltus, iestatus, venerdtus, &c. § 336« There are several Participles, compounded virith in, sig- nifying not, the verbs of which do not admit of such composition ; as, Lisciensl, insperans, indlcens for non dicens, inop'inans and npcopinans, immerens ; lUccKus, impransiis, inconsvl/us, incusloditus, immeldtus, impunttus, impardtas, in- comitdtus, incomptus, indemnutmt, indotdtiis, incorruptus interritus, and imperterrl- tus, intesfdtus, inausus, innpindtus, inultus, incens is for non census, not registered; infectus for non /actus ; invlsus for non visus ; indictus, for non dictus, &c. There is a different irwensus from incendo ; infectus from injicio ; inv'isus from invideo ; indictus from indlco, &c. § 237« If from the signification of a Participle we take away time, it becomes an adjective, and admits the degrees of compari- son; as, Amans, loving, amantior, amantiss^mns ; doctus, learned, doctior, doctissimris ; or a substantive ; as, Prcpfectus, a commander or governor ; consonans, f. sc. litera, a consonant ; conimens, i'. sc. terra, a continent ; confluens, m. a place where two rivers r»m together ; oriens, m. sc* sol, the east ; occtdens, m. the west ; dictum, a saying ; scriptum, &c. V '^oS* There are many words in atus, itus, and utus, which, although resembling participles, are reckoned adjectives, because they come from nouns, and not from verbs ; as, aldlus, barbdtus, corddtus, cauddtus, cristdtus, auritus, pelLltuSj territus ; astutus, cornutus, nasulus, ^c. vdnged, bearded, discreet, &c. But aurd- tus, CBrdtus, argenfdtus,ferrdtus, plumbdtus, gypsdtus, calcedtus, clypedtus, galedtus, tunicdtus, larvdtus, pallid'us, lymphdtns, purpurdtus, prcetextdtus, &c., covered with gold, brass, silver, &c., are accounted participles, because they are supposed to come from obsolete verbs. So perhaps calamistrdtus, frizzled, crisped, or curled ; crimtus, having long hair ; per'itus, skilled, &c. § 230o There is a kind of Verbal Adjective ending in bundus, formed chiefly from verbs of the first conjugation, which, in its general signification, very much resembles that of the Present Participle, but with the meaning very much strengthened, denoting an abundance or great deal of the action : as, vitahundus, the same with valde vitans, 'avoiding much'. Sal. Jug. 60, and 101. Liv. xxv. 13. So, hcBsita- bundus, * full of hesitation' ; mirabundus, * full of wonder' ; lacrima- bundus, * weeping profusely'. Few are formed from the third conjuga- \Aon,fremebundus, gemebundus, furibundus, moribundus, ludibundus ; one from a verb of the second, pudibundus ; and one from a verb of the fourth, lascivibundus. II. Some Verbal Adjectives in cundus have a similar sense ; as, verecundus, * full of modesty' ; rubicundus, * very ruddy' ; iracundus, * full of anger'. 180 ADVERBS. GERUNDS AND SUPINES. § 340« GERUNDS are participial words, which bear the signification of the verb from which they are formed; and are decUned Uke a neuter noun of the second declension, through all the cases of the singular number, except the vocative. There are, bolh in Latin and English, substantives derived from the verb, which so much resemble the Gerund in their signification, that frequently they may be substituted in its place. They are generally used, however, in a more undetermined sense than the Gerimd, and in EngHsh have the article always prefixed to them. Thus, with the Gerund, Detector Tegendo Ciceronem, I am delighted with reading Cicero. But with the substantive, DeUctor lectione Ciceronis, I am delighted with the reading of Cicero. The Gerund and Future Participle of Verbs in -io, and some others, often take u instead of e ; as, faciundum, -di, -do, -dus ; experiundum, potiundum, gerundum, petundum, diicundum, &c. for faciendum, &c. § 241. SUPINES have much the same significa- tion with Gerunds ; and may be indiflferently ap- plied to any person or number. They agree in termination with nouns of the fourth declension, having only the accusative and ablative cases. The former Supine is commonly used in an active, and the latter in a passive sense, but some- times the contrary; as, coctum non vapuldtum^ dudum conductus fui^ i. e, ut vapuldrem^ or verbe- rarer ^ to be beaten. Plaut. ADVERB. % 242« An Adverb is an indeclinable part of speech, added to a verb^ adjective, or other adverb, to express some circumstance, quality, or manner of their signification. All adverbs may be divided into two classes, namely, those which denote Circumstance; and those which denote Quality^ Manner^ &c. ADVERBS. 181 I. Adverbs denoting chiefly those of Place^ Time, CIRCUMSTANCE and Order. are § 243« 1. Adverbs o^ Place are five-fold, namely, such as signify, 1. Motion or rest in a place. Ubi? Where? Hie, Here. Illic, ) Isthic, > There. Ibi, ) Intus, Within. Foris, Without. Ubique, Every where. Nusquam, No where. AlTcubi, Some where. Alibi Else where. Ubivis, Any where. Ibidem, In the same place. 2. Motion to a place. Quo? Whither. Hue, Hither. {^^cj: ^'''"-^- Intro, In. Foras, Out. E6, To that place. Alio, To another place. Aliquo, To some place. Eudem, To the same place. 3. Motion towards a place. Quorsum ? Whithertoard ? Versus, Towards. Horsum, Hitherward. Illorsum, Thitherward. Sursum, Upward. Ceorsum, Downtoard. Antrorsum, Forward. Retrorsum, Backward. Dextrorsum, Towards the right Sinistrorsum, Towards the left. 4. Motion from a place. Unde ? Whence ? Hine, Hence. Illinc, ^ Isthine, > Thence. Inde, S Indidera, From the same place. Aliunde, From elsewhere. Alicunde, From soine place. Sieunde, If from any place. Utrinque, On both sides. Superne, From above. Infeme, From below. CoBlitus, From heaven. Funditus, From the ground. 5. Motion through or by a place. Qua ? Which way ? Hae, This way. Is'ScI '^'^'^y- Alia, Another way. § 244« Adverbs of Time are three-fold, namely, such as signify, 1. Some particular past, future, Nune, Hodie, Tunc, ) Turn, J Heri, Diidum, ) Prldem, J Prldie Niidius tertius, Wuper, Jamjam, Mox, Statim, Protinus, lUieo,... Cras, .... Postridie, >uper, .. .. amjam, ^ , ^ox, > 5tatim, ) time^ either present, or indefinite. Now. To-day. Then. Yesterday. Heretofore. The day before. Three days ago. Ijalely. Presently. Immediately. By and by. Instantly. Straightway. To-morrow. The day after. 16 Perendie, Two days hence. Nondum, Not yet. Quando ? When ? Aliquando, ^ Nonnunquam, > • • . Sometimes. Interdum, ) Semper, Ever, always. Nunquara, Never. Interim, In the meantime. Quotidie, Daily. 2. Continuance of time. Diu, Long. Quamdiu, How long ? Tamdiu So long. Jamdiu, ^ Jumdudura, > Long ago. Jamprideln, ) 182 ADVERBS. 3. Vicissitude or repetition of time. Quoties? Jffow often ? SaBpe, Often. Raro, Seldom. Toties, So often. Aliquoties, For several times. Vicissim, ) p,.*.,,^^ Altematim.1 By turns. Rursus, I A „„ - Iterum. J ^^«^«' Siibinde, ) Ever and anon^ Identidem, ) now and then. Semel, Once. Bis, Twice. Ter, Thrice. Quater, Four times, ^c. 3. Adverbs of Order, Inde, . Then. Deinde, After that. Dehinc, Henceforth. Porro, Moreover. Deinceps, So forth. Denuo, Anew. Denique, Finally. Postremo, Lastly. Primo, -um, First. Secundo, -um, Secondly. Tertio, -lim, Thirdly. Quarto, -lim, Fourthly, ^c. II. Adverbs denoting QUALITY, MANNER, &c., are either Absolute or Com- parative. Those called Absolute denob, § 24 5 « 1. QUALITY, simply; as, ben^, well; maU,\\\', fordter, bravely; and innumerable others that come from adjective nouns or participles. 2. CERTAINTY; as, profecto, cert^, sank, planh, ncB, utique, ita, cfiaw, truly, verily, yes ; quidni, why not ? omn'tno, certainly. 3. CONTINGENCE; os, forte, for san,fortassis,fors, haply, perhaps, by chance, peradventure. 4. NEGATION; as, non, haud, not; nequiiquam, not at all; neuhquam, by no means ; minlme, nothing less. 5. PROHIBITION; as, we, not. 6. SWEARING ; as, hercle, pol, edipol, mtcaslor, by Hercules, by Pollux, i&c. 7. EXPLAINING ; as, utpote, v'ideticet, scilicet, nlmirum, nempe, to wit, namely. 8. SEPARATION ; as, seorswm, apart ; separdtim, seTparalely; s1gil,-atim, one hy one ; viritim, man by man ; opptddtim, town by town, &c. 9. JOINING TOGETHER; as, slmul, una, parlter, together; generaUter, gene- rally ; untversatiter, universally ; plerumque, for the most part. 10. INDICATION or POINTING OUT; as, en, ecce, lo, behold. 11. INTERROGATION ; as, cur, midre, qOamohrem, why, wherefore ? num, an, whether ? qubmodo, qui, how ? To which add, Ubi, quo, quorsum^ unde, qud, quando, guamdiu, quoties. Those Adverbs which are called Comparative denote, § 34o» 1- EXCESS ; as, vcdde, maaflme, mngnop^re, mapdmopere, summbpere, admodum, opp'ido, perquam, longk, greatly, very much, exceedingly ; nimis, nimium, " too much ; prorsus, penttus, omnino, altogether, wholly ; magis, more ; melius, better ; pejus, worse, fortius, more bravely; and opHmh, best; pess^m^, worst; fortissimo, most bravely; and innumerable others of the comparative and superlative degrees. 2. DEFECT ; as, Fermh, fere, propemvdum, penk, almost ; parum, httle ; pauld, paululum, very little. 3. PREFERENCE ; as, potiits, satiiis, rather ; potisstmitm, prcBC'ipue, prcBsertimy chiefly, especially ; imd, yes, nay, nay rather. ADVERBS. 1^3 4. LIKENESS or EQUALITY,- as, Vto, sic, aded, so; ut, ut{,sicut, sicuH, velut, velufi, ceu, ianqxiam, quasi, as, as if; quemadmudum, even as ; satis, enough ; Umem^ in like manner ; juxla, alike, equally. 5. UNLIKENESS or INEQUALITY; as, aUter, secus, otherwise; alidqui or cdidquin, else ; nedum, much more, or much less. 6. ABATEMENT; as, sensim, paulatim, pedetentim, by degrees, piecemeal; vix^ scarcely; cBgr^, hardly, with difficulty. 7. EXCLUSION ; as, tantum, solum, modb, tantummodo, duntaxat, dtmum^ only. DERIVATION, COMPARISON, AND COMPOSITION OF ADVERBS. §247* Adverbs are derived, 1. from Substantives, and end commonly in tim or tus ; as, Pariim, partly, by parts ; nomindtim, by name ; generdtim, by kinds, generally ; specidti/n : vicdtim, grigdtim ; rad'icitus, from the root, &c. 2. From adjectives : and these are by far the most numerous. Such as come from Adjectives of the first and second declension usually end in e,- a,s,liberd, freely; plene, fully; some in o, urn, and ter, as, /also, tanfum, gravrter ; a few in a, itus, and im ; as, recta, antiqmtus, privdtim. Some are used two or three ways ; as, primum, or -o, pi/r^., -'iter , certe, -o ; caute, -tim ; humane, -iter, -itus ; publice, puUi- ditus, &c. Adverbs from Adjectives of the third declension commonly end m _rope calendas Sextilis, 'about the calends of August' It is often used adverbially; as, sapientia prcsditus prope tingiddri, ' endowed with almost singular wisdom.' PROPTER is derived from prope, and has the same general signification of con- tiguity. Its primary meaning is ' near,' or ' by the side of ;' as. In pratulo prop- ter Plalonis slatuam consedimus, Cic ' we sat down in a little meadow by the statue of Plato.' Also, 'ON ACCOUNT OF,' 'FOR THE SAKE OF;' US, Nam propter fngora, frumenta in agris natura non erant, ' for in consequence of the cold, the fruits of the earth were not ripe.' Propter misericordiam, ' out of pity.' SECUNDUM. This preposition is the neuter gender of the o^idinal adjective 9ecundus, ' second,' (which follows the first,) which itself comes from sequor, 'to follow.' Its general signification implies the notion of ' following after' something which has gone before. Here it is translated, ' next to,' ' after ;' as, Secundum te nihil est mihi amicius solitudine, Cic. ' next to your company nothing is more agree- able to me than solitude.' As he who follows after another goes in the same direction, secundum signifies ' after,' or ' according to ;' as, omnia quce secundum naturam fiunt, sunt habenda in bonis, Cic. ' all things which happen according to nature are to be esteemed good.' Hence it signifies ' in favour of;' as, Nuntiat populo pontifices secundum se decrevisse, Cic. ' he tells the people that the pon- tifices had decreed in his favour.* SEC US, as a preposition, is obsolete, being superseded by secundum, with the same sense. As an adverb it frequently occurs, but in a sense almost diametrically opposite, signifymg diversity or opposition ; as, nemo dicet secus, ' no one will say otherwise.' SUPRA is in reality the ablative feminine of superus, (see Citra,) and implies elevation, and may be translated, ' above,' ' higher than ;' as, supra lunam, * above the moon ;' supra modum, ' beyond measure ;' Tres prohibet supra rixarum PREPOSITIONS. 189 meluens tangere Gratia, ' the Graces, guarding against quarrels, forbid us to drink more than three.' Cum hostes supra caput sint, ' since the enemy are nigh at hand.' But the phrase supra caput is used to signify ' exceedingly ;' as, supra caput homo levis ac sordidus, ' a fellow exceedingly contemptible and sordid.' It is also used adverbially ; as, omrda hcec qucB supra et subter unum esse, ' that all these things which are above and below^, are one system.' TRANS, ' OVER,' * ON THE other side,' ' BEYOND,' is opposed to cis, and is lim- ited to place. Trans mare, * across the sea ;' trans Euphratum, ' on the other side of the Euphrates.' ULTRA, ' BEYOND,' is referred to both place, time, and degree ; as, ultra termi- num vagdri, * to wander beyond the bounds ;' ultra tempus, ' beyond the time ;' ultra vires senectcB, ' beyond the strength of old age ;' ultra mortem, ' beyond what was sufficient to occasion death.' USQUE is more properly an adverb, and governs the accusative by the force of ad understood. Its signification is, ' as far as.' Usqjie Miletum, ' as far as Miletus.' As an adverb it is frequently used. Usque amho defessi sumus, * we were both ex- ceedingly wearied.' Clesipho usque occidit, * Ctesipho has all but killed me.' VERSUS, < TOWARDS.' This preposition, like Usque, seems to govern the accu- sative by the force of ad, which, though sometimes omitted, is generally expressed. Brundusium versus, ' towards Brundusium.' PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ABLATIVE. § 250« There are fifteen Prepositions which go- vern the Ablative. A, AB, ABS. This preposition is derived from the Greek airo, 'from,' and in its primary notion signifies beginning. ' From,' as, ab ovo usque ad mala, * from the egg to the apple,' that is, ' from beginning to end.' * by reason of.' Vir ab innocentia clenientissimus, ' a man very mild by reason of his probity.' Also, ' on the side OF,' ' TO TAKE ANY one's PART ;' as, a mendacio contra verum stare, ' to stand for a lie in opposition to truth.' A principio, * from the very first.' A pedibus, 'a foot- man ;' a rationibus, 'an accountant' Afrigore, ' against the cold. Hujus a morte, * after his death.' ABSQUE, ' WITHOUT.' Propositio nihil valet absque approbatione, ' the proposi- tion avails nothing without proof Nam absque eo esset, ' for had it not been for him,' &c. CLAM* conveys the idea of privacy, or secrecy, and may be translated 'UN-v KNOWN TO,' ' WITHOUT THE KNOWLEDGE OF.' Clam viro, ' unknown to her hus- band.' It is also used adverbially ; as, plura clam de medio removebat, * he removed many more out of the way privately.' *Clam is sometimes found with 'an Accusative; as. Clam patrem, Terent. Also, with a Dative ; as, mihi clam, Plant.,- and even with a Genitive, as, clam patris, Plaut. 190 PREPOSITIONS. CORAM marks the actual presence of a person before whom an action is done, and therefore signifies ' before,' ' in the presence of ;' as, coram regc, ' in the presence of the king.' It is also used adverbially ; as, cum coram sumus, * when we are together.' CUM, * WITH,' expresses the society, presence, or accompaniment of some thing or person with another. Vagamur egentes cum covjugWus el libcris, * we wander in poverty with our wives and children ;' helium gerere cum Jvgurtha, ♦ to carry on war with Jugurtha :' exit cum nuntio, ♦ he departed as soon as he saw the messen- ger;' cum primA luce, 'at break of day.' This preposition is always added to the ablatives of the primitive pronouns, ego, tu, and sui , as, mecum, ' with me ;' nobis- cum^ ' with us ;' vobiscum, ' with you.' DE. The primary signification of this preposition is, derivation from something anterior, descent, effect, consequence, or dependence ; and hence it may be translated * FROM,' ' OUT OF,' ' OF,' * ON.' Epicuri de grege porcus, ' a hog of the herd of Epi- curus.' Also, * touching,' ' concerning ;' as, de periculis reipublicce, ' concerning the dangers of the republic' De sententia mea, ' according to my opinion.' Somnus de prandio, 'sleep after dinner.' De loco superidre, 'from the higher ground.' De integro, ' afresh ;' de industria, ' on purpose ;' de transversa, ' across ;' de meo, * at my cost ;' de die, ' by day ;' de improv'iso, ♦ unexpectedly.* E, EX. This preposition implies motion out of, departure from the interior of any place, and hence is translated ' from.' It differs from a or ab, in showing that the person or thing excluded had a more intimate connexion with that from which it was excluded. Dejectus est e domo, ' he was driven out of the house,' implies that the person had been xmthin it ; but dejectus est ab domo, ' he was driven from the house,' shows merely that the person was around or near it. Ex Ethiopia est usque hcBC. Terent ' this woman comes as far as from Ethiopia.' Ex quo in provin- ciam venerunt, ' from the time that they came into the province.' Ex mea seiitenlia, * according to my opinion ;' magna ex parte, ' for the most part ;' poculum ex auro, * a cup made out of gold ;' ex equo, ' on horseback ;' ex ordine, * in order ;' ex animo, * from the heart ;' ex industria, ' on purpose ;' ex tempore, ' without taking thought beforehand,' ' suddenly ;' ex loto, ♦ on the whole.' PALAM is opposed to clam, and expresses something done openly. It is trans- lated ' before,' ' IN the presence OF.' Polam populo, ' before the people ;' palam omnibus, 'in the presence of all.' PR^, ' before,' signifies precedence in point of situation, and hence precedence, in comparison of, or superiority. Prcs oculis, ♦ before the eyes.' Hence the phrase prcs se ferre or gerere, ' to carry before,' or ' in front of a man,' means ' to profess,' * to avow,' ' to have the appearance of Proe nobis beatus est, * he is happy in com- parison of us.' Also, • through,' ' that is,' ' by reason of;' as, nee loqui prcB. moerore potuit, * neither could he speak through grief Prae multitudine, ' by reason of the multitude.* PRO, ' FOR,' implies, primarily, interchange or substitution ; as, te, pro istis dictis et falsis, vlsiscar, Terent. ' for these reports and falsehoods I will pay you hand- somely.' Cato mihi est pro centum millibus, ' Cato is to me instead of that is, ' Cato is worth to me a hundred thousand.' Pro tempore, ' according to the time.' Also PREPOSITIONS. 191 * BEFORE,' 'IN FRONT OF;' OS, sedens pro cede Castoris, 'sitting before the temple of Castor.' SINE is in reality nothing but the imperative of the verb sino, * to let alone,' and signifies privation, or being without a thing. Sine pondere, * without weight.' TENUS, ' UP TO,' ' AS FAR AS.' CapTilo terms, Cic. ' up to the hilt' Antiuchiis Tauro tenus regndre jussus, ' Antiochus was ordered to reign as far as mount Taurus.' Tenus is sometimes used with a genitive case, but the noun is then al- ways in the plural number ; as, crurum tenus, ' down to the legs ;' labiorum ienuSj * as far as the lips.' § 251» Four prepositions, In, Sub, Super, and SuBTER, govern the Accusative and Ablative. IN with an Accusative, * to,' or ' unto,' or * into ;' as. Ex Asia in Europam exercttum trajicere, * from Asia he marched his army into Europe.' Also * towards ;* BS, indulgentia in liber os, 'indulgence towards children.' Injlammare populum in improbos, * to inflame the people against the wicked.' In lucem, * until day.' In rem tuam est, 'it is for your advantage.' Potestes injilium, ' authority over a son.' In dies, * every day.' Vivere in diem, ' to live from hand to mouth.' IN with an Ablative, * in.' Esse in manu, ' to be in one's power.' * Towards/ as, mitis in hoste, ♦ merciful towards an enemy.' Hence it is even put for * con- cerning,' ' about,' or as we sometimes say, ' at ;' In quo igitur homines exhorrescunt, * at whom then do men tremble V Also, ' among,' as, esse in clarissimus civibus, * to be ranked among the most illustrious citizens.' * Within,' as, talenta ducenta in sex mensibus promissa, * two hundred talents were promised within six months.' In primis, or imprimis, * especially,' ' particularly.* SUB implies inferiority and contiguity. When applied to time it generally go- verns an accusative ; when applied to space it generally governs an ablative ; but this rule is not invariable. With an Accusative. * Under ;' as, sub ipsos muros, * under the very walls.' * On,' * about f as, Pompeius sub noctem naves solmt, * Pom- pey set sail about night ;' sub cantum galli, ' at cock-crowing.' From the notion of proximity and inferiority which this word conveys, it sometimes signifies ♦ next after,' or * immediately following;' as. Sub eas literas statim recitat' Super ripas, ' upon the banks.' * Beyond /* as, famosissima super cmteras fuit ccena, ' the supper was famous beyond all the rest' ' Besides j* as, Puntcum exercitum super morbum etiam fames affecit, ' famine also, besides the disease, affected the Carthaginian army.* With an Ablative. Fronde super viridi, * upon the green leaf.' Consultant hello super, ' they take counsel about the War.' It is often used adverbially ; as, satis superque dictum est, ' enough, and more than enough has been said.' Obs. There are five or six syllables, namely, am, di or dis, re, se, con, which are commonly called Inseparable Prepositions, because they are only to be ibund in compound words. § 252. PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. A, AB, ABS, signify privation, or separation, and may generally be rendered by the English Off, as, duco, • to lead ;' abduco, * to lead off,' * to lead away ;' moveo, * to move ;' amoveo, * to move off,' ' to remove ;' scindo, * to cut ;' abscindo, * to cut off' A is likewise added to nouns as a privative ; as, mens, ' the mind ,•' amens, * without mind,* • senseless,' ' mad.' Ab is sometimes changed into au before words beginning with /, for the sake of euphony ; as, fero, ' to bear ;' aufero, * to bear offj' * to take away ,-' (in which verb the preposition ah resumes its place in those tenses which have not /, as, ahstuli, ablatum ;) fugio, * to fly ;' aufugio, ' to fly off,' * to fly away.' Abs is used in composition before t ; as, teneo, * to hold ;' abstineo, * to hold off from,' • to abstain.* AD retains its primary signification of approach, or that of accession or augmenfa- lion, and may generally be translated * to.' In the writers of the Augustan age it generally takes the consonant of the word with which it is compounded ; as, curro, * to run ;* adcurro or accurro, ' to run to ;* Jigo, * to fix ;' adfigo or affi.go, ' to fix in addition,' or * affix ;' loquor, * to speak ;' adloquor or alloquor, ' to speak to,' * to ad- dress ;' nuo, * to nod ;' annuo, * to nod to,' * to assent ;' rogo, * to ask ;' arrogo, ' to ask for one's self,' ' to claim ;' sumo, ' to take ;' assumo, ' to take to one's self/ * to assume ;' do, ♦ to give ;' addo, * to give in addition,' ' to add.' It also increases the signification of the primitive ; as, amo, ♦ to love ;' addmo, * to love much,' * to be enamoured of;' bibo, * to drink ;' adbibo, ' to drink hard.* AM is an inseparable preposition, being never found alone. It is from the Greek an« Obs. 8. IDEM sometimes has the dative, chiefly in the poets; as, Irwltum qui servat, idem fajcil occidenti. Hor. Jupiter omnibus idem. Virg. Eadem iliis censemus. Cic. But in prose we commonly find, idem, qui, et, ac, atque, and also ut, cum ; as, Peripatetzci, quondam i^dem erant qui Academici. Cic. Est ani- mus erga te, idem ac JuiU Ter. Dianam et Lunam eandem esse putant. Cic. Idem faciunt, ut, &c. In eddem loco mecum. Cic. But it would be improper to say of the same person or thing under different names, idem cum ; as, Luna eadem est cum Diana. We likewise «ay, alius ac, atque, or et ; and sometimes simtlis and par. S, Adjectives governing the Ablative, § 106« XIII. These adjectives, dignus^ indignus^ contentus, prceditusj captus^ and fretus ; ateo natus^ satusj ortus^ edltusj and the like, govern the abla- tive; as, Dignus honore. Worthy of honour. Contentus parvo, Content with little. Prceditus virtOte. Endued with virtue. Captus oculis. Blind. Fretus virlbus. Trusting to his strength. Ortus regibu^. Descended of kings. So generdtus, credtus, progndtiis, oriundus, procredtus reglbus, V lOi • Obs. 1. The ablative after these adjectives is governed bjr some preposition understood ; as, Contentus parvo, scil. cum ; Fretus virtbus, scil. in, &c. Sometimes the proposition is expressed ; as, OrttLS ex concub'ina, Sallust. Editus de nympha. Ovid, and extorris. V 108« Obs. 2. Dignus, indrgnus, contentus, ond extorris have sometimes the Genitive after them ; as, carmlna d.igna decB, Ovid. Indignus avorum, Virg. Augusti clavi contentus, Paterc. Extorris regni, Stat 220 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. y X01l« Made, the vocative of the adjective mactus, (that is, magis auctus, *more increased,') and, by an Atticism, put for the nominative, also governs an Ab- lative. It was anciently used in the nominative : afterwards the vocative came into general use from its denoting a wish for a person's success, and having the force of a prayer that he might be encouraged to proceed in his virtuous course. ThviS, juher em made virtule esse, Liv. 'I should wish thee success in thy valour.' It is also followed by a Genitive ; as, made esto virtutis, 'increase in merit,' 'go on and prosper.' When used in the plural it admits only the ablative ; as, Macti vir- tute miiiles Romani este, Liv. It is also used without a case ; as, made I Cic. ' O ex- cellent!' 4. Adjectives governing the Genitive or Ablative. § 110« XIV. Adjectives of plenty or want go- vern the genitive or ablative ; as, Plenus ircB or ira, Full of anger, Inops ratidnis or ratione, Void of reason. So Non iriopes tempvris, sedprodigi sumus. Sen. Lentulus non verbis inops. Cic. Dei plena sunt onmia. Cic. Maxima qucBque domus servis est plena superhis. Juv. Res est solicUi plena timoris amor. Ovid. Amor et melle d felle est fwcundissimuSf Plaut. Fcecunda virorum pauperfas fugitur. Lucan. Omnium consiliorum ejus pardceps. Curt. Homo ratione particeps. Cic. NihU^ insidiis vacuum. Id. Vacuas ccedis habete manus, Ovid. § 1 Xl» Some of these adjectives are construed, 1. with the genitive only; as, Benignus, exsors, impos, impotens, irritus, liberalis, munif^cus, prcelargus § 1 1 3» With the ablative only ; Bedtus, differtus, frugt/er, mudlus, ientus, distentus, tum'idus, turgldus. § 113« With the genitive more frequently; Compos, consors, e^enus, ex- hceres, expers, ferttlis, indlgus, parous, pauper, prodigus, sterHis, prosper, msatiatus, insatiabilis. § 1 14» With the ablative more frequently; Abundans, cassus, extorris, f(3- tus, frequens, gravis, gravidus, jejumis, liber, locuples, nudus, oneratus, onustus, orbus, pollens, solutus, truncus, viduus, and captus. § XXo« With both promiscuously; Copidsus, dives, foecundus ferax, immu- nis, indnis, inops, largus, modicus, immodicus, nimius, opulentus, plenus, potenSy refertus, satur, vacuus, uber. § X 1 0» W^ith a preposition ; as, Copidsus, jirmus, pardtus, impardtus, inops, instructus, a re aliqua ; for quod ad rem aCiquam atttnet, in or with respect to any thing. Extorris ab solo patrio, banished; Orba ab optimatibus concio. Liv. So pauper, tenuis, foecundus, modicus, parous, in re aliqua. Immunis, indnis, liber, nuduSf sdvius, vacuus, a re aliqua. Fotens ad rem, and in re. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 221 III. THE GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. { 1. VERBS GOVERNING ONLY ONE CASE. 1. Verbs which govern the Genitive, § 117« XV. Sum^ when it signifies possession, property, or duty, governs the genitive ;^ as, Est regis punire reheUes, ' It belongs to the king to punish rebels.* MUilum est *uo duci par ere, * It is the duty of soldiers to obey their general.' § 118» To this rule may be referred the following and similar expre^ions. Suadere principi quod oporteat, multi laboris (est) Tac. Grates persolvere dignasy Non (ypis est nosirce. Virg. Est hoc GoIMccb consuetudinis. Cass. Moris antiquifuit. Plin. Est moris, * it is usual or customary.' Sometimes the preceding word is to be repeated ; as, hcBC mvlier est (mulier) egregics formcB. Nep. Hocpecus est (pecus) Meliboei. Virg. § H 9« Esse is also followed by a genitive when it means * to be service- able for,' * to be conducive to,' instead of the dative, which is more usual ; and this genitive is generally accompanied by the passive participle in dus ; as, qucB (Bquandoi libertatis essenL, Liv. ' what might serve to equalize their freedom.' Quod initio conservandi^:t *^»«» «.;;-««, S He has his hands full at home, or has Satagit rerum suarum, J ^^^^^^ ^^ ^^ ^^^^ j^.^ ^^ ^^.^ V 13«>« Obs. 1. Several other verbs among the poets govern the genitive by a Greek construction, particularly such as signify some affection of the mind ; as, Ango, decipior, desipto, discrucior^ excrucio, fallo and fallor, fastidio, invideo, laAor, miror, pendeo, studeo, vereor ; as, Ne angas te animi, Plant. Labdrum decipiturf Hot. Discrucior anfmi. Ter. Pendet mihi animus, pendeo animi vel ammo ; but we always say, Pendemus an^mis, not animdrum, are in suspense. Cic. JustiticB prius mirer. Virg. In like maimer, Abstineo, desino, desisto, quiesco, regno : like- wise, adipiscor, condico, credo, frustror, furo, laudo, Libcro, levo, participo, prohibeo ; as, Abstineto irdrum ; Deslne quereldrum ; Regndvit populorum. Hor. Desistere pugncB. Virg. Quarum rerum condixit. Liv. V 1 2o» But all these verbs aite for the most part differently construed ; thus, Angor, desipio, discrucior, fallor, arCtmo. Hoc antmum meum excruciat. Fastidio, miror, vereor, aliquem, or aUquid. Laslor aliqua re. Some of them are joined with the infinitive ; or, with qudd, ut, ne, and the subjunctive. V 1 -^ 7» In like manner we usually say, Desino aliquid, and ab aliquo, to give over; Desisto incepto, de negotio, ab ilia mente ; Quiesco a labore; Regndre in equittbus, oppidis, sc. iru Cic. Per urbes. Virg. Adipisd id; Frustrdri in re^ Furtre de atiquo. Cic. V 1 /WO* Obs. 2. The genitive afler verbs, in the same manner as after ad- jectives, is governed by some substantive underwood. This substantive is different according to the different meaning of the verbs ; thus, Misereor fratris, scil. caus& ; Angor animi, scil. dolore or anxietdie. 2. Verbs governing the Dative, § 129* XVII. Any verb may govern the dative in Latin, which has the signs TO or FOR after it in Enghsh f as, Finis venit imperio. An end has come to the empire. Liv. Animus redit hostibus, Courage returns to the enemy. Id. Tibi seris, tibi metis, You sow for yourself, you reap for yourself Plaut. Non omnibus dormio, I do not sleep for all, that is, to please all. * This rule might be better expressed thus : " The Dative follows many verbs in answer to the question, to or for whom, or what ? whereunto ? for whose enjoyment, advantage, injury ? &c., to please whom ? for whom ? &c." See § 90 and § 91. GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. 223 So, Non nobis solum nati sumus. Cic. Multa male eveniunt bonis. Id. Sol lucet etiam scelerdtis. Sen. Hcsret lateri lethdlis arundo. Virg. But as the dative after verbs in Latin is not always rendered in English bv to or for ; nor are these particles always the sign of the dative in Latin, it will be ne- cessary to be more particular. § X 30* 1. Sum and its compounds govern the dative (except pos^ sum); as, Prcsfuit exercitui. He commanded the army. Adfuit precibusj He was present at prayers. § 131« EST taken for Habeo, *to have,' requires the Dative of the possessor and a nominative of the thing possessed ; as, Est mihi liier, A book is to me, tJiat is, I have a book. Sunt mihi libri, Books are to me, i. e. I have books. Dico lihros esse mihi^ I say that I have books. This is more frequently used than haheo lihrum ; Tiabeo lihros. In like manner deest instead of careo ; as, Liber deest mihi, I want a book ; lAbri desunt mihi ; Scio lihros deesse mihi, &c. § X32» To this rule may be added suppetit, suppeditat, used in a neuter sense, and foret, and the verbs of a contrary signification, deest, deforet, and dejii, used for careo, or non haheo ; as. Pauper enim non est cui rerum suppetit usxis, Hor. So, Defuit ars vohis, Ovid. Lac mihi non dejit, Virg. Hinc honce artes desunt. Sail. § 133» The dative is often understood; as, Sit spes fallendi, miscehis sacra profanis, Hor. that is, sit spes tibi. § 1 34« II. Verbs compounded with satis, bene, and male, govern the dative ; as, Satisfacio, satisdo, benefacio, benedlco, benevolo, male/ado, maledlco, tibi, &c. § X35» III. Many verbs compounded with these eleven preposi- tions ; AD, ANTE, CON, IN, INTER, OB, POST, VB.M, PRO, SUB, and SUPER, are followed by the dative ; as, 1. Accedo, accresco, accumbo, acquiesco, adequVo, adhcsreo, adjaceo, adno, adnato, adsto, adstipulor, adsum, adversor, affulgeo, alldbor, annuo, appareo, applaudo, ap- propinquo, arrideo, aspiro, assentior, assideo, assisto, assucsco, assurgo ; — addo, affero, '^.f^'go, adjicio, adjungo, adhibeo, admoveo, adverto, alltgo, appdno, applico, advolvo, aspergo. 2. Antecedo, antecelio, anteeo, antesto, anievenio, anteverto ; — antefero, antehabeo, antcpono. 3. CohcBreo, colludo, concino, congruo, consentio, consono, conv'ivo, and, chiefly in the poets, coeo, concumbo, concurro, contendo; — compdro, compono, confero, con- jungo. 4. Tnt^do, incumbo, indormio, inhio, tngemisco, inJuBreo, innascor, inmtor, insideo, insidior, insto, insisto, insudo, insulto, invade, invigilo, illacrymo, illudo, immineo, immorior, immoror, impendeo, insum ; — immisceo, vmpdno, imprimo, inflro, ingero, injicio, include, insero, inspergo, inuro. 5. Intercedo, intercido, interjaceo, ijitenvClco, intersum, intervenio ; — interdico, inter- pono. 224 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 6. ObamhTdo, oberro, oheqxilto, obluctor, ohmurmTiro, ohrepo, obsto, obsisto, ohstrepo, obsum, obtrecto, obvenio, obversor, occumbo, occur ro, occur so, officio ; — obduco, objicio, offero, offundo, oppono. 7. Postf^ro, posthabeo, postpbno, postputo, postscr'tbo. 8. Prcscedo, prcecurro, prcpeo, prcesideo, prceluceo, prcBniteo, prcBsum, prcBvaleo, preBvertor ; — prcpfero, prceficio, prcBpono, prcetendo. 9. Procedo, procumbo, prqficio, propvgno, prosum, prospicio, provideo. 10. Succedo, succumbo, succurro, sufficio, suffragor, subcresco, suboleo, subjaced, 9ubrcpo, subsum, suhvenio ,- — subdo, subjiigo, submiUo, suppono^ substerno. 11. Supercurro, supersto, super sum, supervenio, supervlvo. V 136« Rem. 1. Some verbs, compounded with ab, de,ex, circum, and con- tra, are occasionally followed by the dative ; as, absum, desum, delabor, exctdo, cir- cumdo, circumfundo, circumjaceo, circnmjicio, contradlco, contra'eo ; as, Serta capiti delapsa, The garlands having fallen from his head, Virg. Nunqui nummi, excid^- rujit tibif. Plaut. Tigris urhi circumfundUur. Plin. § 137» IV. Verbs govern the dative, which signify, 1. To profit or hurt ; as, Prqficio, prosum, placeo, commodo, prospicio, caveo, mehio, timeo, consulo for proa- picio. Likewise, Noceo, officio, incommodo, displiceo, iusidior. 2. To favour or assist, and the contrary ; as, Faveo, grattdor, gratificor, gralor, i^nosco, indulgeo, parco, adulor, plaudo, Man- dior, lenocinor, palpor, assentor, supplico, subparas'itor. Likewise, Auxdior, admini- cTdor, suhvenio, succurro, patroc^nor, medeor, medicor, opitidor. Likewise, DerogOf detraho, invideo, cemidor. 3. To command and obey, to serye and resist ; as, ImpP.ro, prcBcipio, mando ; moderor, for modum adhibeo. Likewise, Pareo, aus- culto, obedio, obsequor, obtemp^ro, morigPror, obsecundo. Likewise, Famulor, servio, inservio, ministro, ancillor. Likewise, Repugno, obsto, reluctor, remtor, resisto, re- fragor, adversor. 4. To threaten and to be angry ; as. Minor, commtnor, intcrminor, irascor, succenseo. 5. To trust ; as, Fido, confido, credo, diffido, 6. To these add Cedo, despero, excello, hcBreo, nubo, operor, pr(Estolor,prcBvaricor, suppUco ; recipio, to promise ; renuncio ; respondeo, to answer or satisfy ; tempera, studeo; vaco, to apply; couvicior, pepigf, suadeo, pateo. § 138« Exc. Jubeo^ juvo, leedo, offendo, delecto, guherno, are often, as active verbs, followed by an accusative. Juheo is followed by an accusative with an infinitive, and by the dative with an infini- tive, but rarely with an accusative alone : as, Juheo te bene sperare, Cic. Vbi BRiTTANico jussit ExsuRGiERE, Tac. Lex jubet ea qucBfa- cienda sunt, Cic. § 1 30» Obs. 1. Verbs governing the dative only, are either neu- ter verbs, or of a neuter signification. Active verbs governing the da- tive have also an accusative expressed or understood. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 225 § 140« Obs. 2. Most verbs governing the dative only have been enume- rated, because there are a great manv verbs compounded with prepositions, which do not govern the dative, but are otherwise construed ; and still more signifying advantage or disadvantage, &c. which govern the accusative ; as, Levo, erzgo, alo, nutrio, amo, ditigo, vexo, crucio, aversoTy &c. aliquem, not alicui. § 141« Obs. 3. Very many verbs which govern the dative are variously construed, still preserving the same, or nearly the same significations ; as, Abdicare : abdicare magistratum, ' to abdicate the magistracy ;' ahdicare se con- 8ULATU, Liv. * to depose one's self from the consulsliip.' Acquiescere, rei, or re, or in re, * to approve of any thing,' * to be satisfied with any thing.' Adsuescere, * to be accustomed,' * to accustom one's self to any thing ;' alicui, Liv. 1. 19- — AD ALiauiD, Caes. — aliqua re, Liv. 31, 35. Adjacere, ' to lie next to,* ' to adjoin.' Tuscus ager, Romano adjacet, Liv. 2. 49. adjacet mare, Nep. Timoth. Adspirare, * to favour.* Adspirat primo fortuna labori, Virg. 2. 385. ♦ fortune favours the first exertion;' ad eum. Gels. Adhaerere, * to adhere to any thing ;' alicui, or aliquem, or ad aliquem. Adflare, * to breathe upon ;* rei or rem. Adferre vim alicui, * to do violence to any one.* Adsideo, 'to sit by something,' with a Dative, Cic. Plane. 11. with an Accusative, Vh-g. ^n. 11. 304. Advolare, * to fly up to,' ei, or ad eum. Adscribere, * to admit,* * to enrol as a citizen ;* civitati, or in civitatem, Cic. Arch. 4. or in civitate. Ibid. Advolvi genibus, or genua, or ad genua, • to fall at one's knees.' Adversari, * To be against,' * to oppose,' is always followed by a Dative. With an Accusative it occurs in 'Tacitus, but the best editors substitute aversari in all such instance?. Adspergere alicui aliquid, ♦ to sprinkle any thing on one.' Adnare na^bus, or naves, or ad naves, ' to swim to the ships.* Adulor, * to flatter,' * to caress.' Aduldri plebi, Liv. 3. GQ.—adularl omnes, Cic. adulari Neronem, Tac. Ann. AUatrare alicui, or aliquem, *to bark at any one.' The Accusative is more usual. Antecedere, ' to excel ;' anteced^re belluis, Cic. Off aniecedere eum, Nep. Ale 9. Antecellere alicui, or aliqu£m, * to excel any one.' Antepollere, ' to excel,' alicui, or aliquem. Anteire, * to go before,' to excel.' Virtus omnibus rebus anteit, Plaut. Anteire cet^ros, Cic. Antestare or antistare, * to stand before,' * to be more eminent,' ' to excel,' alicui or aliquem. Antevenire, «to come before;' antevenire exerdtum, Sail. *to excel;' omntbus REBUS antevemre, Plaut 226 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. Antevertere, * to come before ;' miror, ubi, huic anteverterim, Terent. * I wonder how I have come before him.' Veneno damnationem antevertit, *he anticipated his condemnation by poison.' Apparere consuli, ' to attend ;' ad solium Jmis. Res apparel mihi. Appropinquare, BrittanicB, or portam, or ad portam. Circumfundi aJiaii, • to be put around any thing;' circumfusa lateri meo turba, * the multitude which surrounded my side,' for turba fusa circum latus meum. So, circumjecta multitydine hominum totis mcernbus, * when a multitude of men entirely surrounded the walls,' for midtitudine hominum jacta circum tola mosnia. Circumdare aliquid alicui rei, * to put one thing round another;' circumdare aliquid re, ' to surround one thing with another.' Congruere, * to agree,' alicui, or cum re aliqua, or inter sc. Confidere rei or re, * to trust to any tiling,' * to confide in.' Also with de when it means about ; as, de salute urbis confidere, Caes. • to have confidence about the safety of the city.* Curare, 'to take care of,' *to care for,' is commonly followed by an Accusative; as, euro knnc rem. Yet it is also joined to a Dative ; as, Quia tuo cibo euros, PlauL Deficere, * to fail ' commonly with an Accusative ; as, tempus te deficeret, Cic. * time would fail thee ;' sometimes also the Dative ; as, tela nostris deficerent, Caes. B. G. 3. 5. * our weapons failed us.' Desperare, ' to despair of any thing,* * to have no more hope.' SiBi desperans, CaBS. * despairing on his own account.' Also with an Accusative ; as, ut honorem desperasse videatur, Cic. We find also, desperare de aliqua re, Cic. The reason why despero governs an Accusative, seems to be, that Spero also governs one. Dominari, * to rule over ;' cunclis oris, Virg. in Ccstera animalia, Ovid. Excellere aliis, * to excel others,' or inter alios, * among others,' or super alios, 'beyond others.' Fidere alicui rei, or aliqua re, or in aliqua re. Habitare in loco, * to dwell in a place ;' locum, * to inhabit a place.* Ignoscere mihi, or culpcs mece, or miki culpam, ' to pardon me,' or * pardon my feult.' Impendere alicui, * to hang over any one ;' or aliquem, or inaliquem. ImpertTre, ' to impart any thing to any one ;' laudem alicui imperdri. Imperdre aliquem osculo. Incessit timor Ei or eum, * fear seizes him.* Illudere, 'to make sport of Jlludere auctoriiati, Cic. lUudere prcecepta, Ihid. Tn nos illudere, Terent. InsilTre, ' to spring upon,' with a Dative, Ovid ; an Accusative, Hor. ; and also with in and an Accusative, Caes. Insultare, ' to leap upon,' hence 'to insult;' insultare solo, Virg. 'to stamp on the ground.' Insultare aliquem. Sail. Incumbere, ' to fall upon ;' toro ; gladium, or in gladium. Incidere, ' to engrave,' rei, or in rem, or in re. Indulgere alicui, or id ei. Inhiare, * to gape after,' ' to desire much ;' inhiare auro. Inhiare bona ejus, Inniti rei, or re, or in re. Inntti in aliquem^ ' to depend on any one.* GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 227 Latet res mlJii, or me, * the thing is unknown to me.* Mederi ei. Mederi cupiditates. Medicari, 'to heal,' used both with the Dative and Accusative; the same as Mederi above. Moderari, ' to moderate/ * to govern,' ' to rule,' ' to regulate.' Moderari fortun^e sucB, Liv. gaudium, Tacit. Nocere, ' to hurt,' ei, rarely eum. Nubere, literally, * to veil' one's self, as the bride did at the marriage ceremony ; hence ' to marry,' always applied to the woman. Nubere viro. Nupla est cum ilio, seems properly to mean, * she is with him as a married woman. Occumbere morti and morlem, * to die.' We also find, Liv. 1. 7. occumbere morte^ * to sink in death,' where the Ablative is governed by some preposition understood. Obrepere, * t6 creep upon,' ei or eum ; also in animos ; ad honores. Obtrepere auribus, or aures. Obtrectare ei, or laudibus ejus, * to detract from him,' or * his deserts.' Obumbrare, ' to overshadow,' with the Dative or Accusative. Praecedere, * to go before,' * to precede ;' prcecedcre agmen. ♦ To excel ;' ut vestrcB fortuncB meis prcBceduJit. Praecurrere, ' to run before,' ' to excel,' with a Dative or Accusative. Praestare alicui, or aliquem, * to excel any one.' Praestolari, ' to wait for any one ;' alicui or aliquem. It is also found with the Genitive, cohortium, Sisenn. ap. Non. Pacisci, alicui, or cum aliquo. Pacisci vitam ab eo, Sail. Procurabere, * to fall upon,' terrcB ; genibus ejus ; ad genua. Temperare, * to moderate,' * to tame ;' also, ' to govern,' * to guide ;' temperare lingvxE, Liv. * to subdue his tongue.' So, temperare lacrymis, ' to moderate his grief:' also, temperare iras, Virg. ' to moderate anger.' § 142« Obs. 4. Many verbs when followed by (lifFerent cases are used with different significa- tions; as, iEmulari aliquem, *to imitate any one with emulation,' 'to rival.' Studia ALicuJus (smulari, Liv. 1. 18. * to be the scholar of any one.' But csmulctri alicui, ' to envj^ any one,' perhaps ' an envious rivalry,' better expresses the idea. In a word, with the Accusative it seems to be used in a good sense, with the Dative in a bad one. Accedo iiM, * I accede or assent to you ;' but hoc tibi accedit ad illud, ' this comes to you in addition to that.' Accedtre ad ALiauEM, 'to approach to any one.' Auscultare alicui, * to listen to any one ;* also, * to obey any one.' AuscuUare ALiauEM, ' to hear any one ; also, ' to obey.' Cavere alicui, ' to take care of any one's safety;' Cavere sibi ab ALiauo, * to take care of one's self against any one.' Cavere aliquem, ' to beware of any one ;* Cavere aliq,uid, ' to guard against any thing.' Consulere tibi, * to take care for thee,' (not to give counsel ;) Consulere aliquem, * to consult any one,' ' to take any one's advice.' Consulere crudeliter, in aliquem, 228 GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. • to proceed cruelly against any one/ Liv. 3. 36. Consido boni, ' I am satisfied,' or • pleased therewith.' Cupio tibh ' I am devoted to thee ;' Cupio aliciuid, ' I am desirous after some- thing.' Deficit mihi and me, * it fails me ;' Deficere ab aliquo, * to revolt from any one ;' Deficere ab amicitia, ' to fall off from ;' also, Deficere ad aliquem, Liv. 22. 61, * to go over to any one ;' also, deficere aliquem, * to desert any one.' Dare alicui litems, ' to give a letter to any one,' that is, * to carry to another ;* Dare ad aliquem literas, ' to write to any one.' Facere aliquid, * to do any thing ;' quid huic homini facias ? Cic. ' what will you do with this man ? Horreo tibi, ' I am frightened for thee,' on thy account ; Horreo aliquid, * I am frightened at any thing.' Imponere onus alicui, * to lay a burden on any one ;' Imponire alicui, * to im- pose upon any one,' • to cheat.' Incumbere rei, * to lean upon any thing;' ad aliquem, * to bend one's self down to any thing,' * to exert great labour on any thing ; Incumbere ad rempublicam, * to devote one's attention to the state.' Interest murus, * there is a wall between ;* hoc maxime interest inter, &c. * this is the chief difference between,' &c., also with the Dative in this sense. Interest patris, * it is the concern of the father.' Interesse rei, * to be present at a thing.' Manet tibi bellum, * war remains for thee ;' that is, * thou hast not yet peace,' liv. 1. 53- Manet me mors, ' death awaits me.' Merere sibi aliquid, * to merit,' or ♦ earn something for one's self;' Merere equo, « to serve on horse oack;' Merere or Mereri de, • to deserve of another;' bene or male, *weil,' or 'ill.' Metuo tibi, * I fear for thee,' on thy account ; Metuo te, * I fear thee.* Peto mVii, * I seek for myself;' Peto aliquem, ' I aim at somebody ;' Petere ali- guem gladio, * to attack any one with a sword ;' Petere locum, ♦ to seek a place,' * to goto.' PrsBStare alicui or aliquem, ' to excel ;' prcBStare aliquid, * to be answerable for something.' Emptori damnum prcBStari oportere, * the loss must be made good to the buyer.' Also, pr^stare alicui officia, * to render good offices to any one ;' Prces- iare se virumfortcm^ ' to prove one's self a brave man.' Prcestat, ' it is better.' Proepicio alicui, * to provide for any one ;' Prospicere aliquid, * to foresee any thing.* Quaerere sihi aliquid, ' to seek something for himself;' qucerere aliquid, * to in- quire about any thmg ;' also, de aliquo. Sometimes, qucsrere de aliquo homive, or de aliqua re, means, ' to institute an inquiry by torture about any person' or ' thing.' Recipio tibi, * I give you certain assurance,' * I pledge myself to you ;' recipio in montem, ' I retire to the mountain.' Recipio res amissas, ' I recover my lost goods ;' recipere periculum in se, ' to take the risk on himself* Renuntiare rei, ' to renounce any thing,' * to resign,' * to give up ;' renuntidre vitiis, * to renounce one's faults ;' Renuntidre aliquem consulem, * to proclaim any one as a consul.* Respondere alicui, * to answer any one ;* rei, ' to correspond to any thing ;' exitus turn respondet spei, ' the event does not correspond to expectation.' Solve tibi pecuniam, * I pay money to thee ;' sdvo te, ' I free thee j' solvere naves, • to set sail.' Timeo tihi, * I fear for you ;' te, ' I fear thee.' GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. 229 Vacare, properly, 'to be at leisure ;' also, * to be without something ;' vacare a re, or RE, ' to be free from a thing.' But vacare rei, * to turn one's whole attention to a thing,' ' to apply to a thing,' properly, • to be free from all other afSiirs for that one j' vacare Uteris, * to be devoted to letters.' Valere rei, ' to be serviceable.' This construction is rare ; the more usual is with the ablative ; valere eloquentia, ' to be effective by eloquence,' ' to be strong in eloquence.' Valere a pecunia, Plaut. *to be well on the side of money,' is said jestingly. § 143. To this rule are referred many verbs which, among the poets chiefly, are construed with a Dative, after the manner of the Greeks, but which in prose are commonly found with the Ablative and a Preposition, according to Latin construction ; as Verbs of — 1. Contending; as, caniendo, certo, hello, luctor, pugno, alicui for cumaliquo. Sdus tibi certet, Amyntas, Virg. We also find Contendere contra or adversus ali- quern, Cic. Cerlare inter se, Cic. Pugnare contra or adversus, Quinct. inter se, Curt in aliquem, Li v. 2. Differing ; as, distare, dissentire, discrepare, dissidere, dij^erre rei alicui for a re aliqua. We also find distant^ dissentiunt, discrepant, dissident, differunt, inter se. Distare meia, Ovid. Dissentire, dissidere cum atiquo. 3. Coming together ; as, co'eo, concurro, concumho, misceo. Pladdis coeant im- mitia, Hor. Concurrere hosti, Ovid. Concubuisse decs, Propert. Misla Deo mulier, Virg. instead of cum placidis, cum hoste, &c. We also find Coire, concurrere, inter se, Virg. and Liv. miscere vinum aquas, or cum aqua, or aqua. 4. Keeping, or Driving away; as, Arcebis gravido pecori, Virg. Solstitium pecori defendite, Virg. But these belong to verfe of taking away, which govern two cases, by Rule 25, 5. Passive Verbs ; as, Non intelligor ulli, Ovid, for ab ullo. Neque cemitur vRi, Virg. § 14:4« Obs. 5. Verbs signifying Motion or Tendency to a thing, are construed with the preposition ad ; as, Eo, vado, curro, propero, festmo, pergo, fugio, tendo, vergo, incUno, &c. ad locum, rem, or hom^nem. Sometimes, however, in the poets, they are construed with the dative ; as, It clamor ccelo, for ad caelum. Virg. § 145« The Datives Mihi, Tibi, Sibi, Nobis, Vobis, are very often added to verbs in a redundant manner, particularly in confidential speeches, letters, &c. This is the case in Greek, in English, and pro- bably in all languages. E. g. Fur mihi es, Plaut, * to me, (that is, in my opinion) thou art a thief.' An ille mihi liber, cui mulier imperat, * is he to me a freeman,' that is, * can I think him a freeman whom a woman commands.' These pronouns, though generally considered redundant, have usually a certain reference to the circumstances, or at least denote a participation in them by the person referred to in the Dative. 20 230 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 3. Verbs governing the Accusative, k 146. XVIII. A verb signifying actively go- verns the accusative ; as, Ama Deum, I/)ve God. Reverere parentes, Reverence your parents. V 147« Obs. 1. Neuter Verbs also govern the Accusative, when the noun after them has a signification similar to their own, or when the noun is of the same origin as the verb ; as, Viy^re vitam^ Ire iter, or viam ; Pugnare pugnam, Curere cursum ; Ludere ludum, Sequi sectam. Yet generally an adjective, an adjective pronoun, or participle, is added to this substantive; as, pugTiare pugnam acerrlmam. So in t^ngiish we say, •he died the death of a hero;' ♦ 1 have fought the good fight ;' ' Many Hve a happy life.' Many of these expressions are usual with the best writers ; as, Juravi veri's- simum jusjurandtim. ♦ I swore the truest oath.' Some suppose that these accu- satives are governed by some preposition understood, but there is no evidence of this, and the expressions must be considered as belonging to the idioms of the lan- guage. V 148« To this place must we refer latet, fallitj fugit^ prcBteritj which are followed by an accusative of a person ; as, latuere fratrem, Virg. Non te fugit nee vero C^esarem fefellit. Cic. But lateo is often found with the dative ; as, ubi nobis tarn diu latuit ? Cic. V I49« Sometimes a Preposition may be easily understood ; as, propter, per, or ad. E. g. Doleo casum tuum, that is, propter : so, horrere aliquid, sc. propter or ob: so also ardere aliquem, *to be inflamed with love for,' ' to love passionately,' is probably for propter aliquem: Formosum pastor Corydon ardebat Alexin: so, despe- rire aliquam, ' to love one desperately,' ' to die in love for one.' — Stygias juravimus undxis, sc. per Stygias, Ovid. Decurrere vitam, sc. per. So, pasci sylvas. Virg. ' to be pastured through woods ;' i. e. * they feed on.' Ire exequias, sc. ad, ' to go to a funeral.' V I«>0» But sometimes Prepositions cannot be readily understood. The simplest examples are those where id, quid, and similar pronouns are joined to a verb ; as, hoc dubito, * I doubt this,' for de hac re. Perhaps in such cases ad, ♦ as to,' is the most proper preposition to supply ; for quoad, mentioned by some, is not a preposition. Virg. Georg. 3. 421. s'ibila colla tumentem, (for the ablative sibilo collo,) properly, * as to its hissing neck,' ad or quod attinet ad imderstood. So peccare ali- quid, Cic. Particularly to these cases belong those verbs which signify ' to taste of,' ' to smell of;' as, redolere vimim, * to smell of wine.' Niliil oleant, Cic. ' they smell of nothing.' Gorgonius olet hircum, Hor. So, olere crocum, Cic. To these seems to belong the formula magnam partem, ' a great part,' maximam partem, ' the greatest part ;' as, libros meos magnam partem amisi, ' I have lost a great part of my books. After Clamo, Crepo, Queror, Festino, the Accusative is remarkable, since aliquid clamare, &c. seem to stand for aliquid dicere clamando, &c. Under this head we may place the singular expression, Bacchanalia vivunt, for vivunt modo Bacchanalium, or vivendo Bacchanalia exprimunt. § Xol* Sometimes, instead of the accusative, neuter verbs have an abla- tive ; as, Ire itinere, dolere dolore, vicem ejus ; gaudere gaudio ; mori or oblre morte ; vivere vita ; ardet virgine. Horat. Ludere aleam, or -a ; manure, plu^re, rordre, slillare, suddre, aliquid or aliquo. Erubescere jura. Virg. origine. Tacit, equo vehi. Curt. G0VERN3IENT OP VERBS. 231 §152« Obs. 2. Several verbs are used both in an active and neuter sense ; as, Abhorrere famam, to dread infamy. Li v. a lifibus : ab uxGre ducenda, to be averse from. Id. a meis iiiorTbus ab- horret, is inconsislent vdtk. Cic. Abolere monumenta viri, to abolish. Virg. illis cladis Caudinae noridum memoria aboleverat, vxis not effaced from, they had not forgotten. Liv. Adolere penates, to burn, to sacrifice to. Virg. ^tas adolevit ; adolevit ad ajta- tem. Plaut. Declinare ictam, to avoid ; loco ; agmen alTquo, to remove. Degenerare animos, to v)eahen ; patri, to degenerate from. ; a virtute majGrum. Durare adolescentes labore, to harden ? Res durat ad breve tempus, endures ; In aedibus durare neqaeo, stay or re- main. Plaut. Inclinare culpam in aliquem, to lay ; Hos ut sequar, inclinat animus, in- clines ; acies inclinat, or inclinatur, gives away. Laborare arma, to forge ; morbo, e do- lore, e renibus, to be ill ; de re aliqua, to be concerned. Morari iter, to stop; in urbe, to stay; Hoc nihil moror, / do not mind. Properare pecuniam haeredi. Hor. in orbem ; ad unam sedem. Ov. Quadrare acervum, to square. Hor. ali- quid ad normam; alicui, in aliquem, ad multa, to fit. Suppeditare copiam dicendi, to furnish ; Sumptus illi, or illi sumptibus. Ter. suppeditat oratio, is afforded; Manu- biae in f'undamenta vix suppeditarunt, were sufficient. Liv. Obs. 3. These accusatives, hoc, id, quid, aliquid, quicquid, nihil, idem, illud, tan- tum, quantum, multa, pauca, &c. are often joined with neuter verbs, having the pre- positions circa or propter understood ; as, Id lacrymat. Id succenset. Ter. Quid rides ? quid clamas ? Terent. Obs. 4. The accusative is often understood ; Turn prora avertit, sc. se. Virg. Flumlna prcecipVant, sc. se. Id. Qubcumque intenderat, sc. se, turned or directed himself Sail. Ohiit, sc. mortem. Ter. Cum faciam vitula, sc. sacra. Virg. Or its place supplied by an infinitive or part of a sentence ; as, Reddes dulce loquiy reddes ridere decorum ; for dulcem sermonem, decorum risum. Hor. § 153* XIX. Recordor^ memmi^ reminiscor^ and obliviscor^ govern the accusative or genitive ; as, Recordor lectionis, or lectionem, Obliviscor injuries, or injuriam, I remember the lesson. T forget an injury. Obs. 1. These verbs are often construed with the infinitive or some part of a sen- tence ; as, Memini videre virginem. Ter. Oblitus est, quid paulo ante posuisset. Cic. Obs. 2. Memini, when it signifies to make mention, is joined with the genitive, or the ablative with the preposition de ; as, Memini alicujus, or de atiquo. So, recor- dor, when it signifies, to recollect ; as, Velim scire ecquid, de te recordere. Cic. Obs. 3. The phrase Venit mihi in mentem, denoting remembrance, is variously construed ; as, Venit mihi in mentem hcec res, hujus rei, de hac re, Mihi solet venire in mentem illius temporis. Cic. In mentem venit de speculo. 4. Verbs governing the Ablative. § 154. XX. Verbs of plenty and scarceness for the most part govern the ablative ; as, . Abundat divitiis. Caret omni culpa, He abounds in riches. He has no fault. 232 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. Verbs of plenty are, Ahundo, affluo, exubero, redundo, Jloreo, suppe- dito, scateo, &c. ; of want, Careo, egeo, indigeo, vacOj deficior^ desti- tuor, &c. Obs. 1. Egeo and Indigeo frequently govern the Genitive ; as, egeo consilii, Cic. eget ceris, ' he needs money.* Non tarn arlis indigent, quam laboris, Cic. Careo also is used with a Genitive; as, carendum tui, Terent. Also, scateo and abundo; as, terra scatet ferarum, Lucr. Abundans with a Genitive in Virg. Eel. 2, 20. We also find careo, egeo, indigeo, scateo, with pronouns of the neuter gender ; as, id, quod, &c nee quidquam eges, Plaut So, id tuus scatet animus, Plaut. for ea re. Obs. 2. The ablative after these verbs is governed by some preposition under- stood ; and sometimes we find it expressed : as, Vacat a culpa, He is free from fault Liv. § 155« XXI. Utor^ abutor^ fruor^ fungor^ potior^ vescor, govern the ablative ; as, UCilur fraude. He uses deceit Ahutitur lihris, He abuses booka § 1 90« To these add, gaudeo, creor, nascor, fdo, vivo, victito, consto ; laboro, * to be ill ;' pascor, epulor, nitor, innitor, glorior, IcBtor, delecior, dignor, exulto, sto, &c. ; as, Gaudere bono, Cic. Fortes creantur fortibus, Hor. Fluminibus salices nascuntur, Virg. Fidere prudentia, Cic. Piscibus vivere existimantur, Caes. Fids victitamus, Plaut. Mente vix constat, Cic. Laborare podagra. Mart. Ccede pasci- tur, Ovid. Filio niCitur, Cic. Gloriari nominibus, Cic. Lcetor tua dignitate, Cic. Delectdri re, Cic. Me dignor honore, Virg. Stare promissis, Cic. ' to abide by one's promises.' Some, led away by our idiom, according to which we say, " To stand to an agreement," have supposed that it is the Dative which follows Sto : but this is not so, as might be shown by numerous examples. Obs. 1. Potior often governs the genitive ; as, Potlri urbis. Sail. And we always say, Potlri rerum^ to possess the chief command, never rebus ; imperio being understood. Obs. 2. Potior, Lector, fungor, vescor, epulor, pascor, and gaudeo, sometimes have an accusative ; as, Potiri urbem. Cic. Offieia fungi. Ter. Munera fungi. Tac. Pascuntur siltxis. Virg. And in ancient writers utor, abator, and fruor ; as, Uti consilium. Plaut. Operam abuCitur. Ter. Depasco and depascor always take an accusative ; as, DepascUur artus. Virg. Gavisi sunt suum dolorem. Cic. 5 2. VERBS GOVERNING TWO CASES. 1. Verbs governing two Datives. § 157« XXII. Sum used instead of afero (to bring) governs two datives, the one of a person, and the other a thing ;^ as, Est mihi voluptdti. It is, or brings, a pleasure to me. * This rule would be better expressed thus : The verb Est, when it may be construed * to redound to,' * to bring,' ' to be conducive,' * to serve for,' is followed by two Datives, one of which denotes the object to which, the other, the end for which any thing is, or is done. h GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. 233 § 158« Two datives are also put after habeOf do^ verto, relinquo, tenio, tribuo, fore, duco, appono, assigno, cedo, compdro, curro, eo, mittOf pateo, prqficiscor, suppedito, and some others ; as, Ducitur honori tibi, It is reckoned an honour to you. Id vcrtttur mihi vitio, I am blamed for that. So, Misit mihi muneri ; Dedit mihi dono ; Habet sibi laudi ; Ventre, occurrere auxilio alicui. Liv. Obs. 1. Instead of the dative we often use the nominative, or the accusative ; as» Est exitium pecori for exitio ; Dare atlquid aticui donum, or dono ; Dare jiliam ei nuptam, or nuptui When dare and other active verbs have two datives after them, they likewise govern an accusative either expressed or understood i as, Dare crimini ei, sc. id. Obs. 2. The dative of the person is often to be supplied ; as, Est exemplo, indicio^ prcBsidiOy Usui, &c. scil. mihi, alicui, hominibus, or some such word. So, poneref opponere, pignori, sc. alicui, to pledge. Canere receptui, sc. suis militibus, to sound a retreat; Habere curce qucBStui, odio, vduptati, religioni, studio, ludibrio, despicaiui, &c. sc. sibi. Obs. 3. To this rule belong forms of naming ; as, Est mihi nomen Alexandro, my name is Alexander ; or with the nominative, Est mihi nomen Alexander ; or more rarely with the genitive, Est mihi nomen Alexandri. 2. Verbs governing' the Accusative and the Genitive, § 159« XXIII. Verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, and admonishing, govern the accusative of a person with the genitive of a thing ; as, Arguit mefurti, He accuses me of theft. Meipsum inerticB condemno, I condemn myself of laziness. Ilium homicidii absolvunt. They acquit him of manslaughter. Monet me officii. He admonishes me of my duty. § X60« Verbs of accusing are, Accuso, ago, apello, arcesso, an- quiro, capto, increpo, arguo, defero, insimulo, postulo, alligo, astringo, urgeo, incusOf interrogo, compello. Of condemning, damno, coarguo, convinco, prehendo, judico, plector, condemno, infmno, noto. Of ac- quitting", absoho, solvo, libero, purgo. Of admonishing, moneo, ad- moneo, commonefacio. § 161 The crime or punishment is sometimes put in the Ablative without a preposition being expressed, after absolvo, liber o, damno, condemno, &c. ; as. Con- sulem regni suspicione absolverunt, Liv. Damnabis tu votis, Virg. Crimen quo argui posset, Nep. Teneri poena, Cic. We also find Damnari voti, which signifies, * to have gained one's wish ;' properly, * to be condemned to the discharge of the vow which he had made for the prosperous issue of his undertaking,' which is a sign that he had gained his wish. Such a person is said to be reus voti. Virg. ^n. 5. 237. § 163« Obs. 1. Verbs of accusing and admonishing, instead of the genitive, frequently have after them an ablative, with the preposition de ; as, Monere atiquem officii, or de officio ; Accusdre atiquem furti, or de furto. De vi condemndti sunt. Cic. Obs 2. Crimen and caput are put either in the genitive or ablative ; but in the ablative usually without a preposition; as, Damndre, posluldre, absoLvlre, eum 20* 234 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. criminis, or capitis ; and crimine, or capite ; also Absolvo me peccato. Liv. And we always say, rlecttre, pumre atiquem capile, and not capitis, to punish one capitally, or with death. Obs. 3. Many verbs of accusing, &c. are not construed with the ace. of a person, and the gen. of a thing, but the contrary ; thus we say, Cidpo, reprehendo, taxo, traduco, vituptero, calumnior, criniinor, excUso, &c. avaritiam alicujus, and not aliquem avariticB. We sometimes also find accuso, incuso, &c. construed in this manner; as, Accusdre inertiam adolescentium, for adolescentes inerticB. Cic. Culpam arguo. Liv. We say, Ag^re cum aliquo furti, rather than atiquem, to accuse one of theft. Cic. Obs. 4. Verbs of accusing and admonishing sometimes govern two accusatives, when joined with hoc, illud, istud, id, unum, multa, &c. as, Moneo, accuso, te illud. We seldom find, however, Errorem te moneo, but err oris or de err ore ; except in old writers, as Plautus. § 163. XXIV. Verbs of valuing, with the ac- cusative, govern such genitives as these, magni^ parvi, nihili ; as, jEsCimo te magniy I value you much. § X64:« Verbs of valuing" are, JEstimOf existimo, duco, facio, ha- heo, pendo, puto, taxo. They govern several other genitives; as, tanti, quantif pluris, majoris, minoris, minimi^ plurtmiy maxlmiy naucif pilif assisj nihili, teruncii, hujus, Jlocci, pensi, Obs. 1. jEsdmo sometimes governs the ablative ; as, JEsfimo te magno, per- magno, parvo, scil. pretio: and also nihilo. We likewise say, Pro nihilo habeo, puto, duco. Obs. 2. j^qui and boni are put in the genitive after facio and consulo; as. Hoc cmsulo boni, tsqui bon'ique facio, I take this in good. part. Obs. 3. The genitive after all these verbs is governed by some substantive under- stood ,• as, Arguere atiquem furti, scil. rfe crimine furti: j^stimo rem magni, scil. pretii, or pro re magni pretii ; Consulo boni, i. e. statuo or censeo esse, factum, or munus boni viri, or animi ; Monere aliquem officii, i. e. officii, causa, or de re or negotio officii. 3. Verbs governing the Accusative and the Dative. § 165» XXV. Verbs of comparing, giving, de- claring, and taking away, govern the accusative and dative ; as, Comph.ro Virgilium Homero, I compare Virgil to Homer. Suum cuique tribuito. Give every one his own. Narras fabulam surdo. You tell a story to a deaf man. Eripuit me morti. He rescued me from death. § 166« Or, — Any active verb may govern the accusative AND THE DATIVE, (whcn, together with the object of the action^ we express the person or thing with relation to which it is exerted ;) as, Legam lectionem tibi, I will read the lesson to you. Emit librum mihi, He bought a book for me. Sic vos non vobis feriis aratra boves. Virg. Paupcrtas GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 235 S(spe suadei mala hominihus, advises men to do bad things. Plant. Imperdre pe- cuniam, frumentum, naves, arma aliquibus, to order them to furnish. Caes. Obs. 1. Verbs of comparing and taking away, together with some others, are often construed with a preposition; as, Compardre unnm rem cum olid, and ad aliam, or compardre res inter se : Eripuit me morti, morte, a or ex morte : Miltere ^stolam altcui, or ad altquem : Interidere telum aUcui, or in aliquem : Incidere oeri, tn CBS, or in cere ; and so in many others. Obs. 2. Several verbs governing the dative and accusative, are construed di^ ferently; as, Aspergere lahem alicui, or aliquem labe, to put an affront on one ; aram sanguine. Circumddre moenia oppido, or oppldum moenibus, to surround a city with walls. Dondre, prohibere rem alicui, or aliquem re, to give one a present, to hinder one from a thing. Excusdre se alicui, and apud aliquem, de re ; valetudinem ei. Exprobrdre vitium ei, or in eo, to upbraid. Gratulor tibi hanc rem, hoc re, in, pro, and de hac re, I congratulate you on this. Melius Tullo devictos hostes graluldlur. Li v. Imperdre salutem alicui, or aliquem salute, to salute one. Indu^re, exuere vestem sibi, or se veste, to put on, to put off one's clothes. Intercludere commedtum alicui, or aliquem commedtu, to intercept one's provi- sions. Interdixit Galliam Romdnis, or Romdnos Gallia, he debarred the Romans from Gaul. Invideo honori alicujus, Cic. hondrem alicui, Hor. in re diqua, Cic. Levdre dolorem alicui ; doldrem alicujus ; aliquem dolore, to ease one's distress. Litdre Deum sacris, and sacra Deo, to sacrifice. Mactdre hostiam Deo, or Deum hostia, to sacrifice. Mindri aliquid alicui, or sometimes alicui aHquo, Cic. to threaten one with any thing ; CoBsdri gladio. Sail. Occupdre pecuniam alicui, and apud aliquem, i. e. pecuniam foenori locdre, to place at interest. Cic. Opponere se morti, and ad mortem. Renuncidre id ei, and ad eum, to tell. Rcstitutre alicui sanitdtem, or aliquem sanildti, to restore to health. Obs. 3. Verbs signifying motion or tendency to a thing, instead of the dative, have an accusative after them, with the preposition ad; as, Porto, fero, lego, -as, prcecipilo, tollo, traho, duco, verto, incite, suscito ; also, hortor, and invito, voco, provoco, animo, stimiilo, conformo, lacesso ; thus. Ad laudem miUtes hortdtur ; Ad prcetorem hominem traxit. Cic. But after several of these verbs, we also find the dative ; as, Inferre Deos Lalio, for in Latium. Virg. Invitdre aliquem hospitio, or in hospitium. Cic. Obs. 4. The accusative is sometimes understood ; as, Nubere alicui, soil, se ; Cedere alicui, soil, locum ; Detrahere alicui, scil. laudem ; Ignoscere alicui, scil. culpam. And in English the particle to is often omitted ; as, Dedil mihi librum. He gave me a book, for to me. 236 GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. 4. Verbs governing two Accusatives, § 167. XXVI. Verbs of asking and teaching govern two accusatives, the one of a person and the other of a thing ; as, Posdimus te pacem. We beg peace of thee. Docuit me grammattcam. He taught me grammar. § 168« Verbs of asking, which govern two accusatives, are Rogo, orOy exoro, ohsecro, precor, posco, postulo, reposco, JlagUo, &c. Of teaching, JDoceo, edoceo, dedoceo, erudio, Obs. 1. Celo likewise governs two accusatives ; as, Celdvit me hanc rem. He concealed this matter from me; or otherwise, celdvit hanc rem mihi, or celdvit me de hac re, Obs. 2. Verbs of asking and teaching are often construed with a preposition ; as, Rogdre rem ah aViquo : Docere atlquem de re, to inform ; but we do not say, docere aliquem de grammadca, but grammuticam, to teach. And we always say with a preposition, Peto, exigo a or ^s te ; Percontor, scitor, sciscitor, ex or a te or te with- out the preposition ; Interrogo, consuUo te de re ; Ut facias te obsecro ; Exorat pacem divum, for divos. Virg. Instruo, instituo, formo, informo aliquem xlrtibus, in the abl. without a prep. Imhuo eum artibus, in or ab artlbus. Also, instruo ad. rem, or in re, ignorantiam alicujus. Erudire aliquem artes, de or in re, ad rem. Formdre ad studium, mentem, studiis, studia ejus. Obs. 3. Many other active verbs with the accusative of a person, take also an accusative of nihil, or the neuter pronouns, hoc, id^ quid, &c., or of adjectives of quantity ; as, nee te id consulo, Cic. Eam rem nos locus admonuit, Sail. To this construction seems to belong the formula, magnam partem, or maximum partem ; as, lihros meos mag- NAM PARTEM amisi, * I have lost a great part of my books.* See 5 150. Obs. 4. Allied to this is the Greek Accusative, as it is called, which is added to passive verbs, in order to define more exactly the part to which the meaning of the verb relates ; as, redimitus tempora lauro, — miles fractus membra, &c. In such cases the accusative is govern- ed by, quod ad, or secundum, or some other preposition understood. See \ 63. 5. Verbs governing the Accusative and the Ablative, § 169. XXVII. Verbs of loading, binding, cloth- ing, depriving, and some others, govern the accu- sative and the ablative ; as, Onerat naves auro, He loads the ships with gold. V X i Oo Verbs of loading are, Onero, cumulo, premo, opprimo, obruo, repleo, dono. Of unloading, levo, exonero, &c. Of binding, astringo, tigo, alUgo, devincio, impedio, irretio, iltaqueo, &c. Of loosing, solvo, exsolvo, libera, laxo, expedio, &c. Of depriving, privo, nudo, oi'bo, spolio, fraudo, emungo. Of clothing, vestio, amicio induo, cingo, tego, velo, corono, and calceo. Of unclothing, exuo, discingo, &c CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 237 * Obs. 1. The preposition, by which the ablative is governed after these verbs, is sometimes expressed ; as, Solvere aUquem ex catenis. Cic. Sometimes the ablative is to be supplied ; as, Complet naves, sc. viris, mans the ship. Virg. Obs. 2. Impleo, compleo, and expleo, sometimes take the genitive ; as, Adoles- centem sucb teineritdHs implet. Liv. Erroris illos et dementicc complebo. Plant. Ani- mum explesse juvabit ultricis flammce. Virg. And among the more ancient writers, also saiuro and obsaiuro ; as, Hcb res vitce me saturant, Plant. Istius obsaturabere, Terent. Several vary their construction ; as, induit, exuit se vestibus, or vesles sibi. Obs. 3. Muto governs the Accusative of the thing given in exchange, and the Ablative of that which is taken in exchange ; as, Muto librum pecunia. Sometimes the preposition is expressed ; as, Mutare bellum pro pace, Sail. Obs. 4. The following verbs are also found with the accusative of the object and the ablative without a preposition : Instruo, formo, instituo, imbuo, informo, defendo, arceo, prohibeo, exclude, inlercludo. THE CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. §171. XXVIII. When a verb in the active voice governs two cases, in the passive it retains the latter case ; as, Accusor furti, I am accused of theft. Virgilius comparatur Homero, Virgil is compared to Homer. Doceor grammaticam, I am taught grammar. Navis oneraiur aurOy The ship is loaded with gold. So, Scio homines accusdtum iri furti ; — Eos ereptum iri morti, morle, a or ex morte ; pueros doctum iri grammudcam ; rem celdtum iri mihi, or me ; me celdtum iri de re, &c. Sometimes the active has three cases, and then the passive has the two last cases ; as, Habetur ludibrio iis. § 173» When a verb in the Active voice governs an accusative with any other case, it must be carefully observed that, whatever word is in the Accusative after the Active verb, that word, and no other, must be the Nominative to it in the Passive voice, and the other case remains unchanged. Thus, * I give you a book,' Librum tihi do ; pas- sively. Liber tibi datur. ' He told me this,' Hoc mihi dixit ; passively, * I was told this,' Hoc mihi dictum est. ' I present you with a book,' Dono tibi librum; passively. Liber tibi donatur. This rule is simple, perspicuous, and founded on the best classical authorities — that, what- ever is put in the Accusative case, after the Active verb, becomes the Nominative to it, in the Passive voice, while the other case is retained under the government of the verb, by this twenty-eighth rule. Thus, * I persuade you of this,' Persuadeo hoc tibi. Here the thing is ex- pressed in the Accusative, and the person in the Dative. The former therefore must be the Nominative to the verb in the Passive voice ; as, hoc tibi persuadetur, * you are persuaded of this,' literally, * this is persuaded to you.' § 1 T3» But it does not follow that we cannot say. Ego dicor, Ele dicituTi or Ille dictus est. If the person be He to whom any thing is 238 CONSTRUCTION OF PASSIVE VERBS. said, it must always be expressed in the Dative case, as in the preced- ing examples. But if the person be He of whom any thing is said, it may then be made nominative to the verb. Thus, ' He is said to be a wise man,' Ille dicitur esse vir sapiens. Here Ille is the subject spoken of, the person of whom the assertion is made, not the person to whom the thing is told. In like manner, * I believe you,' Credo tih% that is, ' I give credit to what you say,' in the passive voice, tibi credi- tur, not iu crederis. But the latter expression is correct if used to sig- nify, not that credit is given to the words of the person, but that some- thing is believed of him, as the subject of discourse ; as, Tu crederis esse vir bonus, * you are believed to be a good man.' Obs. 1. Passive verbs are commonly construed with the ablative and the preposition a; as, Tu laudaris a me, which is equivalent to Ego laudo te. Virtus d'dig'itur a nobis; Nos dUigimiis virtutem. Gaudeo meum factum probU.ri a te, or te prohure meum factum : And so almost all active verbs. Neuter and deponent verbs also admit this preposition ; as, Mare a sole coUucet. Cic. Phalaris non a paucis interiit. Id. So, Cadere ab hoste ; Cessdre apraliis ; Mori ab ense ; Pali furari aliquid ab alt- quo, &c. Also, Venire ab hostwus, to be sold ; Vapidure ab atiquo, Exulare ab urbe. Thus likewise many active verbs ; as, Sumere, petere, toUere, pellere, expectdre, emere, &c. ab atiquo. Rem. 1. The prep, is sometimes understood after passive verbs; ns, Deseror con- juge. Ovid. Desertus suis sc. a. Tacit. Tabula distinguitur undo, qui navigat. sc. ab unda, is kept from the water by a plank. Juvenal. Rem. 2. The preposition PER is also used in the same sense with A ; as, Per me defensa est respubtica, or a me ; Per me restitutus ; Per me or a me factum est. Cic. But PER commonly marks the instrument, and A the principal efficient cause ,* as, Res agiturper cr editor es, a rege, sc. a rege vel a legato ejus. Cic. Fam. i. 1. Obs. 2. Passive verbs sometimes govern the dative, especially among the poets ; as, Neque cernitur ulli, for ab uUo. Virg. Vix audior ulli. Ovid. Scriberis Vario, for a Vario. Hor. Honesta bonis viris qiusruntur, for a viris. Cic. Videor, to seem, always governs the dative ; as, Videris mihi, You seem to me : but we com- monly say, Videris a me, You are seen by me ; although not always ; as, Nulla tud- Tum audita mihi, neque visa sororum, for a me. Virg. Obs. 3. Induor, amicior, cingor, accingor, also exuor, and discingor, are often con- strued with the accusative, particularly among the poets, though we do not find them governing two accusatives in the active voice ; as, Induitur vestem, or veste. Obs. 4. Neuter verbs are for the most part used impersonally in the passive voice ; unless when they are joined virith a noun of a similar signification to their own ; as, Pugna, pugndta est. Cic. Bellum militabitur. Horat. Passive impersonal verbs are most commonly applied either to a multitude, or to an individual taken indefinitely; as, Statur, Jletur, curritur, vivitur, venltur, &c. a vobis, ab illis, 6zc. We are standing, weeping, &c. Bene potest vivi a me, or ab aliquo : I or any per- son may live well. Provisum est nobis optime a Deo ; Reclamdtum est ab omnibus, all cried out against it Cic. Obs. 5. They also govern the same cases as when used personally ; as, Ut majo- r^bus natu assurgcdur, ut supptlcum misereatur. Cic. Except the accusative : for in these phrases, Itur Athenas, pugnalum est biduum, dorm'itur totam noctem, the accu- sative is not governed by the verb, but by the prepositions ad and per understood. We find, however. Tola mihi dorm'itur hyems; Nodes vigilanlur amdr(B; Oceanus raris ab orbe noslro navlbus adltur. Tacit. CONSTRUCTION OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 239 THE CONSTRUCTION OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. § 1 74. XXIX. An Impersonal Verb governs the dative; as, Expedit reipuhUccBf It is profitable for the state. Verbs which in the active voice govern only the dative, are used impersonally in the passive, and likewise govern the dative ; as, Favetur mihi, I am favoured, and not Ego faveor. So, Nocetur mild, imperatur mihi, (fee. We find, however, Hcbc egoprocurdre imperor. Ego cur invideor, lor m- peratur, invidetur mihi. Hor. Obs. 1. These verbs, Potest, ccepit, inctpit, desinit, debet, and solet, are used impersonally, when joined with impersonal verbs ; as, Non potest credi tibi, You cannot be believed ; Mihi non potest noceri, I cannot be hurt ; Negat jucunde posse vivi sine virtute. Cic. Per virtuiem potest iri ad astra. Aliorum laitdi et glories invideri soleL The praise and glory of others are accus- tomed to be envied. Id. Neque a fortissimis infirmisstmo generi resisti posse. Sallust. Obs. 2. Various verbs are used both personally and impersonally ; as, Venit in menlem mihi hcec res, or de hac re, or hujus rei, scil. memoria ; This thing came into ray mind. Est cures mihi hcec res, or de hac re. Doleo or dolet mihi, id factum esse. Obs. 3. The neuter pronoun it is always joined with impersonal verbs in Eng- lish ; as, It rains, it shines ; &c. And in the Latin an infinitive is commonly sub- joined to impersonal verbs, or the subjunctive with wf, forming a part of a sentence which may be supposed to supply the place of a nominative ; as, Nobis non licet jteccdre, the same with peccdtum ; Omnibus bonis expedit rempubticam esse salvam, i. e. Salus reipubUcce expedit omnibus bonis. Cic. Acctdit, evenit, contigit, ut ibi essemus. These nominatives, hoc, illud, id, idem, quod, &c., are sometimes joined to impersonal verbs ; as, idem mihi licet. Cic. EMem licent. CatuU. Obs. 4. The dative is often understood ; as, Faciat quod libet, sc. sibi. Ter. Stat casus renovure omnes, sc. mihi, I am resolved. Virg. § 175. Exc. 1. REFERT Siud INTEREST govern the geni- tive; as, Refert patris, It concerns my father. Interest omnium, It is the interest of all. § 1 7G« But mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, are put in the accusa- tive plural neuter ; as, Non mea refert. It does not concern me. Obs. 1. Some think mea, tua, sua, &c. to be in the ablat. sing. fern. We say either cujus interest, and quorum interest ; or cuja interest, from cujus, -a, -wm. Obs. 2. Refert and interest are often joined with these nominatives. Id, hoc, illud, quid, quod, nihil, &c. also with common nouns ; and with these genitives, Tanti, quAinti, magni, permagni, parvi, pluris ; as, Hoc parvi refert ; Illud mea magni, in- terest. Cic. Usque (Sieo magni refert studium. Lucret. Incessus in gravida refert. Phn. 240 CONSTRTTCTION OP IMPERSONAL VERBS. Rem. 2. They are frequently construed with these adverbs, Tantum, quantum, multum, plus, ptunmums injirutum, parum, maximhi vehementer, minimi, &c. as, Fa* darn, quod maxtmd reipubllccB interesse judicdbo. Cic. Rem. 3. Sometimes instead of the genit. they take the accus. with the prep, ad ; as, Quid id ad me, aut ad meam rem refert PerscB quid rerum ^erant ? Of what importance is it ? &c. Plaut. Magni ad honorem nostrum interest. Cic. ; rarely the dative ; as, Die quid referat intra natures fines viventi, &c. Hor. Sometimes they are placed absolutely ; as, Magnop^re interest opprimi Dolahellam, it is of great im- portance. Cic. Permultum interest, qualis primus aditus sit. Id. Adeone est fun- data leviler fides, ut ubi sim, quam qui sim, magis referat. Liv. Plurimum enim intererit, quibus artlbus, aut quibus hunc tu moribus instituas. Juv. Obs. 3. The genitive after refert and interest, is governed by some substantive understood, with which the possessives mea, tua, sua, &c. likewise agree ; as, Inte- rest Cicerdnis, i. e. est inter negotia Ciceronis. Refert patris, i. e. refert se hcec res ad negotia patris. So, interest mea, est inter negotia mea. §177. Exc. II. These ^ve, MISERET, PCENITET, PU- DET, TMDET, and PI GET, govern the accusative of a person with the genitive of a thing; as, Miscret me tui, I pity you. Poenitet me peccati, I repent of ray sin. Tcsdet me viicB, I am weary of life. Pudet me culpce, I am ashamed of ray fault. Obs. 1. The genitive here is properly governed either by negotium understood, or by some other substantive of a signification similar to that of the verb with which it is joined ; as, Miseret me tui, that is, negotium or miseratio tui miseret me. Obs. 2. An infinitive or some part of a sentence may supply the place of the genitive ; as, Piemtet me peccasse, or quod peccaverim. The accusative is fre- quently understood ; as, Scelerum si bene pcenilet, scil. nos. Horat. Obs. 3. Miseret, pcen'itet, &c. are sometimes used personally, especially when joined with these nominatives, hoc, id, quod, &c. as. Ipse sui miseret. Lucr. Nonne hcBC te pudent. Ter. Nihil, quod poenitere possit, facias, for cujus te poenitere possit. Cic. We sometimes find miseret joined with two accusatives; as, Menedemi vicem miseret me, scil. secundum or quod ad. Ter. Obs. 4. The preterites of miseret, pudet, teedet, and piget, when used in the pas- sive form, govern the same cases with the active ; as, miserttum est me tuarum fortundrum. Ter. We likewise find, wiseresciY and miser etur used impersonally; as, Miserescit me tui. Ter. Miseredtur te fratrum ; Neque me tui, neque iuorum liber drum miser eri potest. Cic. §178. Exc. III. DECET, DELECT AT, JUV AT, and OPORTET, govern the accusative of a person with the infinitive; as, Delectat me studere. It delights me to study. Non decet te rixdri, It does not become you to scold. Obs. 1. These verbs are sometimes used personally ; as, parvum parva decent. Hor. Est aliquid, quod non oporteat, etiamsi liceat. Cic. /fee facta ab illo opor- tebant. Ter. Obs. 2. Decet is sometimes construed with the dative ; as, Ita nobis decet. Ter. Obs. 3. Oportet is elegantly joined with the subjunctive mode, ut being understood ; as, CONSTRUCTIOI^ OF THE INFINITIVE. 241 Sibi quisque considat oportet. Cic. Or with the perfect participle, esse or fuisse being understood ; as, Communicdium oportuit ; mansiim oportuif ; Adolescenti morem gestum oportuit. The young man should have been humoured. Ter Obs. 4. Fallit, fugif, preterit, latet, when used impersonally, also govern the accusative with the infinitive; as, In lege nulla esse ejusmodi caputs non te fallit; De Dioiiysio fugit me ad te antea scribcre. Cic. Note. AWinet, periinet, and spectaf, are construed with ad ; Ad rempublicam per- (inef, me conservdri. Cic. And so personally, Ille ad me attznet, belongs. Ter. Res ad arma spectat, looks, points. Cic. THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE INFINITIVE. § 179« XXX. One verb governs another in the infinitive; as, Cupio discere^ I desire to learn. Obs. 1. The infinitive is often governed by adjectives ; as, Horatius est dignus legi. Quinctil. And it sometimes depends on a substantive; as, Tempus equum fumantia solvere colla. Virg. Obs. 2. The word governing the infinitive is sometimes understood ; as, Mene incepto desislere victam, scil. decet, or par est. Virg. Videre est, one may see. Dicere non est, scil. copia, or facultas. Horat. And sometimes the infinitive itself is to be supplied ; as, Socratem Jidibus docuit, scil. canere. Cic. So, Discere, scirCy Jidjbus. Obs. 3. The infinitive was not improperly called by the ancients, Nomen verbi, the name or noun of the verb ; because it is both joined with an adjective like a substantive ; as, Velle suum cuique est. Every one has a will of his own : and it likewise supplies the place of a noun, not only in the nominative, but also in all the obhque cases; as, 1. In the nominative, Latrocindri, frauddre, turpe est. Cic. Didicissejidetiter aries emollit mores. Ovid. 2. In the genitive, Per'itus cantdre, for caniandi or cantiis. Virg. 3. In the dative, Pardtus servire, for servituti. Sail. 4. In the accusative, Da mihifallere, for artem fallendi. Horat. Quod faciam superest, prcBter amdre, nihil. Ovid. 5. In the vocative, O vivcre nostrum, ut non sentientibus effJuis ! for vita nostra. 6. In the ablative, Dignus amdri, for amore, or qui ametur. Virg. Obs. 4. Instead of the infinitive a different construction is often used after verbs of doubting, willing, ordering, fearing, hoping ; in short, after any verb which has a relation to futurity ; as, Dubltat ita facere, or more frequently, an, num, or uirum ita faclHrus sit ; Duhitdvit anfaceret necne ; Non duhito quinfecerit. Vis me facere, or ut faciam. Metuit tangi, or ne tangdtur. Spero te veiifurum esse, or fore ut venias. Nunquam putdvi fore ut ad te supplex vemrem. Cic. Existimdbant futurum fuisse ut oppidum amitteretur. Cass. Obs. 5. To, which in English is the sign of the infinitive, in Latin may often be rendered otherwise than by the infinitive ; as, I am sent to complain, Mittor questum, or ut querar, &c. Ready to hear, Promptus ad audiendum ; Time to read, Tempus legendi,- Fit to swim, Aptus natando; Easy to say, Facile dicfu ; I am to write, Scripturus sum ; A house to let, or more properly, to be let, Domus locanda ; He was left to guard the city, Relictus est ut iueretur urbem. Obs. 6. Dubifo and dubium est, are sometimes followed by the Infinitive, but oftener by the Subjunctive, with an, num, utrum, and (if non goes before) quin ; as, non dubium est quin uxorem nolit flius, Terent. It is to be observed that such phrases as Dubilo an, Haud scio an, Nescio an, although from their very nature they imply some doubt are, notwithstanding, generally used in a sense almost afBrma- 21 242 CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND SUPINES. tive; as, Duhito an hunc primum omnium ponam, Nep. ^for aught I know he may be placed first,' or, * I am mclined to place him first.' Obs. 7. Verbs of fearing, such as, tlmeo, metuo, vereor, paveo, are used affirma- tively with ne, but negatively with ut, or ne non ; thus, Timet ne deseras se, Ter. ' she is afraid that you may forsake her.' Paves ne ducas uxorem, Ter. denotes, ' you are afraid to marry.' Paves ut ducas, Ter. you are afraid lest you should not marry her.' ' THE CONSTRUCTION OF PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND SUPINES. § 180« XXXI. Participles, Gerunds, and Su- pines govern the case of their own verbs ; as, Amans virtutem, Loving virtue. Carensfraude, Wanting guile. Obs. 1. Passive Participles oflen govern the dative, particularly when they are used as adjectives ; as, Suspectus mihi, Suspected by me ; Suspectiores regibus. Sail. Invlsus mihi, hated by me, or hateful to me ; In dies invisior. Suet. Occulta et maribus non in- visa solum, sed etiam inaudlta sacra, unseen. Cic. Obs. 2. Do, reddo, volo, euro, facio, habeo, comperio, with the Accusative of a perfect participle, are often used by way of circumlocution, instead of the verb of the participle ; as, Compertum habeo, for comperi, * I have found ;' Effectum dabo, for efficiam. Me mittum face, Ter. for mitle. In certain instances there is an evi- dent difference between the simple tense of the verb, and the periphrasis corre- sponding to the manner in which it is usually interpreted in English. Thus if we say, Gladius quern abdiderat, or Gladius quern abdilum Jiabebat, the translation of either is, ' The sword which she had concealed.' The latter is the phraseology of Livy, describing the suicide of Lucretia, and implies the actual possession of tho dagger at the time ; the former does not. Obs. 3. These verbs, euro, Imbco, mando, loco, conduco, do, tribuo, mitto, &c., are elegantly construed with the participle in dus, instead of the infinitive ; as, Funus faciendum curdvi, for fieri, or utfieret ; Columnas csdificandas locdvit. Cic. Obs. 4. EXOSUS, PEROSUS, and often also PERTjESUS, govern the ac- cusative ; as, Tcedas excsa jugdles. Ovid. Plebs consulum nomen haud secus qudm regum perosa erat. Liv. Pertcesus ignaviam suam; semet ipse, displeased with, Suet, vitam, weary of Justin, levitdtis. Cic. Obs. 5. Verbals in BUNDUS govern the case of their own verbs ; as, GratuUz' bundus patricB. Just. Vitabundus castra hostiiim. Liv. So sometimes also nouns; as, Justitia est obtemperaiio scriptis Legibus. Cic. InsidicB consuli. Sail. Domum reditionis spe subLdta. Csbs. Spectatio Ludos. Plant. Obs. 6. Sometimes the Gerund is used with ad ; as, Tradere ei genies diripiendas, or ad diripiendum, Cic. Rogo, accipio, do aliquid utendum, or ad utendum ; Misit mihi librum legendum, or ad legendum. Obs. 7. The passive participle in dus has in the nominative case, (and in the con- struction of the accusative with the infinitive also) the signification of necessity, less frequently, of possibility ; thus, laudandus is one who must be praised, or ought to be praised. The neuter of this participle is used in the nominative, or the accusa- tive before the infinitive, with esse in the sense of • necessit\%' or ' propriety,' as, laudandum est ; dice laudandum esse, ' we must praise.' The person on whom the duty or necessity rests, must be expressed in the dative, and not in the ablative with ab. But some consider the neuter participle as the gerund. See $ 182, Obs. 4. CONSTRUCTION OF GERUNDS. 243 THE CONSTRUCTION OF GERUNDS. § 181. XXXII. Gerunds are construed like sub- stantive nouns ; as, Studendum est mihi, I must study. Tempus studendi. Time of study. Aptus studendOf Fit for studying. Scio studendum esse mihi, I know that I must study. But more particularly: § 182» I. The gerund in DUM, of the Nominative case, with the verb est, governs the dative ; as, Legendum est mihi, I must read. j Moriendum est omnibus, All must die. So, Scio legendum esse mihi ; moriendum esse omnibus, &c. Obs. 1. This gerund always imports obligation or necessity ; and may bo resolved into oportet, necesse est, or the like, and the infinitive or the subjunctive, with the conjunction ut; as. Omnibus est moriendum, or Omnibus necesse est mori, or ut mo- riantur ; or Necesse est ut omnes moriantur. Constdendum est tibi a me, I must con- sult for your good ; for Oportet ut consulam tibi. Cic. Obs. 2. The dative is often understood ; as, Orandum est, ut sit mens sana in cor- pore sano, sc. tibi. Juv. Hic vincendum, aut moriendum, mitites, est, sc. vobis. Liv. Deliberandum est diu, quod statuendum est semel, sc. tibi or aticui. P. Syr. § 183» II. The gerund in Dlis governed by substantives or ad- jectives; as, Tempus legendi. Time of reading. | Cupidus discendi. Desirous of learning. Obs. This gerund is sometimes construed with the genitive plural ; as, Facultas agrorum condonandi, for ogros. Cic. Copia spectandi comcsdiarum, for comcBdias. Ter. But chiefly with pronouns ; as, In castra vencrunt sui purgandi causa. Cass. Vestri adhortandi causa. Liv. Ejus videndi cupidus, sc. fcemfncB. Ter. The ge- rund here is supposed to govern the genitive like a substantive noun. § 184:* III. The gerund in DO of the Dative case is governed by adjectives signifying usefulness or fitness ; as, Charta uUlis scribendo. Paper useful for writing. Obs. 1. Sometimes the adjective is understood ; as, Non est solvendo, scil. par or hahilis, He is not able to pay. Cic. Obs. 2. This gerund is sometimes governed als'» by verbs ; as, Adesse scribendo. Cic. Aptat habendo ensem, ibr wearing. Virg. Is finis censendo f actus est. Liv. § 185« IV. The gerund in DTJM of the Accusative case is go- verned by the prepositions ad or inter ; as, Promptus ad audiendum. Ready to hear Altentus inter docendum. Attentive in time of teaching. Obs. This gerund is also governed by some other prepositions; as. Ante doman- dum. Virg. Ob absolvendnm. Cic. Circa movendum. Quinctil. Or it depends on some verb going before, and then with the verb esse governs the dative case ; as, ^^0 moriendum esse omnibus, I know that all must die. Esse is often understood* 244 CONSTKUCTION OF GERUNDS. § 186» V. The gerund in DO of the Ablative case is governed by the prepositions «, ah, c?e, e, ex, or in ; as, Poena a peccando abslerret. Punishment frightens from sinning. § 18T« Or without a preposition, as the ablative of manner or cause ; according to Rule XLIX, as, Memoria excolendo augetur. The memory is improved by exercising it. Defessus sum ambuJandOy I am wearied with walking. Obs. The gerund in its nature very much resembles the infinitive. — Hence the one is frequently put for the other ; as, Est tempus legendi, or legere : only the gerund is never joined with an adjective, and is sometimes taken in a passive sense; as, Cum Tisidium vocarUvr ad imperandmn, i. e. ut ipsi imperctur, to receive orders. Sail. Nunc ades ad imperandum, vet ad parendum pofius ; sic enim • antiqui loquehanlur. Cic. i. e. ut tihi imperetur. Urit videndOy i. e. dum videiur. Virg. Gerunds turned into Participles in dus. § 188» XXXVI. '^ Gerunds governing the ac- cusative are elegantly turned into participles in dus, which, like adjectives, agree with their sub- stantives in gender, number and case ; as. By the Gerund. By the Participle or Gerundive. Petendum est mihi pacem, "] C Pax est petenda mihi. Tempus petendi pacem, I or more J Tempus petendcB pads. Ad petendum pacem, j frequently 1 Ad petendam pacem. A petendo pacem, J \^A petenda pace. Obs. 1. In changing gerunds into participles in dus, the participle and the substantive are always to be put in the same case in v^^hich the gerund was ; as, Genitive. Inita sunt consilia urhis delendcB, civium trucidandorum, nomfms Ro- mdni extinguendi. Cic. Dat. Perpetiendo labori idoneus. Column. Capessenda reipubticcB habilis. Tac. Area Jirma templis ac portictbus sustinendis. Liv. Oneri ferendo est, sc. aptus or habilis. Ovid. Natus miseriis ferendis, Ter. Literis dandis vigilare. Cic. Locum oppido condendo capere. Liv. Ace. and Abl. Ad defendendam Romam ab oppugnanda Capuh duces Romanos abstrahere. Liv. Orationem Latmam legendis nostris effigies pleniorem. Cic. Obs. 2. The gerunds of verbs, which do not govern the accusative, are never changed into the participle, except those of medeor, utor, abutor, fruor, fungor, and potior ; as, Spes potiundi urbe, or potiundcB urbis ; but we always say, Cupidus subveniendi tibi, and never tui. * The Gerunds in Dum, Di, and Do, constitute Rules xxxiii. xxxiv. and xxxv. CONSTRUCTION OF SUPINES. 245 THE CONSTRUCTION OF SUPINES. 1. The supine in um. § 189. XXXVII. The supine in um is put after a verb of motion ; as, AUit deambuldtum. He hath gone to walk. So, Ducere cohortes prceddtum. Li v. Nunc venis irrisum dominum ? Quod in rem tuam optimum facta arhitror, te id admonttum venio. Plaut. Obs. 1 . The supine in um is elegantly joined with the verb eo, to express the signification of any verb more strongly ; as, It se perditimi, the same with id agit, or operam dat, ut se perdat, He is bent on his own destruction. Ter. This supine with m, taken impersonally, supplies the place of the infinitive passive ; as, An credebas illam sine tua opera iri deductum domum ? Which may be thus resolved ; An credebas iri (a te or ab aliquo) deductum (i. e. ad deducendum) illam domum. Ter. The two supines are properly the accusative and ablative of an old verbal substantive of the fourth declension, which govern the case of the verb. Obs. 2. The supine in um is put after other verbs besides verbs of motion ; as, Dedit filiam nuptum ; Cantatum provocemus, Ter. Revocalus defensum patriam ; Divisit copias hiemdtum. Nep. Obs. 3. The meaning of this supine may be expressed by several other parts of the verb ; as, Venit ordtum opem ; or, 1. Venit opem orandi ca,usa, or opis orandcB. 2. Venit ad orandum opem, or ad orandam opem. 3. Venit opi orandce. 4. Venit opem oraturus. 5. Venit qui, or ut opem oret. 6. Venit opem orare. But the third and the last of these are seldom used. 2. The Supine in u. § 190# XXXVIII, The supine in u is put after Propensity^ § 19U# XXXV 111, 'Ihe supine in v adjectives implying Ease^ Difficulty, Quality, Fitness, Form, &c. Facile dictu. Easy to tell, or to be told. So, Nihil dictu fcedum, visuque, hcBC limina tangat, intra quce puer est. Juv. Dif- ficilis res est inventu verus amicus. Obs. 1. The supine in u is also used after the nouns /as, nefas, and opus ; as, Hoc fas est dictu, Cic. Nefas dictu, Ovid. Dictu opus est, Ter. Obs. 2. The supine in u, being used in a passive sense, hardly ever governs any case. It is sometimes, especially in old writers, put after verbs of motion ; as. Nunc ohsondtu redeo, from getting provisions. Plaut. Primus cubttu surgat (villicus,) from bed, postremus cuhiium eat. Cato. Obs. 3. This supine may be rendered by the infinitive or gerund with the pre- position ad ; as. Difficile cognitu, cognosci, or ad cognoscendum ; Res fadilis ad ere- dendum. Cic. Obs. 4. According to the opinion of many grammarians, the Supines are nothing else but verbal nouns of the Fourth declension, used only in the Accusative and Ablative cases, and are governed in these cases by prepositions understood, the Supine in um by the preposition ad, and the Supine in u by the preposition in. But this opinion will hardly bear examination; for why should the Supine in UM govern the case of its own verb, unless it be really a part of it ? 21* 246 CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. Obs. 5. Although in the grammars and dictionaries the Supines of most verbs are given by analogy, yet they are seldom found in the classics : instead of them are used the Gerunds, the Participles in dus and rus, and uf, with the Subjunctive mode. THE CONSTRUCTION OF INDECLINABLE WORDS. I. THE CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERB&. § 191» XXXIX. Adverbs qualify verbs, partici- ples, adjectives, and other adverbs ; as. Bene scrihit, He writes well. Serous egregik jidllis, A slave remarkably faithful. Fortiter pugnans, Fighting bravely. Satis bene, Well enough. Obs. 1. Adverbs sometimes likewise qualify substantives ; as, Homerus plane orator : plane nosier, verb Metellus. Cic. So, Hodie mane, eras mane, heri mane ; hodie vesperi, &c. tarn mane, tam vespere. Obs. 2., The adverb, for the most part in Latin, and always in English, is placed near to the word which it qualifies or affects. Obs. 3. Two negatives, both in Latin and English, are equivalent to an affirmative ; as. Nee non senserunt, Nor did they not perceive, i. e. el senserunt, and they did per- ceive ; Non potcram non examinuri metu. Cic. So, non sum nescius, i. e. ' I know.' Cic. haud nihil est, i. e. * It is something.' Ter. nonnulli, i. e. * some.' Examples, however, of the contrary of this occur in good authors, both Latin and English. Thus, in imitation of the Greelis, two negatives sometimes make a stronger nega- tion : Non par ere noluit. Nep. ' he did not refuse to obey ;' neque hcBC non evenerunt, *and this actually took place;' vide igitur ne nvl.l.a sit divinatio, Cic. 'consider whether there exist such a thing as divination at all.' Neque tu haud dicas tihi non prcedictum, Ter. * and do not say that you were not forewarned.' Obs. 4. It must be observed however, that the use of non before a negative does not merely restore the positive sense but generally heightens it. Homo non indoc- tus, is equivalent to homo sane doctus, ' a man truly learned.' Non imperitissimus, * a man of great experience.' So, non ignoro, non nescius sum, ' I know very well.' Obs. 5. A very different sense arises, according as the non is placed before or after : thus, non nemo, * some one ;' nemo non, ' every one.' Non nulli, ' some ;' nul- lis non, * every.' Non nihil, ' something ;' nihil non, ' every thing.' Nonnunquam, ' sometimes ;' nunquam non, ' at all times.' V X03« But what chiefly deserves attention in Adverbs, is the degree of comparison and the mode with which they are joined. 1. Apprlme, admudum, vehementer, maxtme, perquam, valde, oppido, &ft and per in composition, are usually joined to the positive ; as, Utrtque nostrum gratum admodum feceris, You will do what is very agreeable to both of us. Cic. perquam puerile, very childish ; oppido pauci, very few; perfacile est, &c. In like manner, Parum, multum, nimium, tan- tum, quantum, aliquantum ; as. In rebus apertissimis, nimium longi sumus ; parum Jirmus, multum bonus. Cic. Adverbs in um are sometimes also joined to compara- tives ; as. Forma viri aliqiuintum amplior humdna. Liv. V x03» QuAM is joined to the positive or superlative in different senses; as, Qudm dijicile est ! How difficult it is ! Qudm crudelis, or Ut crudelis est I How cruel he is! Flens qudm familijar iter, very familiarly. Ter. So, qudm severh, very CONSTRUCTION OF ADVERBS. 247 severely. Cie. Qudm lath, very widely. Csbs. Tarn multa quam, &c. as many things as, &c. Qufim maximas potest copias armat, as great as possible. Sail. Quam maximas gratias agit, quam primum, quam scspissime. Cic. Qudm quisque pessimh fecit, tarn mxiximk tutus est. Sail. § 1 94« Facile, for Mud duhie, undoubtedly, clearly, is joined to superla- tives or words of a similar meaning ; as, Facile doctisstmus, facile princeps, or prce- cipuus. LoNGE, to comparatives or superlatives, rarely to the positive ; as, Longe etoquintissimus Plato. Cic. Pedihus longe melior Lycus. Virg. 2. Cum, when, is construed with the indicative or subjunctive, oftener with the latter ; Dum, whilst, or how long, with the indicative ; as, Dum hcBC aguntur ; AUgroto, dum anima est, spes esse dicitur. Cic. Donee eris felix, multos numerahis am'icos. Ovid. Dum and donec, for usquidum, until, sometimes with the indicative, and sometimes with the subjunctive ; as, Opperior, dum ista cognosco. Cic. Haud desinam donec perfecero. Ter. So quoad, for quamdiu, quantum, quatenus, as long, as much, as far as ; thus. Quoad Calilma fuit in urbe ; Quoad tibi cequum videbitur ; quoad possem and liceret ; quoad progredi potuerit amentia. Cic. But quoad, until, oftener with th# subjunctive; as, ThessaloniccB esse statueram, quoad atiquid ad me scriberes. Cic. but not always ; Non faciam finem rogandi, quoad nunciatum erit te fecisse. Cic. The pronoun ejus, with facere, or feri, is elegantly added to quoad ; as, quoad ejus facere poter is ; Quoad ejus fieri possit. Cic. Ejus is thought to be here governed by aliquid, or some such word understood. Quoad corpus, quoad animam, for secundum, or quod attinet ad corpus or antmam, as to the body or soul, is esteemed by the best grammarians not to be good Latin. 3. PosTQUAM or PosTEAauAM, after, is usually joined with the indie, antequam, PRiusQUAM, before: Simul, simulac, simul atque, simul ut, as soon as; Ubi, when, sometimes with the indie, and sometimes with the subj. ; as, Antequam dice or dicam. Cic. Simulac persensit. Virg. Simul ut videro Curionem. Cic. Hcbc ubi dicta dedit. Liv. Ubi semel quis perjuraverit, ei credi postea non oportet. Cic. So N^-, truly, as, Ncb ego homo sum infelix. Ter. Ncb tu, si id fecisses, melius famcB consuluisses. Cic. But ne, not, with the imperative, or more elegantly with the subjunctive; as, Ne jura. Plant. Ne post conferas culpam in me. Ter. Ne tot an- riorum felicitatem in unius horce dederis discrlmen. Liv. 4. Quasi, Ceu Tanquam, Perinde, when they denote resemblance, are joined with the indicative ; Fuit dim, quasi ego sum, senex. Plant. Adversi rupto ceu quondam turbine venii conjligunt. Virg. Hcbc omnia perinde sunt, ut aguntur. But when used ironically, they have the subjunctive ; as, Quasi de verbo, non de re laboretur. Cic. 5. TJtinam, o si, ut, for utinam, I wish, take the subjunctive ; as, Uttnam ea res ei voluptdti sit. Cic. O mihi prceteritos referat si Jupiter annos. Virg. Ut ilium dii deceque perdant. Ter. 6. Ut, when, or after, takes the indicative ; as, Ut discessit venit, &c. IT Also, for qudm, or quomodo, how I as, Ut valet ! Ut falsus animi est ! Ut scepe summa ingenia in occulto latent! Plant. IT Or when it simply denotes resemblance; as, Ut tute es, ita omnes censes esse. Plant. Uln this sense it sometimes has the subjunctive; as, Ut sementem feceris, ita metes. Cic. 7. QuiN, for CUR NON, takes the indie, as, Quin continetis vocem indicem stultitice vestrcB ? Cic. IT For Imo, nay, or but, the indie, or imperat. as, Quin est paratum argentum; quin tu hoc audi. Ter. IF For Ut non, qui, qu^,, q,uod non, or quo MINUS, the subjunctive; as, Nulla tarn facjlis res, quin difficilis fiet, quum invitus facias. Ter. Nemo est, quin mdlit ; Facere non possum, quin ad te mittam, I cannot help sending ; Nihil abest, quin sim miserrtmus. Cic. 248 GOVERNMENT OF ADVERBS. THE GOVERNMENT OF ADVERBS. § 195© XL. Some adverbs of time, place, and quantity, govern the genitive ; as, Pridik ejus diet. The day before that day. Ubique gentium, Every where. Sath est verhorum, There is enough of words. 1. Adverbs of time governing the genit. are, Interea, postea, inde, tunc; as, In- terea loci, in the mean time ; postea loci, afterwards ; inde loci, then ; tunc temporis, at that time. 2. Of place, Ubi, and quo, with their compounds, idfique, ubicunque, tibivis, ubiubi, &c. Also, Eo, hue, huccvie, unde, usquam, nusquam, longe, ibidem ; as, Ubi, quo, qnovis, &c. also usquam, nusquam, unde terrarum, or gentium ; longh gentium : ibidem loci, eo audacice, vecardicR, miseriarum, &c. to that pitch of bold- ness, madness, misery, &c. 3. Of quantity, Abunde^ affatim, largiter, nimis, satis, parum, minrmd ; as, Abunde gloricp, affatim divitiarum, largiter auri, satzs eloquenticB, sapientim parum est illi or Itabet, Pie has enough of glory, riches, &c. Minimh gentium, by no means. V lyCj* Some add Ergo and Instar ; but these are properly indeclinable nouns. JSrg^o (the Greek Epyw) means *an account of,' 'for the sake of,' and is similar to gratia ; as, ejus victories ergo, Nep. an account of that victory ; honoris ergo, Cic. It may be considered in the ablative case by Rule 49. Instar, 'simili- tude,' 'likeness,' 'worth,' 'shape,' may be considered in the accusative, and governed by ad understood ; as, amo eum instar patris, ' I love him like a father;' that is, ad mstor, 'according to the likeness.' Instar montis equum cedijicant, 'they make a horse as great as a mountain,' that is, ad instar, ' according to the size,' &c. See Etymology $ 54, page 55. y if^Te Many adverbs of place, as, ubi, ubinam., ubivis, quo, quavis, aliquo, usquam, nusquam, &c. are followed by the genitives Gentium, Terrarum, Loci, Locorum, which are not in general superfluous, but express an emphasis, as in English we say, ' where in the world is he V for ' where is he ?' &c., of which the former is more emphatical, and implies more astonishment ; as, ubi terrarum sumus, * where in the world are we ?' Nihil est virtute amabilius, quam qui adeptvs fuerif, ubicunque erit gentium, a nobis diligeter, Cic. Nat. Deor. 'Nothing is more lovely than virtue, and for him who practises it, in whatever part of the world he may 6e, do we feel the strongest afiection.' Quo amentice, Liv. ' to what extent,' or * degree of madness.* Obs. 1. These adverbs are thought to govern the genitive, because they imply in themselves the force of a substantive ; as, PotenticB gloricrque abunde adeptus, the same with abundantiam glories; or, res, locus, or negotium, and a preposition, may be understood ; as, Interea loci, i. e. inter ea negotia loci ; Ubi terrarum, for in quo loco terrarum. Obs. 2. We usually say, pridie, postridie ejus diei, seldom diem ; but pridik^ postridih Kalendas, Nonas, Idus, ludus Apollindres, natdlem ejus, absolutionem ejus, &c., rarely Kalenddrum, &c. Obs. 3. En and ecce are construed either with the nominative or accusative; as, En hostis, or hosfem ; Ecce miserum hominem. Cic. Sometimes a dative is added ; as, Ecce tibi Strata. Ter. Ecce duas (scil. aras,) tibi, Daphni. Virg. En tibi. Liv. In like manner is construed hem put for ecce ; as, Hem tibi Davum, Ter. But in all these examples some verb must be understood. CONSTRUCTION OP PRErOSITIONS. 249 § 198« XLI. Some derivative adverbs govern the case of their primitives ; as, Omnium opCimk loquitur, He speaks the best of all. Convenienter naturcB, Agreeably to nature. Venit obvidm ei, He came to meet him. Froxtme castris, or castra. Next the camp. Obs. 1. Thus also, by Rule XI. Omnium optime, Scspissimh omnium, diutissimk omnium, although the superlative of the two last, whence the adverbs come, are not used. By Rule XII. congruenter natures convenienterque vivere. Cic. Huic obviam civilas processerat. Cic. 11. THE CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 1. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. § 199. XLII. The Prepositions ad^ adversus^ ad- versum^ ante^ apud^ circa^ circum^ circiter^ cis^ citra^ contra^ erga^ extra^ infra^ inter ^ intra^ juxta^ ob^ penes, per, pone, post, prceter, prope, propter, secundum, secus, supra, trans, ultra, usque, versus, govern the Accusative. 2. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ABLATIVE. § 200» XLIII. The prepositions a, ah, als, abs- que, clam, coram, cum, de, e, ex, palam, prcz, pro, sine, tenus, govern the Ablative. Obs. 1. To prepositions governing the ablative is commonly added Procul; as, Procul domo, far from home; but here a is understood, which is also often ex- pressed ; as, Procul a patria, Virg. Procul ah ostentatidne. Quinct. Culpa est procul a me. Ter. 3. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACC. AND ABL. § 201« XLIV. The prepositions in, sub, super, and subter, govern the accusative, when motion to a place is signified ; but w^hen motion or rest in a place is signified, m and sub govern the ablative, super and subter either the accusative or ablative. IN, when it signifies into, governs the accusative ; when it signifies in or among-, it governs the ablative. Obs. 1. When prepositions do not govern a case, they are reckoned adverbs. 250 CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. Such arc Ante, circa, clam, coram, contra, infra, juxta, patam, pone, post, proptevi secus, sutler, super, supra, ulta. But in most of these the case seems to be implied in the sense ; as, Lovgo post tempore venit, sc. post id tempus. Adversus, juxta, propter, secus, secundum, and clam, are by some thought to be always adverbs, having a preposition understood when they govern a case. So other adverbs also are construed with the ace. or abl. ; as, Intus cellam, for intra. Liv. Intus templo divum, sc. in. Virg. Simul his, sc. cum. Hor. Obs. 2. A and e are only put before consonants ; ab and ex, usually before vowels, and sometimes also before consonants ; as, A patre, e regione ; ah initio, ab rege ; ex urbe, ex parte ; abs before q and t ; as, abs te, abs qwivis homine. Ter. Some phrases are used only with e ; as, e longinquo, e regione, e vestigio, e re mea est, &c. Some only with ex ; as, Ex compacto, ex tempore, magna ex parte, &c. Obs. 3. Prepositions are often understood ; as, Devenere locos, scil. ad ; It portis, sc. ex. Virg. Nunc id prodeo, scil. ob or propter. Ter. Maria aspera juro, scil. per. Virg. Ut se loco movere non possent, scil. e or de. Cses. Vina promens dolio, scil. ex. Hor. Quid illo facias ? Quid me fet, sc. de. Ter. And so in English^ Show me the book ; Get me some paper, that is, to me, for me. Obs. 4. We sometimes find the word to which the preposition refers, suppressed ; as, Circum Concordice, sc. oedem. Sail. Round St. PauVs, namely, church ; Campum Sielldtem divisit extra, sortem ad viginti millibus, civium, i. e. civium millibus ad viginti millia. Suet. But this is most frequently the case after prepositions in composition ; thus, Emittere servum, scil. manu. Plant. Evomere virus, scil. ore. Cic. Educcre copias, scil. castris. Cges. § 302« XLV. A preposition in composition often governs the same case, as when it stands by itself; as, Adeamus scholam, Let us go to the school. Exedmus schola, Let us go out of the school. Obs. 1. The preposition with which the verb is compounded, is often repeated ; as, Adire ad scholam; Exire ex schola; Adgredi aliquid, or ad aliquid; ingredi oratidnem, or in oratidnem ; inducere anfmum, and" in animum ; evadere undis and ex undis: decedere de suojure, decedere via or de via ; expellere, ejicere, extermindre, extrudere, exturbdre urbe, and ex urbe. Some do not repeat the preposition ; as, AJfdri, alloqui, allatrdre aliquem, not ad aliquem. So, Allucre urbem; accolere Jhimen ; circumveriire aliquem ; prceter'ire injuriam ; abdicdre se magistrdtu, (also, abdicdre magistrdtum ;) transducere exerdtum jluvium, &c. Others are only con- strued with the preposition ; as, Accurrere ad ahquem, adhortdri ad aliquid, incidere in morbum, avocdre a studiis, avertere ab incepto, &c. Some admit other prepositions ; as, Ablre, demigrdre loco ; and a, de, ex loco , abstrahere aliquem, a, de, or e conspeclu ; Desistere sententia, a or de sententia ; Excidere manibus, de or c manibus, &c. Obs. 2. Some verbs compounded with e or ex govern either the ablative or accusative ; as, Egredi urbe, or urbem, sc. extra ; egrcdi extra vallum. Nep. Evadere insidiis or insidias. Patrios excedere muros. Lucan. Scelerdta excedcre terra. Virg. Eldbi ex manibus ; eldbi pugnam aut vincTda. Tac. Obs. 3. This rule does not take place unless when the preposition may be dis- joined from the verb, and put before the noun by itself; as, AUoquor patrem, or loquor ad patrem. CONSTRUCTION OF INTERJECTIONS CIRCUMSTANCES. 251 III. THE CONSTRUCTION OF INTERJECTIONS. §203. XLVL The interjections O, heu, and proh^ are construed with the nominative, accusa- tive, or vocative ; as, O vir bonus or bone ! O good man ! Heu me miserum ! Ah wretched me ! So, O virforlis atque amicus! Ter. Heu vanitas humana! Plin. Heu miserande puer ! Virg. O prceddrum custodem omum (ut aiunt) lupum ! Cic. § 204. XLVII. Hei and vce govern the dative ; as, Hei mihi ! Ah mo. Vcb vobis ! Woe to you ! Obs. 1. Heus and ohe are joined only with the vocative ; as, Hcus Syre. Ter. Ohe libelle ! Martial. Proh or pro, ah, vah, hem, have generally either the accusa- tive or vocative ; as, Proh hominumfidem ! Ter. Proh Sancte Jupiler ! Cic. Hem astutias! Ter. Obs. 2. Interjections cannot, properly, have either concord or government. They are only mere sounds excited by passion, and have no just connexion with any other part of a sentence. Whatever case, therefore, is joined with them, must depend on some other word understood, except the vocative, which is always placed absolutely; thus, Heu me miserum! stands for Heu! qudm me miserum scntio ! Hei mihi ! for Hei ! malum est mihi ! Proh dolor ! for Proh ! quantus est dolor ! and so in other examples. THE CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. The circumstances, which in Latin are expressed in different cases, are, 1. The Price of a thing. 2. The Cause, Manner and Instrument, 3. Place, 4. Measure and Distance, 5. Time, 1. PRICE. § 205o XLVIIL The price of a thing is put in the ablative ; as, Emi librum duobus ass'ibuSy I bought a book for two shillings. Consdlit ialento, It cost a talent- So, Asse carum. est ; vile viginti minis ; auro venale, &c. Nocet empta dolore vduptas. Hor. Spem prelio non emam. Ter. Plurimi auro veneunl honores. Ovid. § 206« ir These genitives, tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, are ex- cepted ; as, Quanii constiiit, How much cost it ? | Asse et pluris, a shilling and moi-e. Obs. 1. When the substantive is added, they are put in the ablative; as,parvo preiio, impenso pretio vendere. Cic. 252 CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. Obs. 2. Magna, permagno, parvo, paulTdo, miriimo, plurimo, are ofren used with- out the substantive; as, Permagno constitit, soil, pretio. Cic. Hen quanfo regnis nox stetit una tuis ? Ovid. Fast. ii. 812, We also say, Emi cark, carius, carissime; bene, melius, opf^tme ; male, pejus, villus, vilissime ; valde, cark, cesfimas : Emit do- mum prope dimidio carius, quam cesiimubat. Cic. Obs. 3. The ablative of price is properly governed by the preposition pro under- stood, which is likewise sometimes expressed ; as, Dum pro argenteis decern aureus unus valeret. Liv. 2. MANNER AND CAUSE. § 307. XLIX. The cause, manner, means, and instrument are put in the ablative ; as, PaJleo metUf I am pale for fear. Fecit suo more. He did it after his own way. Scribo calamo, I write with a pen. So, Ardet dolore ; pallescere culpa ; cestudre dubitatione ; gestire voluptute or secundis rehus : Confectus morbo ; affectus beneficiis, gravisstmo supplicio ; insignis pietdle ; deierior licentia : Pietdte jilius, consiliis pater, amore f rater ; hence, Rex Dei gratia : Paritur pax belle. Nep. Procedere lento gradu ; Acceptus regio appa- rdfu: Nulla sono convertttur annus. Juv. Jam veniet tacito curva senecta pede. Ovid. Percutere securi, defendere saxis, conjigere sagittis, &c. Obs. 1. The ablative is here governed by some preposition understood. Before the manner and cause, the preposition is sometimes expressed ; as, De more matrum locuta est. Virg. Magno cum metu ; Hac de causa ; Prce mcErcre, formidtne, &c. But hardly ever before the instrument ; as, Vulnerdre altquem gladio, not cum gla- dio ; unless among the poets, who sometimes add a or ah ; as, Trajectus ah ense. Ovid. Obs. 2. When any thing is said to be in company with another, it is called the ablative of concomitancy, and has the preposition cum usually added ; as, Obsedit curiam cum gladiis ; Ingressus est cum gladio. Cic. Obs. 3. Under this rule are comprehended several other circumstances, as the matter of which any thing is made, and what is called by grammarians the Ad- junct, that is, a noun in the ablative joined to a verb or adjective, to express the character or quality of the person or thing spoken of; as, Capitolium saxo quadrdto construclum. Liv. Floruit acumtnc ingenii. Cic. Pallet opwus, valet armis, viget memoria, fama nobtlis, &c. JEger pedibus. When we express the matter of which any thing is made, the preposition is usually added ; as, Templum de mar- more, seldom mamtoris ; Pocvlum ex auro factum. Cic. 3. PLACE. The circumstances of place may be reduced to four particulars. — 1. The place where, or in which. 2. The place whither , or to which. 3. The place whence or from which. 4. The place by, or through which. AT or IN a place is put in the genitive ; unless the noun be of the third declension, or of the plural number, and then it is expressed in the ablative. TO a place is put in the accusative ; FROM or BY a place in the ablative. CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. 253 1. The place Where. §>208. L. When the place where^ or in which^ is spoken of, the name of a town is put in the geni- tive ; as, Vixit RonuB, He lived at Rome. Moriuus est Londmi, He died at London. § 209« But if the name of a town be of the third declension or plural number, it is expressed in the ablative ; as, Habitat Carthagine, He dwells at Carthage. Studuit Farisiis, He studied at Paris. Obs. 1. When a thing is said to be done, not in the place itself, but in its neighbourhood or near it, we always use the preposition ad or apud ; as. Ad or apud Trojam, At or near Troy. Obs. 2. The name of a town, when put in the ablative, is here governed by the preposition in understood ; but if it be in the genitive, we must supply in urbe or in oppldo. Hence, when the name of a town is joined with an adjective or common noun, the preposition is generally expressed : thus, we do not say, Natus est RomcB urhis Celebris : but either Romcs in celebri urbe, or in RomcB celebri urbe ; or in Rmntt celebri urbe, or sometimes, Romce celebri urbe. In like manner we usually say, Ha- hitat in urbe Carthaglne, with the preposition. We likewise find Habitat Cartha- ftni, which is sometimes the termination of the ablative, when the question is made y ubi? 2. The Place Whither. § 210* LI. When the place whither^ or to whichj is spoken of, the name of a town is put in the accu- sative ; as, Venit Romam, He came to Rome. Profectus est Athenas, He went to Athens. Obs. 1. We find the dative also used among the poets, but more seldom; as, Carthagini nuncios mittam. Herat. Obs. 2. Names ojf towns are sometimes put in the accusative, after verbs of telling and giving, where motion to a place is implied ; as, Romam erat nunciatum. The report was carried to Rome. Liv. Hcec nunciant domum Albani. Id. Mes- sdnam literas dedit. Cic. 3. The Place Whence. § 211« Lll. When the place whence^ or from which^ or the place by or through which, is spoken of, the name of a town is put in the ablative ; as, Discessit Corintho, He departed from Corinth. Laodicea iter faciebat, He went through Laodicea. Obs. When motion by or through a place is signified, the preposition per is com- monly used; as, Per Thebas iter fecit. JMep. 22 254 CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCUMSTANCES. Domus and Rus, § 213» LIII. Domus and rus are construed the same way as names of towns ; as, Manet domi, He stays at home. Domum revertitur. He returns home. Domo arcessitus sum, I am called from home. Vivit rure, or more frequently ruri, He lives in the country. Rediit rure, He is returned from the country. Abiit rus, He is gone to the country. Obs. 1. Humif militice, and hellif are likewise construed in the genitive, as names of towns ; thus, Domi et militice, or belli, At home and abroad. Jacet humi, He lies on the ground. Obs. 2. When Domus is joined with an adjective, we commonly use a preposi- tion ; as, In domo paternh, not domi •paternce : So, Ad domum paternnm : Ex domo paterna. Unless when it is joined with these possessives, Meus, tuus, suus, nosier, vester, regius, and alienus ; as, Domi mece vixit. Cic. Alius, alium domes suas in- vltant. Sail. Aurum atque argcntum, et alia, qucB prima ducunlur, domum regiam comportant. Sail. Obs. 3. Rus and rure, even with an adjective, are found without a preposition ; as, equum conscendit, et rus urbanum contendit. Justin. Rure is found with a pre- position ; as, ex rure in urbem revertcbatur, Cic. The plural rura, is always pre- ceded by a preposition ; as, Jam ubi vos dilapsi domos, et in rura vestra eritis, Liv. Obs. 4. When domus has another substantive in the genitive after it, the preposi- tion is sometimes used, and sometimes not ; as, Deprehensus est domi, domo, or in domo CcBsaris, §213« LIV. To names of countries, provinces, and all other places, except towns, the preposition is commonly added ; as, When the question is made by, Ubi ? Natus in Italia, in Latio, in urbe, ^c. Quo ? Abiit in Italiam, in Latium, in or ad urbem, ^c. Unde ? Rediit ex Italia, e Latio, ex urbe, <^c. Qua ? Transit per Italiam, per Latium, per urbem, ^c. Obs. 1. A preposition is often added to names of towns; as, In Roma, for RomcB ; ad Romam, ex Roma, &c. § 3X4« Peto always governs the accusative as an active verb, witliout a preposition ; as, Petivit Egyptum, He went to Egypt. Obs. 2. Names of countries, provinces, &c. are sometimes construed without the preposition, like names of towns ,• as, Pompeius Cypri visus est. Caes. CretcD jussit considere Apollo. Virg. Non Lybitr, for in Lybia, non an(k Tyro, for Tyri. Id. ^n. iv. 36. Venit Sardiniam. Cic. Rom The man whom I pity. cujus me mish'et, j cujus or cuja interest, &c. whose interest it is, &c. Rem. 1. If no nominative come between the relative and the verb, the relative will be the nominative to the verb. Rem. 2. But if a nominative come between the relative and the verb, the relative will be of that case, which the verb or noun follow- ing", or the preposition going before, usually governs. Thus the construction of the relative requires an acquaintance with most of the foregoing rules of syntax, and may serve as an exercise on all of them. Obs. 1. The relative must always have an antecedent expressed or understood, and therefore may be considered as an adjective placed be- tween two cases of the same substantive, of which the one is always expressed, generally the former ; as, Vir qui (vir) legit ; vir quem (virum) amo : Sometimes the latter ; as, Quam quis- que norit artem, in hac (arte) se exerceat. Cic. Eunuchum, quem dedisti nobis, quas turhas dedit. Ter. sc. Eunuchus. Sometimes both cases are expressed ; as, Erant omnmo duo itinera, quibus itineribus domo exire possent CaBs. Sometimes, though more rarely, both cases are omitted ; as, Sunt, quos genus hoc minimejuvat, for sunt homines, quos homines, &c. Hor. Obs. 2. When the relative is placed between two substantives of different genders, it may agree in gender with either of them, though most commonly with the former ; as, Vultus quem dixere chaos. Ovid. Est locus in carcere, quod Tullianum appella- tur. Sail. Animal, quem vocdmus homtnem. Cic. Cogito id quod res est. Ter. If a part of a sentence be the antecedent, the relative is always put in the neuter gender ; as, Pompeius se afflixit, quod mihi est summo dolori, sell. Pompeium se affii' gere. Cic. Sometimes the relative does not agree in gender with the antecedent, but with some synonymous word implied , as, Scelus qui, for scelcstus. Ter. Abun- dantia edrum rerum, qucB mortdles prima putant, scil. negotia. Sail. Vel virtus tua me vel vicinitas, quod ego in aliqua parte amiciticB puto, facit ut te moneam, scil. negolium. Ter. In omni Africa, qui agebant ; for in omnibus Afris. Sallust. Jug. 89. Non dijffidentia futuri, quce imperavisset for quod. lb. 100. Obs. 3. When the relative comes after two words of different per- sons, it agrees with the first or second person rather than the third ; as. Ego sum vir, qui facio, scarcely facit. In English it sometimes agrees with either ; as, / am the man, who make, or maketh. But when once the person of the relative is fixed, it ought to be continued through the rest of the sentence ; thus it is proper to say, " I am the man who takes care of your interest," but if I add, "at the expense of my own," it would be improper. It ought either to be, " his own," or "who take." In like manner, we may say, "I thank you who gave, who did love," &c. But it is improper to say, " I thank thee, who gave, who did love ;" it should be " who gavest, who didst love." In 22 * 258 CONSTRUCTION OF RELATIVES. no part of English syntax are inaccuracies committed more frequently than in this. Beginners are particularly apt to fall into them, in turn- ing Latin into English. The reason of it seems to be our applying thou or you, thy or your, promiscuously, to express the second person singular, whereas the Latins almost always expressed it by tu and tuus, Obs. 4. The antecedent is often implied in a possessive adjective ; as, Omnes lauddre fortunas meas, qui haberem gnatum tali ivgenio prcedttum. Ter. Sometimes the antecedent must be drawn from the sense of the foregoing words ; as, Came pluit, quern imbrem aves rapuisse feruntur ; i. e. pluit imbrem earns, quern, imbrem, &c. Liv. Si tempus est uUum Jure hominis necandi, quas mulla sunt ; scil. tempura. Cic. Obs. 5. The relative is sometimes entirely omitted ; as, TJrbs antlqua fuit : Tyrii tenuere coldni, scil. quam or earn. Virg. Or, if once expressed, is afterwards omitted, so that it must be supplied in a different case ; as, Bocchus cum peditibus, quosjilius ejus adduxerat, neque in priore pugna adfuerant, Romanos invadunt : for quique in priore pugna non adfuerant. Sail. In English the relative is often omitted, where m Latin it must be expressed; as, TTie letter I wrote, for the letter which I wrote; The man I love, to wit, whom. But this omission of the relative is generally impro- per, particularly in serious discourse. Obs. 6. The case of the relative sometimes seems to depend on that of the ante- cedent ; as, C7im aPiquid agas eorum, quorum consuesti, for quce consuesti agere, or quorum aliquid agere consuesti. Cic. Restitue in quern me accepisti locum, for in locum, in quo. Ter. And. iv. 1. 58. But such examples rarely occur. Obs. 7. The adjective pronouns, ille, ipse, iste, hie, is, and idem, in their construc- tion, resemble that of the relative qrii ; as, Liber ejus, His or her book ; Vita eorum. Their life, when applied to men ; Vita edrum. Their life, when applied to women. By the improper use of these pronouns in English, the meaning of sentences is often rendered obscure. Obs. 8. The interrogative or indefinite adjectives, qualis, quantus, quotus, &c. are also sometimes construed like relatives ; as. Fades est, qualem decet esse sororum. Ovid. But these have commonly other adjectives either expressed or understood, which answer to them ; as, Tanta est muLtitudo, quantam urbs capere potest : and are often applied to different substantives ; as, Quates sunt cives, talis est civitas. Cic. Obs. 9. The relative who in English is applied only to persons, and which to things and irrational animals ; but formerly which was likewise applied to persons ; as. Our father, which art in heaven ; and whose, the genitive of who, is also used sometimes, though perhaps improperly, for of v)hieh. That is used indifferently for persons and things. What, when not joined with a substantive, is only applied to things, and includes both the antecedent and the relative, being the same with that which, or the thing which ; as, Tliat is what he wanted ; that is, the thing which he wanted Obs. 10. The Latin relative often cannot be translated literally into English, on account of the different idioms of the two languages ,• as. Quod cum ifa essef. When that was so ; not, which when it was so, because then there would be two nomina- tives to the verb was, which is improper. Sometimes the accusative of the relative in Latin must be rendered by the nominative in English ; as, Quem dieunt me esse ? Who do they say that I am? not whom. Quem dieunt adventure, Who do they say is coming ? Obs. 11. As the relative is alv/ays connected with a differont verb from the antecedent, it is usually construed with the subjunctive mode, unless wiion tlie meaning of tlie verb is expressed positively; as, Audlre cupio, quce legcris, 1 want - CONSTRUCTION OP RELATIVES. 259 to hear, what you have read ; that is, what perhaps or probably you may have read ; Audlre cupio, qucB legisti, I want to hear, what you (actually or in fact) have read. Obs. 12. To the construction of the Relative may be subjoined that of the ANSWER TO A QUESTION. The answer is commonly put in the same case with the question ; asi, Qui vocare? Geta, sc. vocor. Quid quceris? Lihrum, so. qucero. Quota hord venisti ? Sexla. Sometimes the construction is varied ; as, Cujus est liber ? Meus, not mei. Quanti emptus est ! Decern asstbus. Damnatusne es furii ? Imo alio cri' mine. Often the answer is made by other parts of speech than nouns ; as, Quid agitur? Staturr sc. a me, a nobis. Quis fecit? Nescio: Aiunt Petrumfecisse. Quo- modo vales ? Benh, male. Scripsist'ine ? Scripsi, ita, etiam, immo, &c. An vidisti ? No7i vidi, non, mimme, &c. Chcerea tuam vestem detraxit tibi ? Factum. Et ea e$t indulus ? Factum. Ter. Most of the Rules of Syntax may thus be exemplified hi the form of questions and answers. / \ THE RELATIVE WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 1 To ascertain when the Relative pronoun should be joined to the In- dicative and when to the Subjunctive mode, is one of the greatest diffi- culties which the Latin language presents to the student of the classic^. The following Rules will be found, it is believed, to embrace ever/ thing important upon the subject. I § 220* Rule 1. When the Relative clause expresses no senti- ment of the writer, but refers that sentiment, directly or indirectly, to the persons of whom he is speaking, the Relative must be joined with the Subjunctive mode. Thus : Quoniam gemini essent, nee aeta- tis verecundia discrimen facere posset, ut Dii quorum tutelae ea ioca essent, auguriis legerent, qui nomen novae urbi daret, Li v. 1. 6. Th|e relative clause expresses a sentiment of the founders of the city, and is much the same as if the historian had said, ' That the gods, under whose protection they conceived, those places were,' &c. The follow- ing passage will still further illustrate this distinction. " Thus bom and thus elected king, he has favoured the meanest sort of mankind^ whence he himself is sprung ; and the burdens, which were formerly common, he has laid on the principal citizens." These, supposed to b0 the very words of Tarquin, addressed to the Senators, would be thuS rendered, " Ita natus, ita creatus rex, fautor infimi generis hominumi ex quo EST ipse, omnia onera, quce communia quondam FUE-\- R UNT, in primores civitdtis inclinavit" But as the historian (Liv j 1. 47.) has not introduced Tarquin as addressing the senate in his ownl words, but has merely detailed the sentiments which he expressed, the passage reads thus, — the verbs being in the subjunctive mode — Ita na- turn, ita creatum regem, fautorem infimi generis hominum, ex quoi ipse SIT, onera, quce communia quondam FUERINT, inclinasse in primores civitatis, He said, *' that being thus born," &c. I § 22 !• Rule 2. The Relative pronoun is joined to the Subjuncj tive mode, when the relative clause expresses the reason, or cause of] the action, state, or event, and may generally be rendered in Englisli| 260 CONSTRUCTION OF C01!ffJUNCTI0NS. by the preposition /n, and the imperfect participle. Thus, * Hannibal did wrong in wintering at Capua,' that is, * because he wintered,' Male fecit, Hannibal, qui Capuce hiemarit. If we should say, Male fecit, qui hiemavit, we impute error to the person who wintered, but do not express the error as consisting in his wintering. § 322» Rule 3. When the Relative pronoun follows an interro- gative clause, in which the interrogative is equivalent to an affirmation or negation, the relative is joined with the Subjunctive mode. Thus, Quis est enim., cui non perspicua sint ilia ? Cic. * Who is there to whom these things are not clear ] So also after a negation which ex- presses an affirmation ; as, nemo est, qui haud intelligat, * there is no man who does not understand.' But when a sentence implies a ques- tion put for information, the Relative takes the Indicative mode ; as, Quis est qui JSsculapium salutat. Plant. Quis est qui salutet would signify * who is there that salutes,' implying ' nobody salutes.' Again, if we say, Nemo est qui ita existimat, it strictly means, ' he who thinks so is nobody,' that is, ' a person of no consequence ;' here nemo est is the predicate, and the relative clause, qui ita existimat, the subject. If we say, nemo est qui ita existimet, it means, * there is no one who thinks so,' where nemo is the subject, and the other clause the predicate. § 333« Rule 4. The Relative is joined to the Subjunctive mode, when, in order to impart greater emphasis, a periphrasis with the verb ^um is employed instead of simply the nominative with the principal verb. Thus, instead of saying, Nonnulli dicunt, we say, Sunt qui dicant, Cic. * there are persons who say.' This phraseology is em- ployed to excite the, particular attention of the reader, as the word there is frequently employed in English. Fuerint qui censerent, * there have been persons who thought.' § 324:» Rule 5. When Is qui, Ille qui. Hie qui, are used for ' such,' ' that,' or in other words, when Qui is used for Ut ego, Ut tu, Ut ille, it is joined with the Subjunctive" mode. Atque ill^e dissen- tiones erant hujus modi, Quirites, q,v2E . . . pertinerent. Cic. ' The dissentions were such that,' or * of that kind that,' &c. THE CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. § 225» LVIII. The conjunctions, et^ ac, atque, nee, neque, aut, vel, and some others, couple similar cases and modes ; as, Honora patrem et matrem, Honour father and mother. Nee legit nee scribit, He neither reads nor writes. Obs. 1. To this rule belong particularly the copulative and disjunc- tive conjunctions; as likewise, qudm, nisi, prceterquam, an; and also adverbs of likeness ; as, ceu, tanquam, quasi, ut, &lc. as. Nullum pr(Fmium a vohis postulo, prcBterquam hujus diU memoria?n. Cic. Gloria vir tutem tanquam umbra sequitiir. Id. CONSTEUCTION OP CCNJtJXCTlONS. 2C1 Obs. 2. These conjunctions properly connect the different members of a sentence together, and are hardly ever applied to single words, unless when some other word is understood. Hence, if the construc- tion of the sentence be varied, different cases and modes may be coupled together; as, Interest mea et reipublicce ; Constitit asse et pluris ; Slve es Ro- mce, she in Eplro ; Decius cum se devoveret, et in mediam aciem irruebat, Cic. Vir magni ingenii summdque industrid ; Neque per vim, neque insidiis. Sail. Tecum habita, et noris, qudm sit tibi curta supellex. Pers. Obs. 3. When et, aut, vel, sive, or nee, are joined to different mem- bers of the same sentence, without connecting it particularly to any former sentence, the first et is rendered in English by both or likewise ; aut or vel, by either ; the first sive, by whether ; and the first nee, by neither; as. Et legit, et scrihit ; so, turn legit, turn scribit ; or cum legit, turn scr'ibit, He both reads and writes ; Sive legit, s've scribit. Whether he reads or writes ; Jacere qua vera, qua falsa ; Increpare qua consules ipsos, qua exercitum, To upbraid both the consuls and the army. Liv. § 236. LIX. Two or more substantives singu- lar coupled by a conjunction, (as, et^ ac, atque, &c.) have an adjective, verb, or relative plural ; as, Petrus et Joannes, qui sunt docti, Peter and John, who are learned. Obs. 1. If the substantives be of different persons, the verb plural must agree with the first person rather than the second, and with the second rather than the third ; as. Si tu et Tullia valetis, ego et Cicero valemus, If you and Tullia are well, I and Cicero are well. Cic. In English, the person speaking usually puts himself last ; thus. You and I read; Cicero and I are well^ but in Latin the person who speaks is generally put first ; thus. Ego et tu legimus. Obs. 2. If the substantives are of different genders, the adjective or relative plural must agree with the masculine rather than the feminine or neuter ; as. Pater et mater, qui sunt mortui ; but this is only ap- plicable to beings which may have life. The person is sometimes im- plied ; as, Athendrum et Cratippi, ad quos, &c. Propter summam doctoris auctoritdtem et urbis, quorum alter, &c. Cic. Where AthencB and urbs are put for the learned men of Athens. So in substantives ; as, Ad PtolemcBum Cleopatramque reges legdti missi^ i. e. the king and queen. Liv. Obs. 3. If the substantives signify things without life, the adjective or relative plural must be put in the neuter gender; as, Divitice, decus^ gloria, in oculis sita sunt. Sail. The same holds, if any of the substantives signify a thing without life ; because when we apply a quality or join an adjective to several substantives of different 262 CONSTRUCTION OF CONJUNCTIONS. genders, wo must reduce the substantives to some certain class, under which they . may all be comprehended, that is, to what is called their Genus. Now, the Genus or class, which comprehends under it both persons and things, is that of substan- tives or beings in general, which are neither masculine nor feminine. To express this, the Latin grammarians use the word Negotia. Obs. 4. The adjective or verb frequently agrees with the nearest substantive or nominative, and is understood to the rest ; this is by the figure called Zeugma. Et ego el Cicero mens flagitdhit Cic. Sociis et rege recepto. Virg. Et ego in culpa sum, et tu, Both I am in the fault, and you ; or, Et ego et tu es in culpa, Both I and you are in the fault. Nihil hie nisi carmina, de.sunt ; or, nihil hie deest nisi carmlna. Omnia, quibus turbari solita erat civitas, domi discordia, /oris helium exortum ; Duo millia et quadringenti ccBsi. Li v. This construction is most usual when the different substantives resemble one another in sense ; as. Mens, ratio, et consilium, in sembus est. Understanding, reason, and prudence, is in old men. Quibus ipse me'ique ante Larem proprium vescor, for vescimur. llorat. Obs. 5. The plural is sometimes used after the preposition cum put for et ; as, Remo cum fratre Qiiirmus jura dahunt. Virg. The conjunction is frequently understood ; as, dum ceias, metus, magister prohibebant. Ter. Frons, oculi, vultus scBpe mentiuntur. Cic. The different examples comprehended under this rule are commonly referred to the figure Syllepsis. § 327. LX. The conjunctions ut^ quo^ licet ^ ne^ utinam^ and dummodo^ are for the most part joined to the subjunctive mode ; as, L^o ut discam, I read that I may leam. UCi?iam saperes, I wish you were wise. Obs. 1. All interrogatives, when placed indefinitely, have after them the subjunctive mode. Whether they be adjectives, as, Quantus, qualis, quoins, quotuplex, uter ; Pro- nouns, as, quis and cujas; Adverbs, as, Ubi, quo, unde, qua, quorsum, quamdiu, qumnditdum, quamprtdem, qnoties, cur, quare, quamobrem, dum, utrum, quomodo, qui, ut quam, quantopere ; or Conjunctions, as, we, an, anne, annon : Thus, Quis est ? Who is it ? Nescio quis sit, I do not know who it is. An venturus est ! Nescio, dufnto, an venturus sit. Vides ut alta stet nive candidum Soracie ? Ilor. But these words are sometimes joined with the indicative ; as, Scio quid ego. Plant. Haud scio, an amat. Ter. Vide avaritia quidfacit. Id. Vides qudm turpe est. Cic. V 228« 11" In like manner the relative QUI in a continued discourse ; as, Nihil est quod Deus efficere non possit. Quis est, qui utilia fugiat ? Cic. Or when joined with auiPPE or utpote; Neque Antonius procul aberat, ufpote qui sequeretur, &c. Sail. But these are sometimes, although more rarely, joined with the indi- cative. So, est qui, sunt qui, est quando or ubt, &c. are joined with the indicative or subjunctive Note. Haud scio an r6cte dixerim is the same with dico, affirmo. Cic. Obs. 2. When any thing doubtful or contingent is signified, conjunc- tions and indefinites are usually construed with the subjunctive; but CONSTRUCTION OF COMPARATIVES. 263 when a more absolute or determinate sense is expressed, with the indi- cative mode ; as, If lie is to do it ; Although he was rich, &c. Obs. 3. ETSI, TAMETSr and TAMENETSf, QUANQUAM, in the beginning of a sentence, have the indicative ; but elsewhere they also talie the sabjunctive ; ETIAMSI and QUAMVIS commonly have the subjunctive, and UT, although, always has it ; as, Ut quceras, non reperies. Cic. QUOiNIAM, QUANDO, QUAN- DOQUIDEM, are usually construed with the indicative : SI, SIN, NE, NISI, SI- QUIDEM, QUOD, and QUIA, sometimes with the indicative, and sometimes with the subjunctive. Dum, for dummodo, provided, has always the subjunctive; as, Oder hit dum metuant. Cic. And QUIPPE, for nam, always the indicative ; as, Quippe vetor fads. Obs. 4. Some conjunctions have their correspondent conjunctions belonging to them ; so that, in the following member of the sentence, the latter answers fco the former : thus, when etsi^ tametsi, or quamvis, although, are used in the former member of a sentence, tamen, yet or nevertheless, generally answers to them in the latter. In like manner, Tarrij — quam; Adeo or ita, — ut: In English, As, — as, or so; as, Etsi sit liber alis tamen non est profasus. Although he be liberal, yet he is not profuse. So priiis or ante, — qudm. In some of these, however, we find the latter conjunction sometimes omitted, particularly in English. Obs. 5. The conjunction ut is elegantly omitted after these verbs, Volo, nolo, malo, rogo, precor, censeo, suadeo, licet, oportet, necesse est, and the like ; and likewise after these imperatives, Sine, fac, or facUo ; as, Ducas volo hodie uxorem ; Nolo mentidre ; Fac cogltes. Ter. In like manner ne is commonly omitted after cave ; as. Cave facias. Cic. Post is also sometimes understood ; thus. Die octavo, quam credtus erat. Liv. 4, 47, scil. post. And so in English, See you do it ; I beg you would come to me, scil. that, Obs. 6. Ut and quod are thus distinguished : ut denotes the final cause, and is commonly used with regard to something future ; quod marks the efficient or im- pulsive cause, and is generally used concerning the event or thing done ; as. Lego ut discam, I read that I may learn ; Gaudeo quod legi, I am glad that or because I have read. Ut is likewise used after these intensive words, as they are called, Adeo, ita, sic, tarn, talis, tantus, tot, &c. Obs. 7. After the verbs timeo, vereor, and the like, ut is taken in a negative sense for ne non, and ne in an affirmative sense ; as, Timeo ne faciat, I fear he will do it; Timeo ut faciat, 1 fear he will not do it. Id paves ne ducas tu illam, tu autem ut ducas. Ter. Ut sis vitalis, metuo. Hor. Ti-. meo ut f rater vivat, will not live ; — ne f rater moridtur, will die. But in some few examples they seem to have a contrary meaning. THE CONSTRUCTION OF COMPARATIVES. § 229. LXI. The comparative degree governs the ablative, (when Quam is omitted) ; as, Dulcior melle, sweeter than honey. Prcestantior auro, better than gold. Obs. 1. The positive with the adverb magis, likewise governs the ablative ; as, Magis dilecta luce. Virg. 264 consthuction of comparatives. The ablative is here governed by the preposition prcs understood, which is somo- times expressed ; as, Fortior prce ccsteris. We find the comparative also construed with other prepositions ; as, immanior ante omnes. Virg. Obs. 2. The comparative decree may likewise be construed with the conjunction qudm, and then, instead of the ablative, the noun is to be put in whatever case the sense requires ; as, Dulcior qudm mel, scil. est. Amo te magis qudm ilium, I love you more than him, that is, qudm amo ilium, than I love him. Amo te magis qudm ille, I love you more than he, i. e. qudm ille amut, than he loves. Plus datur a me qudm illo, so. ab Obs. 3. The conjunction qudm is often elegantly suppressed after amplius and plus ; as, Vulnerantur amplius sexcenti, scil. qudm. CaBS. Plus quingentos colapJios inf regit mihi, He has laid on me more than five hundred blows. Ter. Castra ah urbe haud plus quinque miilia passuum locant, so. qudm. Liv. § 230* Qudm is sometimes elegantly placed between two com- paratives; as Triumphus clarior qudm gratior, Liv. Or the prep, pro is added j as, Prcelium atrocius, qudm pro numero pugnantium edttur. Liv. § 331» The comparative is sometimes joined with these ablatives, opinioney spe, cequOf justo, dicto ; as, Credihlli opinione major. Cic. Credibili fortior. Ovid. Fast. iii. 618. Gravius CBquo. Sail. Dicto citius. Virg. Majcra credibili tutlmus. Liv. They are oiteii understood ; as, Liberius vivebat, so. justo, too freely. Nepos. 2, I. § 23S« Nihil is sometimes elegantly used for nemo or nulli , as, Nihil vidi quidquam Icetius, for neminem. Ter. Crasso nihil perjFeciiics Cic. Asperius nihil est humili, cum surgit in altum. So, quid nobis laboriosius, for quis, &c. Cic. We say, inferior patre nulla re, or quAm pater. The comparative is sometimes repeated, or joined with an adverb; as, Magis nuigisque, plus plusque, minus minusque, carior cariorque ; Quotidie plus, indies magis, semper candidior candidiorque, &c. Obs. 4. The relation of equality or sameness is likewise expressed by conjunctions; as, Est tam doctus qudm ego, He is as learned as I. Animus erga te idem est ac fuit. Ac and atque are sometimes, though more rarely, used after comparatives; as, Nihil est magis verum atque hoc. Ter. Obs. 5. The excess or defect of measure is put in the ablative after comparatives ; and the sign in English is by, expressed or understood ; (or more shortly, the difference of measure is put in the ablative ;) as, Est decern digitis altior qudm f rater. He is ten inches taller than his brother, or by ten inches. Altero tanto major est fratre, i. e. duplo major, He is as big again as his brother, or twice as big. Sesquipede minor, a foot and a half less ; Altero tanio, aut sesqii^imajor, as big again, or a half bigger. Cic. Ter tanto pejor est ; Bis tanto amid sunt inter se, qudm priiis. Plant. Quinquies tanto amplius, qudm quan- tum licltum sit, civitadhus imperuvit, five times more. Cic. To this may be added many other ablatives, which are joined with the comparative, to increase its force; as, Tanto, quanto, quo, eo, hoc, multo, paulo, nimio, &c. thus. Quo plus habent, eo plus cupiunt, The more they have, the more they desire. Quanto melior, tanto felicior. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 265 The better, the happier. Quoque minor spes est, hoc magis ill.c cupif. Ovid. Fast. ii. 766. We frequently find mullo, fanto, qunnlo, also joined with superlatives ; Midto puLchernmam earn haberhnus. Sail. Multoque id maximum fait Liv. THE ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. § 233e LXIL A Substantive and a Participle are put in the x4blative, when their case depends on no other word ; as, Sole cyrientejugiunt tenehrcE, \ ^^^^^ ^^'^ ^^^^"^' % ^^^^^^ '^^^ ^"^ ^^«^^^' ^^vknes^ •^ ° / nies away. OiwrP iwrartn hi,Jemv/r£^ flourished ; parriclda, lor any murderer. Vir gregis ipse caper. Virg. AUum sdlf icant caput. Juv. Hanc vobis deridendum propino, for trado. Ter. Earns per Siculas equitavit uTidas. Hot. When a word is taken in two senses in the same phrase, the one proper and the other metaphorical, it is said to be done by SyUepsis, (comprehensio ;) as, Galatea thy mo miki dulcior Hyblas. Virg. Ego Sardois videar tibi amarior herbis. Id. 3. Metonymy (mutatio nominis) is the putting off one name for another. In which sense it includes all other tropes: but it is com- monly restricted to the following particulars : — 4. When the cause is put for the effect : or the author for his works : as, Bourn lahores^ for corn ; Mars, for war ; Ceres, for grain or bread ; Bacchus, for wine. Virg. Cicero, Virgil and Horace, for their works. 5. When the effect is put for the cause : as, Pallida mors, pale death, because it makes pale : atra cura, &c. 6. The container for what is contained, and sometimes the contrary ; as, Hausit pateram, for vinum. Virg. He loves his bottle, for his drink. 7. The sign for the thing signified : as. The crown, for royal au- thority ; pahna or laurus, for victory ; Cedant arma togcB, that is, as Cicero himself explains it, bellum concedat pad. 8. An abstract for the concrete : as, Scelits, for scelestus. Ter. Aw- dacia, for audax. Cic. Vires, for strong men. Hor. 9. The parts of the body for certain passions or sentiments, which were supposed to reside in them : thus, cor, for wisdom or address ; as, habet cor ; vir corddtus, a man of sense. Plaut. But with us the heart is put for courage or affection, and the head for wisdom : thus, a stout heart, a warm heart. 10. When we put what follows to express what goes before, or the contrary, this form of expression is called Metalepsis, {transmutatio ;) thus, desiderdri, to be desired or regretted, for to be dead, lost, or ab- sent: So, Fuimus Troes cf* ingens gloria Dardanics, i. e. are no more. Virg. iEn. ii. 325. § 244« Synecdoche (comprehensio or conceptifii) is a trope by which a word is made to signify more or less than in its proper sense : as, 1. When a genus is put for a species, or a whole for a part, and the contrary : thus, Morldles, for homines ; summa arbor, for summa pars arb(jris ; tectum, the roof, for the whole house. Virg. 270 FIGURES OF EHETOHTC. 2. When a singular is put for a plural, and the contrary : thus, Hos- tis, miles, pedes, eques, for hostes, &c. 3. When the materials are put for the things made of them : as, JEs or argentum, for money ; csra, for vases of brass, trumpets, arms, &c. ; ferrum, for a sword. 4. When a common name is put for a proper name, or the contrary, the figure is called Antonomasia (pronominatio ;) as, the Philosopher, for Aristotle ; the Orator, for Demosthenes or Cicero ; the Poet, for Homer or Virgil ; the Wise man, for Solomon. 5. An Antonomasia is often made by a Periphrasis ; as, Pelopis pa- rens, for Tantalus ; Anyti reus, for Socrates ; Trojdni belli scriptor, for Homerus ; Chironis alumnus, for Achilles; Potor Rhoddni, for Gallus. Hor. sometimes with the noun added ; as, Fatdlis et incestus judex, famosus hospes, for Paris. Hor. 6. Irony is when one means the contrary of what is said : as, when we say of a bad poet, He is a Virgil ; or of a profligate person, Tertius € ccdo cecidit Cato. 7. When any thing is said by way of bitter raillery, or in an insult- ing manner, it is called a Sarcasm; as, Satia te sanguine, Cyre, Justin. KespenaLUimetirejacc7is. Virg. 8. When an affirmation is expressed in a negative form, it is called Litotes : as. He is no fool, for he is a man of sense ; Non humilis mulier, for nohilis or superba. 9. When a word has a meaning contrary to its original sense, this contrariety is called Antiphrasis : as, auri sacra fames, for execra- hllis. Virg. Pontus Euxini falso nomine dictus, i. e. hospitdlis. Ovid. 10. When any thing sad or offensive is expressed in more gentle terms, the figure is called Euphemismus ; as. Vita functus, for mortuus ; conclamdre suos, to give up for lost. Liv. Valeant, for abeant ; mactdre or ferire, for occidere ; Fecerunt id servi Milonis, quod suos quisque servos in tali re facire voluisset, i. e. Clodium interfecerunt, Cic. This figure is often the same with the Periphrasis. The Periphrasis, or Circumlocution, is when several words are employed to express what might be expressed in fewer. This is done either from necessity, as in translating from one language into an- other : or to explain what is obscure, as in definitions : or for the sake of ornament, particularly in poetry, as in the descriptions of evening and morning, &c. When, after explaining an obscure word or sentence by a peri- phrasis, one enlarges ovy the thought of the author, the figure is called a Paraphrase. When a word imitates the sound of the thing signified, this imita- tion is called Oiiomatopaia, (nominis fictio ;) as, the whistling of FIGURES OF KHETORIC. 277 winds, purling of streams, buzz and hjim of insects, hiss of serpents, &c. But this figure is not properly a trope. It is sometimes difficult to ascertain to which of the above mentioned tropes certain expressions ought to be referred. But in such cases minute exactness is needless. It is sufficient to know, in general, that the expression is figurative. There are a great many tropes peculiar to every language, which cannot be literally expressed in any other. These, therefore, if pos- sible, must be rendered by other figurative expressions equivalent : and if this cannot be done, their meaning should be conveyed in simple language; thus. Interior e notd Falerni, with a glass of old Faler- nian wine : Ad umbilicum ducere^ to bring to a conclusion. Horat. These, and other such figurative expressions, cannot be properly ex- plained without understanding the particular customs to which they refer. § 245. 2. REPETITION OF WORDS. Various repetitions of words arc employed for the sake of elegance or force, and are therefore also called Figures of words. Rhetoricians have distinguished them by different names, according to the part of the sentence in which they take place. 1 . When the same word is repeated in the beginning of any member of a sen- tence, it is called Anaphora; as, Nihilne te nocturnum prcBsidium palatii, nihil urhis vigilicB, &c. Cic. Te dulcis conjux, te solo in littore secum, Te veniente die, te decen- dente canehat. Virg. 2. When the repetition is made in the end of the member, it is called Epistro- PHE, or Conversio ; as, Pcenos Fopulus Romdnus justitia vicit, armis vicit, lihera- litate vicit. Cic. Sometimes both the former occur in the same sentence, and then it is called Symploce, or Complexio; as, Quis legem tulit? Rullus. Quis, &c. Rullus. Cic. 3. When the same word is repeated in the beginning of the first clause of a sen- tence, and in the end of the latter, it is called Epanalepsis ; as, Vidimus victoriam tuam prcdibrum exita terminatum ; gladium vagina vacuum in urbe non vidimus. Cic. pro Marcello. 4. The reverse of the former is called Anadiplosis, or Reduplicaiio ; as, Hie tamen vivit : vivit ! imo in sendtum venit. Cic. 5. When that which is placed first in the foregoing member, is repeated last in the following, and the contrary, it is called Epanodos, or Regressio ; as, Crudelis tu quoque mater ; Crudelis mater magis an puer imprubus ille ? Improbus ille pwer, crudelis tu quoque mater. Virg. 6. The passionate repetition of the same word in any part of a sentence is called Epizeuxis; as, Excitdte, exitdle eum ab inferis. Cic. Fuit, fuit isfa virtus, &c. Id. Me, me, adsum qui feci, in me convertite ferrum. Virg. Bella, horrtda bella. Id. Ibtmus, ibtmus. Hot. 7. When we proceed from one thing to another, so as to connect by the same word the subsequent part of a sentence with the preceding, it is called Climax, or Gradatio; as, Africdno virtUtem induslria, virtus gloriam, gloria cemulos compard- vit. Cic. 24 278 FIGURES OF RIIETOmC. 8. When tho snrne word is repeated in various cases, moods, genders, numbcrg, &c. it is called Poi.yptoton ; as, Fltmi simt onines lihri, -plencB. sapientum voces, plena exemplorum vetustas. Cic. Litivra liUor%us contraria, jiuctibus undas im- precor, arma armis. Virg. 9. To this is usually referred what is called Synonymia, or the using of words of the same import, to express a thing more strongly ; as, Non fcram, non patiar, non sinam. Cic. Promitto, recipio, spondeo. Id. And also Expositio, which repeats the same thought in different lights. 10. When a word is repeated the same in sound, but not in sense, it is called Antanaclasis ; as, Amdri jucimdum est, si curetur ne quid insit amari. Cic. But this is reckoned a defect in style, rather than a beauty. Nearly allied to this figure is the Paronomasia, or Agnominatio, when the words only resemble one another in sound ; as, Civem honarum arliiim, honarmn partiiim ; Consul pravo antmo and parvo : de oratore arulor f actus. Cic. Amantes sunt amentes. Ter. This is also called a Pun. 11. When two or more words are joined in any part of a sentence in the same cases or tenses, it is called Homoioptoton, i. e. similiter cadens, as, Pollet ancto- ritate, circumfiuit oplbus, abundat am'icis. Cic. If the words have only a similar termination, it is called HoxMOIOTeleuton, i. e. similiter desinens; as, Non ejusdem estfacerefort^fer, and vivere turplter. Cic. § 246« a FIGURES OF THOUGHT. It is not easy to reduce figures of thought to distinct classes, be- cause the same figure is employed for several different purposes. — The principal are tiie Hyperbole, Prosopopce'ia, Apostrophe^ Simile, Antithesis, &c. 1. Hyperpole is the magnifying of a thing above the truth ; as, when Virgil, speaking of Polyphemus, says, Ipse arduus, altaque pulsat sidera. So, Contracta pisces cequora sentiunt. Hor. When an object is diminished below the truth, it is called Tapeinosis. The use of extravagant Hyperboles forms what is called Bombast. 2. Prosopopceia, or Personification, is a figure by which we ascribe life, sentiments, or actions, to inanimate beings, or to abstract qualities; as, QucR ipatrid) tecum. Catilina, sic agit, &c. Cic. Virtus sumit out ponit secures. Hor. Arbore nunc aquas culpante. Id. 3. Apostrophe, or Address, is when the speaker breaks off from the series of his discourse, and addresses himself^ to some person present or absent, living or dead, or to inanimate nature, as if endowed with sense and reason. This figure is nearly allied to the former, and there- fore oflen joined with it: as, Trojdque nunc stares, Priamlque arx alta maneres. Virg. 4. Simile, or Comparison, is a figure by which one thing is illus- trated or heightened by comparing it to another : as, Alexander was as hold as a lion. 5. Antithesis, or Opposition; is a figure by which things contrary or different are contrasted, to make them appear in the most striking FIGURES OF ilIIET«RlC. 279 light ; as, Hannibal was cnnning^ hut Fabius was cautious. Ccesar beneficiis ac munificentid magnus habebdtur, integritdte vitcs Cato, &c. Sail. Cat. 54. 6. Interrogation, (Grasc. Erotesls,) is a figure whereby we do not simply ask a question, but express some strong feeling or affection of the mind in that form: as, Quousque tandem, &c. Cic. Creditis avectos hostes ? Virg. Heu ! qucB me ccquora possunt accipere. Id. Sometimes an answer is returned, in which case it is called Subjectio ; as, Quid ergo 7 audacisslmus ego ex oinnlhus ? minlme. Cic. Nearly allied to this is Expostulation, when a person pleads with offenders to return to their duty. 7. Exclamation (Ecphonesis) is a sudden expression of some pas- sion or emotion ; as, O nomen dulce lihertdtis, &c. Cic. O tempora, O mores ! Id. O patria ! O Divum domus Ilium ! &c. Virg. 8. Description, or Imagery, {Hypotyposis) is the painting" of any thing in a lively manner, as if done, before our eyes. Hence it is also called Vision ; as, Videor mihi hanc urbem videre, &c. Cic. in Cat. iv. 6. Videre magnos jam videor duces, Non indccoro pulvere sor- didos. Hor. Here a change of tense is often used, as the present for the past, and conjunctions omitted, &,c. Virg. xi. 637, &c. 9. Emphasis is a particular stress of voice laid on some word in a sentence ; as, Hanntbal peto pacem. Li v. Froh ! Jupiter ibit hic ! i. e. JEneas. Virg. 10. Epanortiiosis, or Correction, is the recalling or correcting by the speaker of what he last said ; as, Filium habui, ah ! quid dixi habere me ? imo habui. Tier. 11. Paralepsis, or Omission, is the pretending to omit, or pass by, what one at the same time declares. 12. Aparithmesis, or Enumeration, is the branching out into seve- ral parts of what might be expressed in fewer words. 13. Synathroismus, or Coacervatio, is the crowding of many parti- culars together ; as, Faces in castra tidissem. Implessemque foros flammis, natumque, patremqne Cum genere exUnxem, memet super ipsa dedissem. Virg. 14. Incrementum, or Climax in sense, is the rising of one member above another to the highest ; as, Facinus est vinclre civem Roma- num, scelus verberdre, parricidium necdre. Cic. When all the circumstances of an object or action are artfully ex- aggerated, it is called Auxesis, or Amplification. But this is pro- perly not one figure, but the skilful employment of several, chiefly of the Simile and the Climax. 280 FIGUilES OF RHETORIC. 15. Transition (Aletabdsis) is an abrupt introduction of a speech; or the passing of a writer suddenly from one subject to another ; as, Hor. Od. ii. 13. 13. In strong* passion, a change of person is some- times used ; as, Virg. ^En. iv. 365, &c. xi. 406, &c. 16. SusPENsio, or SustentatiOf is the keeping of the mind of the hearer long in suspense ; to which the Latin inversion of words is often made subservient. 17. CoNCEssio is the yielding of one thing to obtain another ; as, Sit fur, sit sacrilegus, &c. at est bonus imperdtor. Cic. in Ver- rem, v. 1. 18. Prolepsis, Prevention or Anticipation, is the starting and an- swering of an objection. 19. Anacoinosis, or Cormnunication, is when the speaker deliberates with the judges of hearers ; which is also called Diaporesis or Addu- hitatio. 20. LicENTiA, or the pretending to assume more freedom than is proper, is used for the sake of admonishing, rebuking, and also flatter- ing ; as, Vide quam non reformidem, &c. Cic. pro Ligario. 21. Aposiopesis, or Concealment, leaves the sense incomplete ; as, Quos ego sed prcestat motos componere Jluctus. Virg. 22. Sententia {Gnome) a sentiment, is a general maxim concern- ing life or manners, which is expressed in various forms ; as, Otium sine Uteris mors est. Seneca. Aded iji teneris assuescere multum est. Virg. Probitas lauddtur et alget ; Misera est magni custodia census ; Nobilitas sola est atque unlca virtus. Juv. 23. As most of these figures are used by orators, and some of them only in certain parts of their speeches, it will be proper for the learner to know the parts into which a regular, formal oration is commonly di- vided. These are, 1. The Introduction, the Exordium, or Procemium, to gain the good will and attention of the hearers : 2« The Narration or Explication: 3. The argumentative part, which includes Confirma- tion or proof, and Confutation, or refuting the objections and argu- ments of an adversary. The sources from which arguments are drawn are called hod, ' topics;' and are either intrinsic or extrinsic : common or peculiar. 4. The Peroration, Epilogue, or Conclusion, (281) PROSODY. § 1« Prosody is that part of grammar which teaches the proper ac- cent and quantity of syllables, the right pronunciation of words, and the measures of verse. § 2« Accent is a particular stress of the voice upon certain syllables of words. § 3* The quantity of a syllable is the space of time used in pro- nouncing it. § 4« Syllables, with respect to their quantity, are either long, short, or common. § 5© A long syllable in pronouncing requires double the time of a sJiort one ; as, tendere. § G* A syllable that is sometimes long, and sometimes short, is common ; as the second syllable in volucris. § T« A vowel is said to be long or short by nature, which is always so by custom, or by the use of the poets. § 8« In polysyllables, or long words, the last syllable except one is called the Penultima, or, by contraction, the Penult; and the last syllable except two, the Antepenultima, or Antepenult, § 9« When the quantity of a syllable is not fixed by some particular rule, it is said to be long or short by authority ; that is, according to the usage of the poets. Thus le in lego is said to be short by authority, because it is always made short by the Latin poets. ^ ll_r« In most Latin words of one or two syllables, according to our manner of pronouncing, we can hardly distinguish by the ear a long syllable from a short. Thus le in lego and legi seem to be sounded equally long; but when we pronounce them in composition, the difference is obvious ; thus, perlego, perlegi ; relego, -ere ; relego, -are, &c. RULES FOR THE QUANTITY. The rules of quantity are either General or Special. The former apply to all syllables, the latter onlv to some certain syllables. 24* 282 THE QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. GENERAL RULES. § 1 X • A vowel before another vowel is short ; as, Mens, alius : so nihil ; h in verse being considered only as a breathing. In like man- ner in English, create, behave. Exc. 1. lis long in Jio^Jiebam, &c. unless when followed by e and r ; as, fieri, fierem ; thus, Omnia jam fient, fieri quae posse negabam. Ovid. Exc. 2. E, having an i before and after it, in the fifth declension, is long: as, speciei. So is the first syllable in der, dius, eheu, and the penultiraa in auldi, terrdi, &.c. in Pompei, Cdi, and such like words ; but we sometimes find Pompei in two syllables. Hor. Od. ii. 7. 5. Exc. 3. The first syllable in ohe and Didna is common ; so likewise is the penult of genitives in ius ; as, illius, unius, ullius, nullius, &c. to be read long in prose. Alius, in the genit. is always long, as being contracted for aliius ; alterlus, short. § 1 3» In Greek words, when a vowel comes before another, no cer- tain rule concerning its quantity can be given. Rem. 1. Sometimes it is short ; as, Danae, Idea, Sophia, Symphonia, Simois, Hyadeg, Phaon, Deucalion, Pygmalion, Thebais, &c. Rem. 2. Often it is long; as, Lycaon, Machaon, Didymaon; AmphTon, Arion, Ixion, Pandlbn ; Nais, Lais, Achaia ; Briseis, Cadraeis ; Latous and Latois, MyrtOus, Nereius, Priameius; AchelOius, MinGius; Archelaus, Menelaus, Amphiaraus; -^Eneas, Peneus, Epeus, Acrisioneus, Adamanteus, Phoebeus, Giganteus; Darius, BasilTus, Eugenius, Bacchius; Cassiopea, Caesarea, Chacronea, Cytherea, Galatea, Laodicea, Medea, Panthea, Penelopea ; Clio, Enyo, Elegla, Iphigenia, Alexandria, Thalia, Antiochia, idolatria, litania, politia, &c. Laertes, Dei'phobus, Deianira, Trues, heroes, &c. Rem. 3. Sometimes it is common ; as, Chorea, platea, Malea, Nereides, canopeum, Orion, Geryon, Eos, eiius, &c. So in Foreign words, Michael, Israel, Raphael, Abraham, &c. Rem. 4. The accusative of nouns in eus is usually short; as, Orphea, Salmon ea, Capliarea, &c. but sometimes long; as, Idomenea, Iliunca. Virg. Instead of Elegm, Cytherea, we find Elegeia, Cythereia. Ovid. But the quantity of Greek words can- not properly- be understood without the knowledge of Greek. In English, a vowel before another is also sometimes lengthened ; as, science, idea. § X 3« A vowel before two consonants, or before the double conso- nants j, X, z, is long (by position, as it is called ;) as, drma, fdllo, axis, gdza, major ;* the compounds of jugum excepted ; as, bijugus, quadrijvgus, &c. When the foregoing word ends in a short vowel, and the following begins with two consonants or a double one, that vowel is sometimes lengthened by position ; as, Ferte citijlammas, date tela, scandite muros. Virg. *In reality, in suchcases j is a vowel, and with the preceding vowel constitutes a diphthong, as, mUlor'^hus. In the same manner arises the quantity of such words as ejus, 2njus, \v hich, according to Priscian, the ancients write elus, peius. THE QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 283 Obs. 1. A vowel naturally short, when followed by sc, sp, sa, ST, (with or with- out the addition of a third consonant, as Scripta,) may either remain short, or be made long at the poet's option. § 14» A vowel before a mute and a liquid is common; as the mid- dle syllable in volucris, tenebrcB ; thus, Et primo similis voliicri, mox vera volucris. Ovid. Nox tenebras profert, Phoebus fugat inde tenebras. Id. But in prose these words are pronounced short. So peragro, pharetra, podagra, chiragra, Celebris, laiebrcB, ^c. Obs. 1. To make this rule hold, three things are requisite. 1. The vowel must be naturally short; 2. the mute must go before the liquid; and, 3. be in the same syllable with it. Thus a in palris is made common in verse, because a in pater is naturally short, or always so by custom : but a in matris, acris, is always long, be- cause long by nature or custom in mater and acer. In like manner the penult in saludris, ambulacrum, is always long ; because they are derived from salus, salutis, and ambulatum. So a in arte, abluo, <^c. is long by position, because the mute and the liquid are in different syllables. Obs. 2. L and r only are considered as liquids in Latin words; m and n do not take place except in Greek words. § 15« A contracted syllable is long ; as, Nili for nihil ; mi, for mihi ; cogo, for codgo ; alius, for aliius ; tihi- cen, for tibiicen ; it, for iit ; sodes, for si audes ; nolo, for non volo ; hig<2, for hijugcE. ; scilicet, for scire licet, &c. § 16© A diphthong is always long; as, Aurum, Ccesar, Euboea, &c. 2. Only prcB in composition before a vowel is commonly short; as, prceire, prceustus ; thus. Nee tota tamen ille prior praeeunte carina. Virg. ^. 5, 186. Stipitibus duris agitur sudibusque pra3ustis. lb. 7, 524. 3. But it is sometimes lengthened ; as, cum vacuus domino praeiret Arlon. Theb. 6, 519. § 17« A diphthong is once short in a line of Virgil, out of com- position : thus, InsulcB lonio in magno, quas dira Celasno. This seems to be in imitation of Greek Hexameter. SPECIAL RULES. L FIRST AND MIDDLE SYLLABLES. Preterites and Supines of two Syllables. § I8» Preterites of two syllables lengthen the former syllable; as, Veni, vidi, vici. Exc. Except btbi, scldi from scindo, fidi from jindo, tuli, dedi, and steti, which are shortened. 284 QUANTITY OF THE CREMENT OF NOUNS. § 19* Supines of two syllables lengthen the former syllable; as, Visum, cdsum, motum, Exc. Except satum, from sero ; citum, from cieo ; Ilium, from lino ; situm, from sino ; stdtum, from sisto ; Uum, from eo ; datum, from do ; rutum, from the compounds of ruo ; qultum, from queo ; rdtus, from reor. Preterites which double the first Syllable, § 20» Preterites which double the first syllable, have both the first syllables short ; as, Cecldif tetigi, pepuli, peperi, dldici, tutudi ; except cecldi, from c(Bdo ; pepedi, from pedo : and when two consonants intervene ; as, Jefelli, tetendi, pependi, momordi, &c. Exc. The following are short in the first syllable, although coming from long presents ; posui, pGsUum, from pono ; genui, genitum, from gigno ; potui from possum ; solutum from solvo, and volutum from volvo, INCREASE OF NOUNS. § 2X» A noun is said to increase, when it has more syllables in any of the oblique cases than in the nominative ; as, rex, regis ; sermo, sermonis ; interpres, interpretis. Here re, mo, pre, is each called the increase or crement, and so through all the other cases. The last syl- lable is never esteemed a crement. 1. Some nouns have a double increase, that is, increase by more syllables than one; as, iter, itineris ; anceps, ancipUis. 2. A noun in the plural is said to increase, when in any case it has more syllables than the genitive singular ; -as, gener, generi ; genero- rum; regibus, sermombus, &c. 3. Except nouns of the first, fourth, smd fifth declensions, which do not increase in the singular number, unless when one vowel comes before another; a,s, fructus, fructui ; res, rei ; and falls under Rule I. In the plural, however, they increase, and follow the Rule under 5 88. § 22« Nouns of the second declension which increase, shorten the crement ; as, tener, teneri ; vir, viri ; duumvir, -viri ; satur, saturi ; except Iber, a Spaniard, Iberi; and its compound Celtiberi. CREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. § 23» Nouns of the third declension which increase, make a and o long ; e, i, and u short : as, Pietdtis, honoris ; mulieris, lapidis, murmUris. The chief exceptions from this rule are marked under the formation of the genitive of the third declension. But here perhaps it may be proper to be more particular. atTANTITY OP THE CREMENT OP NOUNS. 285 A. V ^4:0 Nouns in A shorten atis, in the genitive; as, dogma, -atis; poema, O. V /W 0» 1.0 shortens ^nis, but lengthens mis and onis ; as, Cardo, -inis ; Virgo, -^nis ; Anio, enis ; Cicero, -onis. 2. Gentile or patrial nouns vary their quantity. Most of them shorten the geni- tive ; as, Mact'do, -onis ; Saxo, -onis. So, Lirigmes, Senones, Teutones, Vangiones, Vascones. Some are long ; as, Suessiones, Eburones, Vettones. Brittones is com- mon ; it is shortened by Juvenal, and lengthened by Martial. I. C. D. L. V '^v>» 1. 1 shortens itis; as, Hydromeli, -ttis. 2. Ec lengthens ecis ; as, Halec, -ecis. 3. Nouns in D shorten the crement ; as, David, -idis ; Bogud, -Mis. In sacred poetry the penultimate of David is often lengthened. 4. Masculines in AL shorten alis ; as, Sal, sails; Hannibal, -alis; Hasdriibal, -alis ; but neuters lengthen it ; as, animal, -dlis. 5. Soils from sol is long ; also Hebrew words in el ; as, Michael, -elis. Other nouns in L shorten the crement ; as, Vigil, -tlis ; consul, -ulis. N. § 2 i» 1. Nouns in ON vary the crement. Some lengthen it; as, Helicon, -onis ; Chiron, -onis. Some shorten it ; as, Memnon, -onis ; Actceon, -onis. 2. EN shortens inis ; as, jlumen, -inis ; tibicen, -inis. 3. Other nouns in N lengthen the penult. AN dnis; as, Titan, -dnis: EN enis; as. Siren, -enis: IN hiis; as, Delphin, -inis: YN ynis; as, Phorcyn, -ynis. R. V 38© 1. Neuters in AR lengthen aris ; as, calcar, -dris. Except the follow- ing ; bacchar, -arls ; jubar, -aris ; hepar, -atis ; nectar, -aris : Also the adjective par pdris, and its compounds, impar, -aris, dispar, -aris, &c. 2. The following nouns in R lengthen the genitive ; Nar, Ndris, the name of a river ; fur, furis ; ver, veris : Also Recimer, -cris ; Byzer, -eris, proper names ; and Ser, Seris ; Iber, -eris, as well as Iber, Iberi, of the second declension. 3. Greek nouns in TER lengthen teris ; as, crater, -eris ; character, -eris. Ex- cept (Bther, -eris. 4. OR lengthens oris ; as, amor, -5ris. Except neuter nouns ; as, marmor, -oris ; cequor, -oris : Greek nouns in tor ; as. Hector, -oris ; Actor, -oris ; rhetor, -oris. Also, arbor, -oris, and memor, -oris. 5. Other nouns in R shorten the genitive ; AR aris, masc ; as, Ccesar, -Uris; Ha- milcar, -aris ; lar, Idris. ER eris of any gender ; as, a'er, aeris ; mulier, -eris ; ca- daver, -eris, iter, anciently itiner, itineris ; verberis, from the obsolete verber. \JR uris ; as, vultur, -uris ; murmur, -uris. YR yris ; as, Martyr, -yris. AS. § 29« 1- Nouns in AS, which have atis, lengthen the crement; a.s,pietas, -atis ; McBcenas, -atis. Except anas, -atis. 2. Other nouns in AS shorten the crement ; as Greek nouns having the genitive in ddis, atis, and dnis; thus Pallas, -ddis ; artocreas, -edlis; Melas, -dnis, the name of a river. So vas, vddls ; mas, maris. But vas, vdsls is long. 286 QUANTITY OF THE CKEMENT OF NOUNS. ES. y oOe 1. ES shortens the crement ; as, miles, -Uis ; Ceres, -cris ; pes, pedis. 2. Except locuples, -etis ; quies, -etis ; mansnes, -efis ; hcsres, -cdis ; merces, -Mis: also Greek nouns which have etis; as, lehes, -etis; Thales, -cLis. IS. V 31« 1. Nouns in IS shorten the crement; as, lapis, -idis ; sanguis, -^nis ; Phyllis, -idis; cinis, cineris. 2, Except Glis, gl'iris ; and Latin nouns which have ilis ; as, lis, litis ; dis, ditis ; Quiris, -Itis; Samnis, -'dis. But Charis, a Greek noun, has Charilis. 3. The following also lengthen the crement ; Crenis, -Idis, Psophis, -idis, Nesis, -Idis, proper names. And Greek nouns in is, which have also in ,* as, Saldmis or -in, Salaminis. OS. ^ Sim 1. Nouns in OS lengthen the crements ; as, nepos, -dtis ; jlos, jidris. 2. Except Bos, bovis ; compos, -utis ; and impos, -otis. US. y SSm 1. US shortens the crement; as, tempus, -oris; vcllus, -eris ; tripus, 'odis. 2. Except nouns which have udis, uris, and utis ; as, incus, -udis ; jus, juris ; solus, -utis. But Ligus has Liguris ; the obsolete pecus, pecudis ,• and intercus, -utis. 3. The neuter of the comparative has oris ; as, melius, -oris. YS. § 34« YS shortens ydis or ydos ; as, cldamys, -ydis or ydos ; and lengthens ynis ; as, Trachys, -ynis. BS. PS. MS. V 35» 1- Nouns in S, with a consonant going before, shorten the penult of the genitive ; as, ccdebs, -ibis ; inops, -opis ; hiems, hiemis ; auceps, aucupis ; Dolops, -opis ,• also auceps, andjntis ; biceps, bicipUis ; and similar compounds of caput, in which both increments are short. 2. Except Cyclops, -opis; seps, sepis; gryps, gryphis; Cercops, -opis ; plebs,ple- bis ; hydrops, -opis. T. § 3o* T shortens the crement ; as, caput, -tlis : so, sinciput, -ttis. X. § 3 i • 1- Nouns in X, which have the genitive in gis, shorten the crement; as, conjux, -iigis ; remex, -igis ; Allobrox, -ogis ; Phryx, Phrygis. But lex, legis, and rex, regis, are long ; and likewise frugis. 2. EX shortens ids ; vertex, -ids : Except vibex or vibix, -wis. 3. Other nouns in X lengthen the crement ; as, pax, pads ; radix, -Ids ; vox, vbds ; lux, luds ; Pollux, -ucis, &c. 4. Except fads, neds, vicis, precis, calids, cilids, picis, forntcis, ntvis, Cappado- cis, duds, nucis, crucis, trucis, onycis, Erycis, mastyx, -ychis, the resin of the Leiitis- cus, or mast.ich tree; and, many others, the quantity of which can only be ascer- tained by authority. 5. Some nouns vary the crement ; as, Syphax, -acis, or acis ; Sandyx, -tcis, or Jids ; Bebryx, -yds, or -yds. INCREASE OF VERBS. 287 Increase of the Plural Number, § 38» Nouns of the plural number which increase, make A, E, and O, long ; but shorten I and U; as, musarum^ rerum, dominorum; regibus, por tubus ; except bobus or bubuSf contracted for bovlbus, INCREASE OF VERBS. § 30« A verb is said to increase, when any part has more sylla- bles than the second person singular of the present of the indicative active ; as, amas, amdmus, where the second syllable ma is the iu' crease or crement : for the last syllable is never called by that name. A verb often increases by several syllables ; as, amas, amdbdmini ; in which case it is said to have sl firsts second, or third increase. § 40» In the increase of verbs, a, e, and o, are long; i and u short; as, Amdre, docere, amdtote ; legimus, sumus, volumus, EXCEI^TIONS. 1. The poets sometimes, by systole, shorten dederunt and steterunt, and lengthen rhnus and ritis, in the future subjunctive ; as, transierltis aquas, Ovid. 2. Do and its compounds of the first conjugation have a short in their first in- crement ; as, damus, dabunt, venundabo : but not in the second ; as, dabamus, dede- rdtis, where the last a is long. 3. E before r is short in the first increment of any present and imperfect of the tliird conjugation ; as, legeris, legerem, legerer. But reris and rere in all the conjuga- tions are long ; as, legereris, amarere, &c. 4. BeriK, and bere, are every where short ; as, amaberis, amabere ; excepting where b belongs also to the termination of the present, scriberis and scribere, of the future passive being long by the general rule. 5. E before ram, rim, ro, and the persons formed from them, is short. 6. These have i long ; simus, veTtmus, noUmun, with the other persons coming from them, and their compounds ; as^ sitis, veTilis, noUte mal'imus, poss'dis, &c. 7. / before vi in preterites is always long ; as, pefivi, qiicBsivi, audivi. 8. Tlie first increment of the fourth conjugation is long ; as, audlmus, audita, audirem. § 41 • The first or middle syllables of words which do not come under any of the foregoing rules, are said to be long or short by authority ; and their quantity can only be discovered from the usage of the poets, which is the most certain of all rules. Remarks on the Quantity of the Penult and Antepenult of Words, § 42« 1- Patronymics in IDES or ADES usually shorten the penult; as, Friamldes, Atlaniiadcs, &c. Unless they come from nouns in eus: as, Petides, Ty- d'ldes, . A DICOLON DISTROPHON. § 119« Xin. One Hexameter, [No. 1,] and one Iambic Trimeter, [No. 6,] one epode. Altera jam teritur bellis civilTbus astas Siiis et ipsa Roma viribus ruit. Epod. 16. A DICOLON DISTROPHON. § 120« XIV. One Hexameter, [No. 1,] and one Dactylic Trime- ter, Catalectic, [No. 4,] one ode. Diffugere nives : redeunt jam gramina campis, Arboribusqae comae. Lib. 4. 7. A TRICOLON TRISTROPHON. § 131« XV. One Hexameter, [No. 1,] one Iambic Dimeter, [No. 8,] and one Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic, [No. 4,] one epode. Horrida tempestas coBlum cGntraxit, et imbres Nives que deducunt Jovem : Nunc mare, nunc siiuse. Epod. 13. A TRICOLON TRISTROPHON § 122* XVI. One Iambic Trimeter, [No. 6,] one Dactylic Trime- ter Catalectic, [No. 4,] and one Iambic Dimeter [No. 8,] only once used. Petti nihil me, sTcut antea, juvat Scribere versiculos, Amore perculsum gravi. Epod. 11. A DICOLON DISTROPHON. § 123« XVn. One Archilochian Heptameter, [No. 20,] and one Iambic Trimeter Catalectic, [No. 7,] a single example. SolvTtur acris hiems grata vice veris, et Favoni, Trahuntque siccas machinae carinas. Lib. 1. 4. A DICOLON DISTROPHON. § 124* XVIII. One Iambic Dimeter Acephalus, [No. 10,] and one Iambic Trimeter Catalectic, [No. 7,] one ode. Non cbur, neqiie aureum Mea renldet In domO lacunar. Lib. 2. 18. INDEX TO THE ODES OF HORACE. 309 A MONOCOLON. § 1S5* XIX. The Ionic a minore [No. 18, J in one instance only. Miserarum est neque araGri dare ludum, neque dulci. Lib. 3. 12. ^ INDEX TO THE ODES OF HORACE, EXHIBITING THE FIRST WORDS OF EACH, WITH REFERENCES TO THE PRECEDING NUMBERS, ACCORIiaNG TO THE EXAMPLES UNDER WHICH THEY ARE SCANNED. ^li vetusto iEquam memento . . . Albi ne doleas Altera jam teritur. . . Angustam amici .... At O deorum Audivere Lyce .... Bacchum in remotis . Beatus ille CcbIo supinas CaBlo tonantem Cum tu Lydia Cur me querelis .... Delicta majorum .... Descends coelo Dianam tenerae Diffugere nives Dive quem proles . . . Divis orte bonis Donarem pateras .... Donee gratus eram . . Eheu fugaces Est mihi nonum .... Et thure et fidibus . . Exegi monumentum . Extremum Tanaim . . Faune nympharum . . Festo quid potius die Herculis ritu Horrida tempestas. . . Ibis Liburnis Icci beatis Ille et nefasto Irapios parraB Inclusara Danaen . . . Intactis opulentior . . . Integer vitae Intermissa Venus diu Jam jam efficaci Jam pauca aratro . . . Jam satis terris 107 107 111 119 107 110 112 107 110 107 107 109 107 107 107 112 120 108 111 113 109 107 108 109 113 111 108 109 108 121 110 107 107 108 111 109 108 109 117 107 108 Jam veris comites ... 1111 Justum et tenacem . . 107 Laudabunt alii 114 Lupis et agnis 110 Lydia die per omnes. 118 Maecenas atavis 113 Malasoluta 110 Martiis ccelebs 108 Mater saevaCupidinum 109 Mercuri facunde .... 108 Mercuri nam te .... 108 Miserarum est 125 Molis inertia 116 Montium custos 108 Motum ex Metello . . 107 Musis amicus 107 Natis in usum 107 Ne forte credas 107 Ne sit ancillae 108 Nolis longa ferae .... Ill Nondum subacta .... 107 Non ebur neque aur. 124 Non semper imbres. . 107 Non usitata 107 Non vides quanto . . . 108 Noxerat 116 Nullam Vare sacra. . 115 NuUus argento 108 Nunc est bibendura . 107 O crudelis adhunc .. 115 O Diva gratum 107 O fons Bland usiae ... 112 O matre pulchra . . . 107 O nata mecum 107 O navis referent 112 O saepe mecum . . .... 107 O Venus regina ..... 108 Odi profanum 107 Otium Divos 108 Parcius junctas 108 Parous Deorum 107 Parentis olim 1 10 Pastor quum trah... . Ill Persicos odi puer .... 108 Petti nihil me 122 Phoebe, silvarumque . 108 Phoebus volentem . . . 107 Pindarum quisquis . . 108 Poscimur siquid 108 Quae cura patrum . . . 107 Qualem ministrum . . 107 Quando repostum ... 1 10 Quantum distet ab In. 109 Quem tu Melpomene 109 Quem virum aut her. 108 Quid bellicosus 107 Quid dedicatum .... 107 Quid fles Asterie .... 112 Quid immerentes .... 1 10 Quid obseratis 1 17 Quid tibi vis 114 Quis desiderio Ill Quis multa gracilis . . 112 Quo me Bacche 109 Quo, quo scelesti ru.. 110 Rectius vivos 108 Rogare longo 110 Scriberis Vario Ill Septimi Gades 108 Sic te Diva potens . . 109 Solvitur acris hiems . 123 Te maris et terrae ... 114 Tu ne quaesieris .... 115 Tvrrhena regum .... 107 Ulla si juris 108 Uxor pauperis Ibyci . 109 Velox amoenum 107 Vides ut alta 107 Vile potabis 108 Vitas hinnuleo 112 Vixi puellis 107 (310) APPENDIX. Of Punctuation ; Capitals ; Abbreviations ; Division of the Roman Months; Tables of Roman CoinSy Weights^ and Measures. The different divisions of discourse are marked by certain characters called Points. The points employed for this purpose are the Comma, (,) Semico- lon, (;) Colon, (:) Period, Punctum, or full stop, (.) Their names are taken from the different parts of the sentence which they are employed to distinguish. The Period is a whole sentence complete by itself The Colon, or member, is a chief constructive part, or greater division of a sentence. The Semicolon, or half member, is a less constructive part, of subdivision, of a sentence or member. The Comma, or segment, is the least constructive part of a sentence, in this way of con- sidering it ; for the next subdivision of a sentence would be the resolution of it into Phrases and words. To these points may be added the Semiperiod, or less point, followed by a small letter. But this is of much the same use with the Colon, and occurs only in Latin books. A simple sentence admits only of a full point at the end ; because its general meaning cannot be distinguished into parts. It is only in compound sentences that all the different points are to be found. Points likewise express the different pauses which should be observed in a just pronunciation of discourse. The precise duration of each pause, or note, cannot be defined. It varies according to the different subjects of discourse, and the different turns of human passion and thought. The period requires a pause in duration double of the colon ; the colon double of the semicolon ; and the semicolon double of the comma. There are other points, which, together with a certain pause, also denote a dif- ferent modulation of the voice in correspondence with the sense. These are the Interrogation point ( ? ), the Exclamation or Admiration point ( ! ), and the Paren- thesis (). The first two generally mark an elevation of the voice, and a pause equal to that of a semicolon, a colon, or a period, as the sense requires. The Pa- renthesis usually requires a moderate depression of the voice, with the pause some- what greater than a comma. But these rules are liable to many exceptions. The modulation of the voice in reading, and the various pauses, must always be ^egula^ ed by the sense. Besides the points, there are several other marks made use of in books, to denote references and different distinctions, or to point out something remarkable or de- fective, &c. These are the Apostrophe ('); Asterisk (*); Hyphen (-); Obelisk (t); Double Obelisk (t); Parallel Lines ( || ) ; Paragraph ( IT ) ; Section ( $ ) ; Quotation ( " " ) ; Crotchets [ ] ; Brace ( -{ ) ; Ellipsis (. . . or — ) ; Caret ( a ) ; which last is only used in writmg. DIVISION OF THE R03IAN MONTHS. 311 References are often marked by letters and figures. Capitals, or larger letters, are used at the beginning of sentences, of verses, and of proper names. Some use them at the beginning of every substantive noun. Adjectives, verbs, and other parts of speech, unless they be emphatical, commonly begin with a small letter. Capitals, with a point after them, are often put for whole words ; thus, A. marks Aulus, C. Caius, D. Decius, or Decimus, L. Lucius, M. Marcus, P. Publius, Q. Quintus, or Quinctivs, T. Titus. So F. stands for Filius, and N. for Nepos ; as, M. F. Marci Filius, M. N. Marci Nepos. In like manner P. C. marks Patrcs Conscripti , S. C. SenrUus Consultum ; P. R. Populus Romdnus ; S. P. Q. R. Sendtus, Populus- que Rcrmdnus ; U. C. Urbs Condita ; S. P. D. Salutem plurimam dicit ; D. D. D. Dat, dicat, dedicat ; D. D. C. Q. Dat, dicat, consecratque ; H. S. written corruptly for L. L. S. Sestertius, equal in value to two pounds of brass and a half; the two pounds being marked by L. L. Libra, Libra, and the half by S. Semis. So in modern books A. D. marks Anno Domini, A. M. Artium Magister, Master of Arts; M. D. Medi.cincB Doctor,* LL. D. Legum Doctor ; N. B. Nota Bene, &c. Sometimes a small letter or two is added to the capital ; as. Etc. Et ccet^ra ; Ap. Appius ; Cn. Cneius ; Op. Opiter ; Sp. Spurius ; Ti. Tiberius ; Sex. Sextus ; Cos. Consul ; Coss. ConsTdes ; Imp. Imperdtor ; Impp. Imperatores, In like manner, in English, Esq. Esquire ; Dr. Debtor or Doctor ; AccL Account ; MS. Manuscript ; MSS. Manuscripts ; Do. Ditto ,• Rt. Hon. Right Honourable, &c. Small letters are likewise often put as abbreviations of a word ; as, i. e. id est ; h. e. hoc est, that is ; e. g. exempli gratia, for example ; v. g. verbi gratia. OF TIME. . DIVISION OF THE ROMAN MONTHS. The Romans divided their months into three parts, by f Kalends, Nones, and Ides. The first day of every month was called the Kalends : the fifth day was called the Nones: and the thirteenth day was called the Ides: except in the months of March, May, July, and October, in which the nones lell upon the seventh day, and the ides on the fifteenth. » In reckoning the days of their months, they counted backwards. Thus, the first day of January was marked Kalendis Januariis or Januarii, or, by contraction, Kal. Jan. The last day of December, Pridie Kalendas Januarias, or Januarii^ scil. ante. The day before that, or the 30th day of December, Tertio Kal. Jan. scil. die ante : or Ante diem tertium Kal. Jan. The twenty-ninth day of December, Quarto Kal. Jan. And so on, till they came back to the thirteenth day of Decem- ber, or to the ides, which were marked Idibus Decembribus, or Decembris: the day before the ides, Pridie Idas Dec. scil. ante : the day before that, Tertio Id. Dec. and so back to the nones, or the fifth day of the month, which was marked Nonis Decembrtbus, or Decembris : the day before the nones, Pridie Non. Dec. Slc. and thus through all the months of the year. * Two capitals in this way denote the plural number ; as, L. D. Lcgis Doctor : LL. D. Legum Doctor. t Kalends, or Calends, is derived from Calo, -are, to call. In the Infancy of Rome, a priest summoned the people together in the Capitol, on the first day of the month, or of the new moon, and called over the days that intervened between that and the Nones. In later times the Fasti, or Calendar, used to be put up in public places. The Nones [Nonce] are so called, because they are nine days from the Ides. Ides [Idas] from the obsolete verb Iduare, to divide, because they divide the month nearly equally. 312 DIVISION OP THE ROMAN MONTHS. Junius, Aprilis, SEPTEMque, NovEMque tricenos; Unum plus reliqui ; Februus tenet octo viginti ; At si bissextus luerit, superadd! tur unus. To primam mens is lucera die esse kalendas. Sex Maius, nonas October, Julius, et Mars, Quator at reliqui ; dabit id us quilibet octo. Omnes post idus luces die esse kalendas, IVomen sortiri debent a mense sequenti. Thus, the 14th day of ApnY, June, September, and November, was marked XVTII. Kal. of the following month ; the 15th, XVII. Kal. &c. The 14th day oi January, August, and December, XIX. Kal. &c. So the 16th day of March, May, July, and October, was marked XVII. Kal. &c. And the 14th day of February, XVI Kal. Martii or Martias. The names of all the months are used as Substantives or Ad- jectives, except Aprilis, which is used only as a Substantive. In Leap year, that is, when February has twenty-nine days, which happens every fourth year, both the 24th and the 25th days of that month were marked, Sexto Kalendas Martii, or Martias : and hence this year is called BissexLilis. TABLE. The day $ of our March, May. July and October January, .August and becember April, June, September and November, February has 28, and m Leap Year 29 days. months. (have 31 days.) (have also 31 days.) (30 days.) I Calendis. Calendis. Calendis. Calendis. 2 vn IV I ante III S Nonas. IV I ante III S Nonas. IV ) ante III^ Nonas. 3 V { ante 4 IV f Nonas. Pridie Nonas Pridie Nonas Pridie Nonas 5 Ill) Nonis. Nonis. Nonis. 6 rridie Nonas viin viin VIII" 7 Nonis. VII VII VII 8 9 viin VII VI V ante Idus. VI V ante Idtls. VI V • ante Idus. 10 11 VI V ' ante Idus. IV III J IV III IV III , 12 IV Pridie Idus. Prid e Idus. Pridie Idus. 13 III J Idibus. Id ibus. Idibus. 14 Pr die Idus. XIX ■ xviir xvn 15 Idibus. XVIII XVII § XV 16 xvir g XVII 1 XVI B XIV C3 17 XVI XVI o XV o XIII O 18 XV o XV I XIV 1- XII g 19 XIV XIV o XIII 3 XI a" 20 XIII § XIII G. XII § X 3 ■ r 21 XII D- XII g XI 'o IX 22 XI g XI ► % X ' ^ VIII 23 X • % X i IX i VII 24 IX a IX VIII g VI f 25 VIII o VIII o* VII V 26 VII g VII ^ VI g IV 27 VI VI 3 V § III J 28 . V o 1 V § IV B- 29 IV D IV B' "I . ^~' Prid. Calend. 30 "I F.i III j Martias. 31 " Prid. C^end. of Prid. Calend. of Prid. Calend. of the fol. month. the fol. month. the fol. month. ROMAN COINS. 313 The Roman manner of counting from a given point includes that point. Thus, the third before the Nones, that is before the fifth of the month, is not the second, as we should say, but the third. But if the point from which the reckoning is to be made, is the first of the following month, that is, the Calends, it is not enough to bring into computation the number of days of the current month, but the Calends must also be regarded in the subtraction; that is, the number of days of the current month must be increased by two for the minuend. Hence the following Rule. Add one to the number of the Nones and Ides, and two to the number of days in the month for the Calends, and then subtract the number of the day. Thus, to find the Roman date of the 21st of July, which has 31 days, add 2 = 33, and from this take 21, and the remainder is 12: hence the Roman date of the 21st of July is 12th Cal. Aug. OF THE RECKONING OF MONEY. 1. The Romans reckoned their Gold money by Greek Talents, their Silver money 't)y Denarii, and their Copper money by Asses. 2. The as was originally a pound of copper, but varied very much in its weight in different ages. The Denarius was the Greek Drachma, originally equal in value to ten asses, or about 15 cents of our money. The sestertius was one fourth of this, or two asses and a half {semis- tertius), and was hence denoted by 1 1 S, or H S. The sestertius was called emphatically nummus, as all large sums were reckoned in it, after the coining of silver money. 3. The neuter, sestertium, which denoted a sum and not a coin, was equal to a thousand sestertii. 4. In reckoning by asses, as the Romans carried their numbers only to centena millia (100,000), and formed higher numbers by adverbs, the words centena millia came to be left out, and only the numeral adverbs, decies, vicies, &c. used, with which centena millia is to be supplied. Thus decies ceris was decies centena millia assium ceris. 5. In reckoning by sesterces the neuter noun sestertium was joined with the numeral adverb, in the case required by the construction. Thus decies sestertium was decies centena millia sestertiorum (gen. plur. of sestertius), a million of sestertii. The adverb often stood alone ; thus, decies, vicies. There were, therefore, three forms, carefully to be distinguished from each other : — 1. the sestertius joined with the cardinal numbers, denoting a single nummus sestertius : — 2. the sester- tium joined in the plural with ordinals, denoting so many thousands of the nummi sestertii: — 3. the sestertium, joined in the singular only with numeral adverbs, denoting so many hundred sestertia, or hundred thousand sestertii. These three combinations were distinguished in writ- ing, thus ; HS. X. was decem sestertii; HS. X. decem sestertia; and HS. X. decies sestertium. But this distinction was not always observed, if our present MSS. of the classics are correct. 27 (314) TABLES ROMAN MEASURES, WEIGHTS, AND MONEYS. [ TABLE I. ] ROMAN MEASURES OF LENGTH. 1. Measures below the foot. ( Unit : Pes = 11.649 inch.) Sextula . n 18 72 Siciliquus Semiuncia . . . Digitus . 12 48 n 24 n 16 Uncia Palmus.. Pes. 12 lO. 100. 1000. ^eet. Inches. .16179 .24269 .48537 .72806 .97075 2.91225 11.649 9 97 970 8.49 0.9 9. [TABLE IL] ROMAN MEASURES OF LENGTI 2. Measures above the foot. Pes.. I. Miles. 1 . 9 . 91 . 919 Yds 1 3 38 1617 666 339 1631 476 Feet. .97075 1.21344 1.45612 2.42687 1.85375 0.7075 2.49 2.75 2.625 0.5 2. 2. n Palm n H Cubi ^us •••••••.«••••••*•• H 2 U Pes S^s^^'^i'ia s , ,,,, ,.,,,,,,, ■•■« 5 4 3i 2 Passu 10 8 6! 4 2 Decempeda 120 96 80 48 24 12 Actus 5000 4000 3333i 2000 1000 500 411 Milliare 7500 6000 5000 3000 1500 750 62^ n Leuga... 10 M . 100 1000 illiaria . . . do do KOMAN MEASURES OF CAPACITY. 315 MEASURES OF EXTENT. The chief measure of extent was the Jugerum, which was equal to 2 roods, 19 poles, and 187 feet, or about f of our acre. The other measures were the Sempulum, equal to 100 square feet ; the Sextulus, equal to 4 Sempula ; the Actus, equal to 1^ Sextulus ; and the Uncia, equal to 6 Sextuli. The square Actus was equal to half -a Jugerum. 316 ROMAN MEASURES OF CAPACITY. 19809 79236 18854 37707 75415 50829 06632 1 i 00 QD rH S5 ^ s ^O O i-H C^ rJ< 05 CO C^ l-H CO (N O O O O O O rH p-i o I-H i-i CO CO o o (N A -*■ S) rH fH o I-H ^-v CO t tH CO (N HH C^ o f-H 4 (N ^ CO < i -a (N Ph ^ < o r— 1 ^St^Sw^S^S 1 i-H CO 1 ^ o T-4 II 3 O W -^ 00 CC P. i i S i i-H n «2 CO g 1 .Si o GQ 3 A o 8 rH rH H < 1 u_i H S -* iz; rH CO CO ?— 1 s § ^ a fH 1 ^ CC ^ % s g I-; CQ *^ ROMAN WEIGHTS. 317 ^ irs. 10687 .32061 .64121 28242 ,56484 ,84726 ,12968 69452 ,38905 66855 ,85491 J 3 O OOfHiOQOC^ s ^ i-H CQ o i-H < i S - C^ lO rH (N Ti ^ CO i> rH W CD } CO CO CD (?^ 00 T^ r- . ri< O T^ J CD a D CC 5 CO O CC > 05 <3i CO CD . o 5J>in)OrHrHC^COi>lOO *i 2 (N 00 J> i-i (N O O QC) (7? aJ i> /"-s § bo rH rH C rH ■l A SB h cd Eh i ! t 1 — 1 53 00 : s >.* O ^ a • 1 W W 1 •* o T— 1 ,0 'Z H^ o iH g o 1 c r-i ~cs s \ o o li 1 5 c cc J K C^ r- cc s 1 i? *t -a (M •^ oc o •• 1 £ M Tt< rH CC cc ?2 1 "CJ CO ^ CC iH 4 g ^ r-^ ^ 1 QQ fH ' r^ T*< CO 00 rH ^ OC g ij C^ 00 2 1 a c5 c^ ^ 00 iH CO fH ^ ^ i i O fe [w CD rH ^ g 00 ?2 r-l 1 i iH a rH 27* 31^ ROMAN WEIGHTS. 02 r-n JH O > KH 05 o s ^1 I mJ ^ ^ •^ rh ^ -Si 3 •^ 00 CO JH »-l C^ _. CO S -^ CO CQ J^ o I— I iQ O CO l> i-H IC ■^ CO (TJ C4 r-H ^* O l> i-H 1> fH C^ CO CO Tf ■■ CO (T^ rH Gi OD i:^ CO C^ CO ci od OD O) O 1-1 1 I W3C^* f-I (N CO 00 1> CO 1-i ■5 O IQ C^ O 1-1 CO rH lO CO lO OD CO iO CO co' o OD -^ CO CO o 1— « rH ,-4 rH rH 1-4 c^con I— I 8 00 S S S % €& ^ CO rt< QC cc S cc (M CO 52 5S CD »: cc CC cc "^ oc t- CO (N o ;2^ c= r- QC »s OJ O) CO (N t! d — (M (71 c r- c5 c4 (Ti 1-5 pH P iH (M -^ QC o i-H Oi o ^ < 13 rH ^ S § i> t^ Oi r^ '^ S OQ fH i-t rH rH 1 TS 00 Oi 03 ^ 00 00 a5 S 3 •;2 1 — 1 >^ •p^ t^ ^ • QQ 42 m 3 ^'^ cq S ^ "2 > o CO § < 2 : 1 ■ s o s fH I— 1 <1 "So xi o c > 2 1 I • 3 i < S 1 1 o —Ism 00 II 1 1 E cc c o A ^ f S ;3 0) 1 1 Vl ■^ o o o I— ( lO •e«» s p C"? 2* K 3 rH S -§ 'a P ^ X (N SI o o rS < fH ^ '3 C^ •^ iO o o <-5 2 s rH (M S m c g (N Tjt , 00 o 8 % g 0) __H l-H 320 ROMAK MONErS. 1-4 pq O O 03 a£ S S S g J^ ^ S §§ g- § 1" t- lO o 00 i> ""^t* QD i> CO GO t rH CO CO «> S 12 6 5S 1 rH S i < o i-H CO e» o r-^ A % 3 a ^ < ^ ^ I— I to g2 § J^ ?2 i-H (M l^ rH o o o • o rH O THE END. *l (r' s_-^ ^* r- 30 O m > H C 3 m J} Z 3 ■ ■ -^ -^ o N> IRCULATION DE 98 Main Stacks CO - rr 2 ?B 00295 U.C.BERKELEY LIBRARIES C0MS13111S 337 %0 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY IV / ^